;n,v 


^^f^^^^""  — 


.  ^r^H-tet<^^  ^^*tt     -• 


// 
4 


?^' 


^v 


*<' 


6.2.8- 


Srom  i^t  &i6rarg  of 

(pxoftBBOx  Wiffidm  J^tnx^  &xccn 

tgtqntaf^t^  6g  ^im  to 
f ^e  feifirarg  of 

(Princeton  S^eofo^tcaf  ^emindrjj 


r 


C^l^^O- 


AN 


ELEMENTARY 


HEBEEW  GEAMMAE, 


WITH 


llcabing  anij  Writing  l^cssons  iiuir  Hotabularus. 


BY 


WILLIAM   HENEY  GEEEN, 

PROFESSOR    IN    THE    THEOLOGICAL    SEMINARY    AT    PRINCETON,   NEW    JERSEY. 


NEW  EDITION,  THOROUGHLY  CORRECTED. 


NEW  YORK: 

JOHN  WILEY  &   SONS,  PUBLISHEES, 

53  East  Tenth  Street. 

1890. 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1S71. 

By  WILLIAM  HENRY  GREEX. 

In  the  Office  of  the  Librarian  of  Congress,  at  Washington. 


PREFACE. 


Tms  brief  Manual  has  been  prepared  witli  special 
reference  to  the  Tvants  of  beginners.  The  essential 
facts  of  the  language  are  concisely  stated,  without  the 
encumbrance  of  minute  details,  which  would  confuse 
their  minds  and  impede  their  progress,  and  which  be- 
long properly  to  a  more  advanced  stage  of  study. 
The  tabular  form  has  been  adopted  to  as  great  an 
extent  as  possible,  in  order  to  exhibit  to  the  eye  what- 
ever is  capable  of  such  a  mode  of  representation. 
The  Reading  Exercises,  which  are  of  the  simplest  kind, 
have  been  carefully  selected  mth  a  view  to  illustrate 
the  forms  and  uses  of  different  parts  of  speech,  and 
especially  the  various  classes  of  perfect  and  imperfect 
verbs ;  and  they  are  accompanied  by  a  special  Voca- 
Ijulary. 

It  will,  as  is  hoped,  meet  the  wants  of  non-profes- 
sional students  who  seek  a  general  knowledge  of  this 
venerable  and  sacred  tonsiue  rather  than  a  thorous'h 
acquaintance  "U'ith  it,  and  who  might  be  repelled  by  a 
larger  and   more   costly   apparatus.      It   is   sufficiently 


IV  PKEFACE. 

sim}3le  for  private  study,  as  well  as  adapted  for  use  in 
schools  and  colleges  where  facilities  are  offered  for  the 
acquisition  of  the  Hebrew.  The  author  will  be  re- 
joiced if  this  humble  v^olume  should  tend  in  any  wa} 
to  a  more  extended  familiarity  with  the  original  lan- 
guage of  the  Old  Testament  among  intelligent  aiu) 
liberally  educated  laymen. 

Princeton,  August  22,  180(1 . 


PKEFAOE 

TO    THE     SECOND     EDITION 


The  Grammar  has  been  entirely  rewritten,  with  a  riow 
to  adapt  it  more  fully  to  the  wants  of  those  for  whom  it 
is  intended.  In  doing  this,  the  writer  has  had  the  benefit 
of  practical  suggestions  from  some  of  the  best  Hebrew 
teachers  in  various  parts  of  the  country,  among  whom  he 
is  particularly  indebted  to  Prof.  Hoyt,  of  Ohio  Wesleyau 
University,  Delaware,  Ohio.  The  paradigms  are,  as  in 
the  previous  edition,  combined  together  in  Grammatical 
Tables,  which  afford  a  complete  survey  of  all  the  forms 
of  the  language.  But  for  the  greater  convenience  of  the 
student  a  number  of  the  paradigms  are  inserted  in  the 
text  of  the  Grammar  likewise,  and  in  some  of  the  earlier 
of  these  the  pronunciation  is  also  given  in  Roman  letters, 
to  relieve  the  labor,  and  prevent  the  mistakes  incident  to 
an  imperfect  acquaintance  with  the  characters.  A  more 
complete  system  of  exercises  both  in  Hebrew  reading 
and  composition  has  been  provided  throughout,  and  the 
greatest  pains  have  been  •  taken  to  make  them  stiictly 
progressive  in  their  character.  No  grammatical  form  or 
construction  is  admitted  into  the  lessons  until  this  has 


VI  PEEFAOE    TO    THE    SECOi^B    EDITION. 

first  been  explained.     In  the  orthography  these  exercises 
are  inserted  in  the  text  of  the  Grammar  in  order  that  the, 
eye  of  the  student,  perplexed  by  the  strange  forms  of 
unfamiliar  characters,  may  readily  pass  from  the  rules  oi' 
principles  to  theii^  application.     The  exercises  in  trans 
lation,  whether  from  Hebrew  into  English  or  fi-om  Eng. 
lish  into  Hebrew,  are,  as  in  the  former  edition,  removed 
to  the  end  of  the  volume.     A  special  vocabulary,  num- 
bered to  Correspond  with  each  successive  lesson,  contains 
all  words  not  previously  learned,  while  their  separation 
upon  different  pages  is  designed  to  counteract  the  temp- 
tation  to   negligence,   which    would  arise   from   having 
these  significations  before  the  eye  in  the  very  act  of 
recitation.     It  is  assumed  that  all  words  are  mastered  as 
the  student  proceeds,  so  that  they  are  never  repeated  in 
the  special  vocabularies.      General   vocabularies   follow 
both  Hebrew-English  and  English-Hebrew,  which   con- 
tain every  word  to  be  found  in  any  of  the  lessons.     The 
principles    of    Syntax    successively   illustrated    in    the 
lessons,  or  necessar}^  to  be  known  in  order  to  their  proper 
understanding,  are  supplied  in  accompanying  Remarks  or 
Directions.      The  learner  is  thus  gradually  familiarized 
with  the  practical  application  of  nearly  all  the  important 
principles  of  Syntax    before    he  conies   to   study  them 
together  in  systematic  order, 

Pkinckton,  October  11,  1871. 


C  O  N  T  E  :N^  T  S  . 


PAGE 

Orthography.  §  31. 

§  1.  The  Lett  n-s 1  §  32. 

§  3.  Their  Classification 3  §  33. 

g  3.  The  Yowel-Letters 5  §  34. 

§  4.   The  Vowel-Points 5 

§5.   Sh'va 6  §35. 

§  6.  Pattahh-furtive 7 

§  7.  Quiescence    of    the    Vowel-  §  36. 

Letters ^ 

§  8.  Scriptio  plena  and  defectiva  9  §  37. 

§9.   SyUables  10 

§  10.  Resulting  Vowel-changes.  . .  12  §  38. 
^  11.  Kamets     and     Kamets-Hha- 

tuph 13  §39. 

§  12.  Daghesh-lene 14  §  40. 

§  13.  Daghesh-forte 15 

§  14.  Mappik 15  §  41. 

§15.  Raphe 16  §43. 

§  16.   Accents 16  §  43. 

g  17.  Position  of  the  Accent 17  §  44. 

§  18.  Recession  of  the  Accent 18  §  45. 

§  19.  Pause  Accents 18 

§  20.  Consecution  of  Accents 19  §  4G. 

§21.  Makkeph 20  §47. 

§  23.   Methegh 20  §  48. 

I  23.  K'ri  and  K'thibh 21  §  49. 

§50. 

Etymology.  k  g^ 

§  24.  Prefixed  Particles 23  §  52. 

§  25.  The  Ai-ticle. 23  §  53. 

§  26.  He  Interrogative ."  24  §  54. 

§  27.  Inseparable  Prepositions 25  §  55. 

§  28.   Vav  Conjunctive 25  §  56. 

§  29.   Personal  Pronouns 26  §  57. 

S  30.  Other  Pronouns 28  ^58. 


Verbs.     Their  Species 29 

Perfect  Verbs 30 

Kal  Preterite  and  Infinitives  31 
Niphal,  Piel,  and  Pual  Pre- 
terites and  Infinitives. ...  33 
The  remaining  Preterites  and 

Infinitives 34 

Kal  Future,  Imperative,  and 

Participles 35 

Niphal,   Piel,  and  Pual   Fu- 
tures, etc 37 

Hiphil,    Hophal,    and  Hith- 

pael  Futures,  etc 39 

Peculiar  Forms 40 

Paragogic    and    Ajjocopated 

Future  and  Imperative ...  41 

Vav  Conversive 42 

Verbs  with  Suffixes 48 

Gender  and  Number  of  Nouns  45 

Feminine,  Dual,    and  Plural  46 
Dual  and  Plural  in  Feminine 

Nouns 49 

Construct  State 50 

Its  Formation 51 

Paragogic  Vowels 52 

Nouns  with  Sufiixes 53 

IiTegular  Nouns.    55 

Imperfect  Verbs 56 

Guttural  Verbs 57 

Pe  Guttural  Verbs 57 

Ayin  Guttural  Verbs 58 

Lamedh  Guttural  Verbs.    .  59 

Pe  Nun  Verbs 60 

Ayin  Doubled  Verbs 61 

Pe  Yodh  Verbs 63 


nil 


CONTENTS. 


PAGE 

§  59.  Ay  in  Vav    and    Ayin   Yodh 

Verbs 64 

§  60.  Lamedh  Aleph  Verbs.    65 

§  61.  Lamedh  He  Verbs 66 

§  62.  Doubly  Imperfect  Veios. ...  68 

§  63.  Unusual  Forms 68 

§  64,   Quadriliteral  Verbs 69 

^  65.  Numerals 69 

§  66.   Separate  Particles 70 

« 
Syntax. 

§67.  The  Copula 71 

§68.   The  Article 71 

§  69.  Nouns  definite   without  the 

Article 73 

§  70.  Adjectives 73 

§  71 .  Demonstrative  Pronouns. ...  73 

g  73.   Comparison  of  Adjectives. . .  73 

§73.  Numerals 73 

§  74.  Apposition 74 

§  75.  The  Constract  State 74 

§  76.  Tenses  of  Verbs 75 

§77.  The  Preterite 75 

§  78.   The  Future 76 

§  79.  The  Secondary  Tenses 77 

§80.  Participles 77 

§  81.   The  Infinitive 78 

§  83.   Object  of  Verbs 78 

§  83.  Verbs  with  more   than   one 

Object 79 

§  84.   Adverbial  Expressions 79 

g  85.  Neglect  of  Agreement 79 

§  86.   Compound  Subject 80 

g  87.  Repetition  of  Words 81 

§88.  Relative  Pronouns 81 

2  89.  Conjunctions 31 


PAO* 

Grammatical  Tables. 

I.   The  Letters 83 

II.  Classification  of   the   Let- 
ters.    The  Points 84 

III.  The  Accents 85 

IV.  Inseparable      Prepositions 

and  other  Prefixes 8() 

V.  Pronouns.        Verbs,    their 

Species 87 

VL  Paradigm  of  Perfect  Verbs,     88 
VII.   Paradigm   of  the    Perfect 

Verbs  with  Suffixes 90 

VIII.  Paradigm   of  Pe   Guttural 

Verbs 93 

IX.   Paradigm  of  Ayin  Guttural 

Verbs 93 

X.  Paradigm  of  Lamedh  Gut- 
tural Verbs 94 

XI.  Paradigm  of  Pe  Nun  Verbs    95 
XII.  Paradigm  of  Ayin  Doubled 

Verbs 96 

XIII.  Paradigm  of  Ayin  Vav  and 

Ayin  Yodh  Verbs 98 

XIV.  Paradigm  of  Pe  Yodh  Verbs  100 
XV.  Paradigm  of  Lamedh  Aleph 

Verbs 101 

XVI.  Paradigm   of  Lamedh   He 

Verbs 102 

XVII.  Declension  of  Nouns 104 

XVIII.   Paradigm   of   Nouns   with 

Suffixes 107 

XIX.  Numerals 108 

XX.  Consecution  of  Accents...   109 

Lessons  in  Reading  Hebrew.,  Ill 

Lessons  in  Writing  Hebrew.  . .  137 

Hebrew-English  Vocabulary.  .  175 

English- Hebrew  VocABiTLABY. .  186 


ELEMENTARY   HEBREW    GRAMMAR. 


ORTHOGRAPHY 


1.     The  Letters. 


1.  The  Hebrew  lias  twenty -two  letters ;  these  are  all 
consonants,  and  are  wi'itten  from  riglit  to  left. 

1.  Alepli  «  12.  La'medli       ^  L 

2.  Beth  ^  Bh,  B  13.  Mem         D  la  M 

3.  Gi'rael  y  Gh,  G  14.  Nun  1  3  N 

4.  Da'leth  n  Dh,  D  15.  Sa'mekh       D  S 


5.  He  n  H  16.  A'yin  ^ 

6  Vav  1  V  17.  Pe  q  S  Ph,  P 

7.  Zayin  T  Z  18.  TsaVlhe  f  ^  Ts 

8.  Hheth  n  Hh  19.  Koph  p  K 

9.  Teth  t3  T  20.  Resh  n  R 
10.  Yodh  -^  Y  21.  Shin  w  Sh,  S 
n.  Kaph  ID  Kh,  K      22.  Tav  n  Th,  T. 

a.  For  the  proper  pronunciation  of  the  vowels  occurring  in  the  names  of  tJie 
ietiers,  see  §  4.  1.  a. 

2.  There  are  two  letters,  for  ^N'hich  no  equivalent  i^ 
given  in  the  preceding '  table ;  «  like  the  English  h  in 
hour  or  the  smooth  breathing  in  Greek  had  no  sound;  5 
had  a  strong  guttural  sound,  but  one  which  it  is  so  difii- 
^^ult  to  make,  that  it  is  commonlv  neglected  in  reading. 


2  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  ] 

3.  For  seven  of  the  letters  two  equivalents  are  given 
Thus,  the  six  aspirates  have  also  an  unaspirated  sound 
which  is  indicated  by  a  point  in  the  bosom  of  the  letter, 
§  12;  a  is  hli  or  v  and  ^i  h ;  '^  gh,  5  ^;  "i  dh  as  tli  in  the^ 
■^  dj  3  M  as  the  German  ch  in  icli^  3  h;  S  ^j>A  or  f\  &j?; 
'c\  ifi  as  in  tliin^  T\  t  As,  however,  there  are  no  sounds 
in  English  corresponding  to  gh  and  M,  S  may  be  pro- 
nounced ^  like  5,  and  ^  h  like  3.  The  letter  ffi  Avith  a 
dot  over  its  right  arm  has  tlie  sound  of  sli^  and  is  called 
Shin;  to  with  a  dot  over  its  left  arm  is  called  Sin^  and 
is  pronounced  like  s. 

4.  In  three  instances  two  letters  have  the  same  equi- 
valent; thus  12  and  r\  are  represented  by  t^  2  and  p  by 
h,  0  and  to  by  s.  These  letters,  though  pronounced 
alike  by  us,  are  nevertheless  quite  distinct  and  must  not 
be  confounded. 

5.  n  and  2  require  a  doubled  letter  or  two  letters 
combined  to  represent  them;  n  is  the  simple  /^,  n  has  a 
stronger  sound  as  of  ras]:)ing  the  throat,  and  is  represent- 
ed by  lih ;  2  is  ts  in  sits. 

6.  Fiye  of  the  letters  have  two  forms;  D  ,  IQ  ,  3  ,  s,  2 
(combined  in  the  memorial  word  fsiias  himncqypets^  are 
used  in  the  beginning  or  in  the  middle  of  words;  at  the 
end  of  words  the  bottom  stroke  is  bent  downward,  T  ,  'J  , 
51  ;  f  ,  or  the  letter  closed  up.  D. 


EXERCISE   1. 
Hebrew  words  must  never  be  divided  at  the  end  of  a  liuc. 

Write  the  letters  of  the  alphabet  in  their  order,  with 
their  names  and  eqiuvalents. 

Write  tlie  follo^^dng  words  or  comljinations  of  letterSj 
placing  undei*  each  its  equivalent: — 


g   2.  LETTERS.  3 

Pe-gimel  Nim-samekli-kapli  Siii-tetli-nun  Ayin-daletli 
Kapli-lamedL  Yodli-mem-yodli  He-aleph-resh-tsadlie  Za- 
yin-resli-ayin  Koph-tsadlie-yodli-resli  Hlietli-mem  Hheth- 
resh-pe  Lamedli-alepli  Yodli-sliin-beth-tav-vav. 

Name  tlie  letters  in  Genesis  i.  1-3  on  page  133,  and  giv^e 
the  equivalent  of  eacL 

§  2.     Their  Classification. 

The  letters  may  be  divided, 

1.  First,  with  respect  to  the  organs  by  which  they  are 
pronounced,  into  five  classes,  viz..  Gutturals  or  those 
which  represent  a  sound  produced  in  the  throat ;  Palatals 
formed  by  pressing  the  root  of  the  tongue  against  the 
posterior  roof  of  the  mouth ;  Lingual  s  formed  by  the  tip 
of  the  tongue  in  contact  with  the  anterior  roof  of  the 
mouth;  Dentals  formed  by  the  air  driven  against  the 
teeth ;  and,  Labials  formed  by  the  lips. 


Gutturals 

i( 

n 

n 

V 

(3?nns 

ahfhlut) 

Palatals 

5 

1 

D 

P 

(PT^. 

(fthhah) 

Lingua]  s 

T 

D 

b 

3     n 

(^?^9^ 

(latleneth) 

Dentals 

T 

0 

22 

TS 

(irsoT 

zastsash) 

Labials 

n 

^ 

12 

s 

(q^^3 

humaph) 

n  though  not  properly  a  guttural  may  be  classed  with 
them,  as  it  partakes  of  their  peculiarities. 

2.  Secondly,  into  weak,  medium,  and  strong.  Tiie 
weak  consonants  suffer  or  occasion  frequent  changes  in 
the  fo]-mation  and  inflection  of  words.  The  strong  con- 
sonants are  capable  of  entering  without  change  into  any 
combinations   whicli    analogy   may  require.      Those   of 


4  OKTHOGEAPUY.  §  2 

medium  strength  are  neither  so  stable  as  the  latter,  nor 
so  feel)le  and  fluctuating  as  the  former. 


Weak 


n     1     ■•  Vowel-Letters. 
!"•     n     y  Gutturals. 


Medium     P     ^      =     "^  Liquids. 
(  T     D     r    ID  Sibilants. 


Strong      J  a      ^     Pf  Aspirates  and  Mutes. 


3.  Thirdly,  with  respect  to  the  function  which  the}' 
perform  in  the  constitution  of  words,  into  radicals  and 
serviles.  The  former,  which  comprise  just  one-half  of 
the  alphabet,  are  only  used  in  the  roots  or  radical  portions 
of  words.  The  latter,  though  they  may  also  enter  into 
roots,  are  likewise  employed  in  the  inflection  of  words, 
and  the  formation  of  derivatives,  in  prefixes  and  suffixes. 
The  serviles  are  embraced  in  the  memorial  words  "jriw 
nboi  nttj^  {ethd7i  mdshe  v'lchelehh,  Ethan,  Moses,  and 
Caleb).     All  the  other  letters  are  radicals,  viz.  a  ,  T  ,  T , 


EXERCISE  2. 

Write  the  letters  of  each  class  with  their  names  and 
equivalents. 

Write  the  following  letters,  and  indicate  the  class  to 
which  each  belongs  in  respect  of  organ,  strength,  and 
function : — 

Aleph,  Lamedh,  He,  Shin,  Mem,  Vav,  Tav,  Beth,  Nun, 
Yodh,  Gimel,  Daleth,  Eesh,  Tsadhe,  Ayin,  Koph,  Kaph, 
Bamekh,  Pe,  Zayin,  Ilheth,  Teth. 


§J^  3.  4. 


VOWELS. 


§  3.     The    Vowel-Letters. 

Tliei'e  were  originally  no  separate  signs  for  the  vowels 
in  Hebrew.  Tliey  were  either  not  written  at  all,  or 
when  it  was  thouglit  necessary  to  express  them,  the 
vowel-letters  ( '^ri^  elifv'i)  were  employed  for  this  pur- 
pose. Thus  "^  was  used  to  signify  not  only  y  but  also  I 
and  e;  *\  stood  for  b  and  u;  s  or  n  for  c/,  and  in  some 
cases  for  e  or  6 ;  e  Avas  also  sometimes  represented  by  "^ 
or  H;  the  other  short  vowels  were  scarcely  ever  wiitten. 
Thus  V^  ^^^^^  or  J>hi;  Dip  Iwm  or  Ivum;  nb^  gala^  ^f/^6>,  cfl'e 
or  gble ;  HD'^nt'n  fsjidhlthia. 


§  4.     The    Vowel-Foints. 

1.  After  the  Hebrew  ceased  to  be  spoken,  a  more  com- 
plete method  of  Avriting  the  vo^vels  was  needed,  in  order 
to  indicate  the  exact  pronunciation  of  words.  With  this 
view  the  vowel-points  were  invented.  Of  tliese  three 
represent  long,  three  short,  and  three  doubtful  vowels. 


Long  Vowels. 

Short  Vowels. 

Doubtful 

Vowels. 

Ka'nu'ts      _     a 

T 

Pat'tahh                 _^  a 

Hhr'rik    _ 

I  or  % 

Tse're         __      e 

Se'gliol                   _  e 

Shu'rek     1 

]-        - 

Hlio'lem    —      0 

Kamets-Hhatuph—  o 

Kil/buts_ 

Vu  OY  U 

a.  The  vowel  a  is  pronounced  as  in.  fatlier,  a  as  in  fat,  e  as  in  there^  e  as  in  rn-^t 
!  as  in  macMne.,  ^  as  in  pin.,  o  as  in  note,  6  as  in  7iot^  il  as  in  7'idfi,  u  as  in  fuU 
Tlie  quantity  -w-iH  be  marked  when  the  vowels  are  long,  but  not  T/hen  they  arc 
short. 

2.  All  the  vowels  are  written  under  the  letter  aftei 
which  they  are  pronounced,  except  two,  viz.  Hholem  and 
Shurek 

3.  Hholem  is  placed  over  the  left  edge  of  the  letter  to 


li  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  5 

which  it  belongs.  When  followed  by  to  or  piececled  b} 
iy  it  coincides  with  the  diacritical  point  over  the  letter 
e.  g.  mr'a  7)idshe,  i^i^  sorie,'  when  it  follows  12  or  precedes 
TC  it  is  written  over  its  opposite  arm  e.  g.  "i /b'*!^ ,  iisiJ?  tirpos 
Accordingly,  if  an  unpointed  consonant  precede  (i.  e.  one 
vs  ithout  a  vowel  or  Sh'va,  §  5)  tswill  be  osli  and  in  6s;  \i 
it  have  itself  no  other  vowel  point  to  will  be  so  and  to  slio^ 
except  at  the  end  of  words. 

4.  Shnrek  is  a  dot  in  the  bosom  of  the  letter  Vav. 
Whien  there  is  a  1  in  the  text,  the  vowel  u,  whether  long 
or  short,  is  indicated  by  a  single  dot  within  it,  and  called 
Shurek;  in  the  absence  of  l  it  is  indicated  by  three  dots 
placed  obliquely  beneath  the  letter  to  which  it  belongs, 
and  called  Kibbuts. 

EXERCISE  3. 

The  place  of  Aleph  will  be  indicated  in  this  and  in  following  exercises  by  *,  and 
that  of  Ayin  by  f.  Teth,  Koph,  and  Sin  will  be  denoted  by  a  dot  beneath  the 
letter,  t,  k,  s. 

Write  the  long,  short,  and  doubtful  vowels  with  their 
names  and  equivalents. 

Write:  Zahabh,  lehhem,  rS,bh,  yet,  khol,  kol,  khamus. 
famal,  me^oyebh,  sho*el,  soleth,  fim,  *t3th,  bhttyith, 
shorflshim,  yaruts,  shophet,  shalosh,  soraph,  ])li6s6m. 

Read  the  follo^ving  words,-  and  give  the  names  and 
equivalents  of  the  vowels  which  they  contain. 

.  to'p   ,  n'tobto  ,  Dij:  ,  "Ty-'-   ,  yry'   ,  pHto  ,  ^t*i  ,  »»5 

*  Kamets-Hhatuph. 

§  5.      SJi^va. 

1.  ShVii  —  is  placed  under  vowelless  consonants  to 
indicate  the  absence  of  a  vowel,  e.  g.  '^ris^'o^  mamlakML 


g  6  SH'VA,    PAITAIIII    FUllTIVE.  7 

At  tlie  end  of  words,  liowever,  it  is  omitted :  '?  (not  ^2) 
hal,  "^^b  (not  "^^b )  soger^  unless  tlie  last  letter  is  1  or  is 
immediately  preceded  by  another  vowelless  letter,  or  is 
doubled  by  Dagliesli-forte,  §  13,  l^vq  melehh,  tpirp  hosht^ 
ns  att. 

2.  When  a  syllable  begins  with  two  consonants  a  slight 
sound  is  heard  between  them,  as  in  English  between  the 
last  two  consonants  of  giv'' 7i^  lieav'n;  thus  ^'p'^  p'hddh^  ^"la 
Fril^  not  hrii.  ShVa  is,  therefore,  said  to  be  silent  at  the 
end  of  syllaljles,  but  vocal  at  the  beginning. 

3.  Sometimes,  particularly  after  the  gutturals,  this  tran- 
sition sound  resemldes  an  extremely  short  «,  e,  or  o.  It  is 
then  represented  by  the  compound  Sh'v^as,  which  are 
formed  by  combining  the  sign  for  simple  Sli'va  already 
explained  with  that  for  Pattahh,  Seghol,  or  Kamets- 
Hhatuph,  as  the  case  may  be, 

^  -,  (  Hhateph-Pattahh  —  ;  thus  'r\T\    Ifroqh 

Compound  )  ^^-  i  m     i    i  i  •       ,        i 

Sh  vas     1  -H-hatepn-heghol    -^._ ;  tluis  n"T'r|  h^ydt/i. 

\  Hhateph-Kamets  —  ;  thus  "hn    liWll. 

§  6.     Pattalih-furtive. 

Pattahh-furtive  is  a  scarcely  audible  «,  which  steals  iii 
before  the  letter  under  which  it  is  wi'itten.  It  occurs 
with  y,  n  or  the  consonant  !^  at  the  end  of  words, 
when  preceded  by  a  long  vowel  other  than  a.  or  followed 
b}'  another  vowelless  consonant,  ii'i^  gdbhff%  nnjP*? 
laka'^liht     Comp.  in  English  ^r^,  pronoimced^V. 

EXERCISE  4. 

Write  the  different  Sh'vas  and  Pattahh-furtive  with 
their  names  and  equivalents. 


S  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  7 

Write  the  fo]lo\^'ing  words,  and  wlierever  Pattalib 
furtive  lias  been  improi^erly  omitted,  make  the  requisite 
correction : 

Sh'nayim,  thi'nu,  y'dhekhem,  h'^agham^  y'hosliii*'!',  *^loh. 
m6f°madh,  Idnl/sher,  milhhamoth,  bh'simhhathkhcmjle^s^.''- 
khol,  z'bhiil,  y^f^lehu,  samehh,  s'bhibhoth^yikh,  rakif, 
dh'glutth,  yest. 


§   7.     Quiescence  of  the    Yoioel-Letters. 

1.  The  vowel-points  above  described  were  attached  to 
the  sacred  text  without  any  change  in  its  letters.  Con 
sequently  every  vowel,  which  had  previously  been  indi- 
cated by  a  vowel-letter,  was  now  denoted  both  by  that 
and  by  the  sign  subsequently  added.  In  all  sucli  cases 
the  letter  is  said  to  quiesce  in  the  vowel,  that  is,  it  has 
not  its  consonant  sound,  but  the  vowel-sound  represented 
by  the  accompanying  or  preceding  point.  Thus  in  lis 
Vav  stands  not  for  v  l^ut  for  (),  and  the  word  is  read  hbr ; 
in  nVa  ,  n  represents  not  li  but  <2,  and  the  word  is  gala. 

2.  At  the  beo-innino;  or  in  the  middle  of  a  Avord  tlie 
letters  s  n  n  "^  are  consonants,  if  they  are  followed  by 
a  voAvel  or  a  Sli'va;  if  not  so  followed,  they  are  quies- 
cent: riib  love,  i^i?  shjo,  but  til^  mi.i^  n^'2  hetli. 

3.  At  the  end  of  words  1  is  quiescent  when  preceded 
by  6  or  /?,  and  "^  ^vhen  preceded  by  e  or  I;  but  they  are 
consonants  if  preceded  by  any  other  vowel  sign,  "Vi  lihe. 
•^a  hi,  but  Ti  lihay,  ""ia  goy. 

Final  n  is  quiescent,  unless  it  has  Mappik,  §  14,  TV^l^A 
artsd,  ])ut  ^^^'7^?  artsali. 

Final  X  is  invariably  quiescent,  if  a  vowel  precedes : 
Kb  If'^  S3  Iki'^  but  if  a  vowelless  consonant  precedes,  it  is 
♦•^ejuied  otiant:  i^i'il  vayyar. 


A  8.  VOWEJ.-I.ETTEU8.  9 

a.  It  may  be  observed  that  s  quiesces  in  a  multitude  of  cases,  where  it  is  nol 
proi>erly  a  vowel-letter,  which,  in  fact,  it  rarely  is.  Its  feebleness  is  such  that  it 
Rcaj.-<icly  ever  temiiaates  a  mixed  syllable.  Such  forms  as  si^^'itj;;'  do  occur;  but 
js  mostly  loses  its  consoiiautal  power  at  the  end  of  a  syllable,  whatever  the  pre- 
cedino-  vowel  may  be.  Yodh  similarly  gives  up  its  consonantal  character  in  the 
termination  i-i  ,  or  at  least  is  neglected  in  the  pronunciation,  thus  l^'l^T 
d'bhdrdv,  ",iji'  u'/iuv. 


EXERCISE  5, 

Pronounce  the  following  words,  and  apply  the  rules 
for  tlie  quiescence  of  the  vowel-letters. 

.  i^ni:3  ,  "'niia  ,  ninnirn  ,  ri^-jf 

'  The  Shurek  is  regarded  as  belonging  to  the  ^  ,  and  wS  is  quiescent.  "  ish,  not 
iyush.  ^  The  Hholera  belongs  not  to  the  n  ,  which  has  Sh'va,  but  to  the  1 ;  thp 
word  is  hence  to  be  read  edKvoth. 


§  8.     8cri])tio  jplena  and  defectiva. 

1.  Vowels,  which  are  indicated  both  by  a  vowel-letter 
and  by  a  vowel-point,  are  said  to  be  written  fully,  as  in 
ninis  otliutli^  rrt-ht  sJiaUshhn,  r.^w  7m(th  ;  those,  for  which 
^  vowel-letter  might  have  been  employed,  but  which  are 
i^xprcssed  by  the  points  only,  are  said  to  be  written 
defectively,  as  nns  ,  uwbw  ,   n^  . 

2.  As  letters  were  rarely  used  to  represent  the  short 
vowels,  §  3,  ti  and  i,  when  written  fully,  are  almost 
always  long,  e.  g.  ^3\^  llml;  when  written  defectively, 
they  may  be  either  long  or  short,  e.  g.  wy_  ylrash,  "in^ 
yililiar^  Wibn  tdwmh.  DSif'a  muMrihli. 

1*^ 


10  OKTHOGKAPHY. 


EXERCISE  6. 

Precision  iii  the  employmeut  of  the  vowel-letters  can  only  be  attained  by  prac- 
tice and  a  knowledge  of  forms.  For  the  present  the  following  general  rules  will 
suiHce  : 

Write  e  and  i  with  Yodh  and  o  and  ii  with  Vav  at  the  end  of  words  ;  elsewhere 
fcbey  may  be  written  \vith  or  without  the  vowel-letters  at  discretion. 

Write  d  and  e  mthout  a  vowel-letter  except  at  the  end  of  words,  where  a  maj 
and  e  must  be  represented  by  He. 

In  the  following  words,  wi'ite  the  vowels  both  fully  and 
defectively,  wherever  both  forms  are  admissible : — 

Zu,  nircish,  *6tho,  yashobh,  lanii,  ze,  bho,  hekimii, 
yamush,  moshe,  bhiil,  yalviitsii,  *abhmu,  hd,fidhothI 
m^yim,   *aven,    me,   me,   mi,  yamoth,    yamoth,    luhhoth, 


shiibh,  min,  hushhtkh. 


§  9.     Syllables. 
1.  Two  vowels  can  never  come  tos^ether  in  the  same 


o 


word  in  Hebrew  without  an  intervening  consonant,  and 
hence  tliere  can  never  be  more  than  one  vowel  in  the 
same  syllable. 

2.  Every  syllable  except  initial  1  must  begin  with  a 
consonant,  and  may  begin  with  two,  but  never  with  more 
than  two. 

3  Syllables  ending  with  a  vowel  are  called  simple, 
np  md,T\tpy^  li^'he-mo-thd  ;  those  ending  with  a  consonant, 
or,  as  is  possible  at  the  close  of  a  word,  witli  two  con- 
sonants, are  said  to  be  mixed,  DPniaTCS  nish-7nar-tem,  ^'i'}} 
nerd. 

4.  As  Pattahli-fui'tive  and  the  vocal  Sh'vas,  whether 
simple  or  compound,  are  not  vowels  but  involuntary 
transition  sounds,  tliey  with  the  consonants  under  which 
they  stand  cannot  form  syllables;  Pattahh-furtive  is 
accordingly  attached  to  that  of  the  preceding  vowel,  and 


^  9.  SYLLABLES.  1 1 

tlie  vocal  Sh'vas  to  tliat  of  the  following  vowel;    thus 
?iiT  rhb". 

5.  Unaccented  simple  syllables  always  contain  long 
vowels,  and  unaccented  mixed  syllables  short  vcAvels, 
But  an  accented  syllable,  whether  simple  or  mixed,  may 
contain  indifferently  a  long  or  a  short  vowel. 

6.  A  letter  with  simple  Sh'va  in  the  body  of  a  word 
may  either  end  or  begin  a  syllable.  If  it  is  preceded  by 
another  Sh'va  or  by  an  unaccented  long  vowel,  it  belongs 
to  the  following  syllable,  ^'nsTn  tiz-lSru,  '''niT  zb-Mr'e' ;  if 
by  a  short  vowel  or  by  an  accented  long  vowel  it  ia 
mostly  attached  to  the  preceding  syllal^le,  wcn  lihas-clo. 
r\ydp  l\mi-nd;  if  it  be  doubled  by  Daghesh-forte,  §  13. 
the  first  of  the  two  consonants  into  which  it  is  resolved 
is  connected  with  the  preceding  and  the  second  with  the 
follovnng  syllable,  ^lin?  yit-inu. 

7.  Sometimes  a  consonant  which  is  not  doubled  belongs 
in  a  measure  to  two  syllables,  completing  that  which  pre- 
cedes and  beo:innina:  that  which  follows.  In  this  case 
the  former  syllable  is  strictly  speaking  neither  simple 
nor  mixed,  but  may  be  denominated  intermediate,  thus 
in  ^;i'?nr!  tajui^r''glui'  and  ^icp?^^  'vdy''hhah\shu  for  vay- 
i/bhah-Fshf/,  the  first  two  are  intermediate  syllables. 

a.  Consonants  which  stand  in  this  equivocal  relation  are  such  as  remain  single 
wrhen  analogy  would  require  them  to  be  doubled,  idpS';'!)  for  !i r  133^1  ,  ^p?? 
f/bhd-Ml  for  y^bhdh-Mi  ;  or  have  a  vocal  Sh'va  or  a  vowel  when  they  might  be 
expected  to  have  a  silent  Sh'va,  fi'jnnm  for  !;':\"ir!n  tah-r^ghii ;  or  are  preceded  by  a 
short  vowel  which  has  arisen  from  Sh'va,  nj;ri  for  n^n  ^  n:"T2  buVi'ghathioi 
rj'ia  ,  ~^fn"  for  "r'^.']  ,  C'lJ'^i^  ko-dhdsfnm,  for  Ciliinp  .  Also  when  the  same 
consonant  is  immediately  repeated  in  the  same  word  the  intervening  Sh'va  in 
made  vocal  in  order  to  give  distinctness  to  the  reduplication   e.  g.  iVbii  tsWlo, 

EXERCISE  7. 

Writ<3  the  following  words,  and  ascertain  the  quantity 
of  their  vowels : — 


12  ORTIIOGRAPHr.  §  IC 

Yis-ra-*er,  glio-yim',  bli'iio-the-lieni',  ii-bli'*o-ts'ro-tliayikh. 
kliu-sh^n',  risli-fa-tliityim,  me'-lekli,  bli'bliit-no',  li-Lii-dba', 
f^zobh-klitim',  yitli-ka-f c'-lia. 

Write  and  divide  into  syllables : — 

Umiknekliem',  yesli'bhfi',  liiimtsatho',  yiklira+em', 
sliigliyonotli',  blie*^nunat]io',  v'lar'*iiblieni',  th£ili''r6'gliu^ 
sli6le*lili'. 


§  10.     Resulting    Vowel- Changes. 

Certain  vowel-ckanges  result  from  tlie  foregoing  rules, 
viz. : — 

1.  If  tAYO  vowelless  consonants  concur  at  tlie  begin- 
ning of  a  syllable,  the  first  will  receive  a  sliort 
vowel.  This  is  commonly  Hhirik,  e.  g.  ''b^'n  dibhre  for 
I'll'i ;  but  if  one  of  the  consonants  bad  a  compound  Sli'va, 
tlie  voAvel  corresponding  will  be  inserted,  e.  g.  n^?|^ 
ya^mbdli  for  "5'^?^ ;  or  if  a  vowel  lias  been  rejected,  the 
new  vowel  may  be  conformed  to  it,  e.  g.  iib'a  moVhhd 
for  iDb^  from  ty'bia . 

2.  AVhen  a  tone- vowel  is  immediately  preceded  by  tAvo 
consonants  the  pronunciation  is  frequently  softened  by 
giving  a  pretonic  vowel,  mostly  Kamets,  to  the  first,  e.  g. 
niib)2  from  ^is'p'a,  no;* ,  nnj^b.  And  the  zowel  a  is  often 
retained  in  such  a  situation,  Avlien  other  voAvels  would  be 
rejected,  e.g.  ''Sy^i^  from  y^w.but  '^?nX3T»  not  ^Ttaii  fiom 

3.  The  harshness  of  concurring  consonants  at  the  end 
of  a  Avord  is  commonly  relicA^ed  by  inserting  Seghol,  to 
which  a  preceding  Pattahh  is  confomied,  '2'^\  for  2^^ , 
^?S  o  i?^b  ,  l\hh  for  tf^'a.  If  either  consonant  is  a  gut- 
tural Pattahh  is  mostly  used  instead,  n^i,  b^B,  ■jn'i.  If 
either   consonant   is   "^ ,  Hhirik   is   used ;  if   the   second 


§  II  KAMETS    AND    KAMETS-UII ATUPH.  13 


J? 


consonant  is  "^  it  will  rest  in  Sliiirek,  n^a,  ""b?,  ^"J^  ,  but 

i.  Wlien  by  reason  of  any  changes  occurring  in  words 
a  short  vowel  C(^mes  to  stand  in  a  simple  syllable,  the 
vowel  must  ordinarily  be  prolonged  or  the  syllable  con 
verted  into  a  mixed  syllable  by  doubling  the  succeeding 
cons()i>ant;  thus  instead  of  ri-^'^.  we  find  n^r  yd-7il"Jih  or 
n"»3;:  ycoi-nVlih. 

5.  When  a  simple  syllable  becomes  mixed  or  a  long 
mixed  syllable  loses  its  accent,  its  vowel  is  ordinarily 
shortened,  e.  g.  i^rnp  from  nn6 ,  by^  from  ba^. 


§  11.     Kamets  and  Kamets-HhatwpJi. 

Kamets  a  and  Kamets-Hhatuph  6  are  both  represented 
by  the  same  sign  (.  ),  but  may  be  distinguished  by  the 
following  rules : — 

1.  In  accented  syllables,  whether  simple  or  mixed,  and 
in  unaccented  simple  syllables,  §  9,  5,  it  is  Kamets, 
n^Tb  md'veth,  ^a^  ckl-hMr' ;  in  unaccented  mixed  syllables 
it  is  Kamets-Hhatuph,  ^mn  liUijli-sKi ,  ntJnn  vatuysUhh.^ 

2.  Before  a  letter  with  simple  Sh'va  the  distinction  is 
mostly  made  by  Methegli  (  -  ),  §  22 ;  mthout  Methegh 
it  is  always  Kamets-Hhatuph,  with  it  commonly  Kamets, 
nbDn  hlwhli-md^  n^Dn  lilidWind.. 

Z.  Before  a  guttural  with  Hhateph-Kamets,  or  Kamets- 
Hhatuph,  the  syllable  is  frequently  intermediate,  §  9,  7, 
and  the  vowel  6,  though  accompanied  by  Methegh,  ''nna 
hdjilf)%  ai^?!^  tojobJCdhem. 

a.  Some  cases  f  aUing  under  2  and  3  can  only  be  decided  by  the  etymology ; 
thusm'IXi  with  the  prefixed  conjunction  w''n??/?/of/i,  n^Dxn  with  the  article 
WniyyaT  c^^.^^^  sliordslilm  from  ttiS-b,  a-^'ffl";n  hhdrdsldm  from  la-jn  ; 
nniaai  in  Ps.  Ixxxri.  3the  imperative  s/iomrd,  in  Job  x,  13  the  preterite  shdm'ra. 


14  OETHOGKAPHY.  §  l2, 

EXERCISE  8. 

Apply  the  foregoing  rules  to  the  words  that  follow. 

^  •    '^        '  ":rr      7  ••  *:    T       J  t   t       7         t       7         It    :   rr      >         (t  ;   t       7  •  t    :       )        It  t 

Write : — 

Ya'h^m,  ^az',  *5znam',  mal'khii',  mol'kho',  dhabhar', 
Qiohh"rabh6th',  hhakh'ma',  hhokhma',  ii6f6bh'dhem'. 

§  12.     Daghesh-lene. 

1.  Daghesh-lene  is  a  point  written  in  the  letters  3  5  1 
D  B  n  (ns3  n^ia  Vgliadli  Fphatli)  to  indicate  the  loss  of 
their  aspiration,  §  1,  3.  They  retain  their  aspirate  sound, 
when  they  are  immediately  preceded  by  a  vowel  or  a 
vocal  ShVa ;  when  not  so  preceded,  they  receive  Daghesh- 
lene,  01:17^3  V gliadlitem. 

2.  An  initial  aspirate  following  a  word  which  ends  in 
a  vowel,  and  has  a  conjunctive  accent,  §  16,  does  not  take 
Daghesh-lene  ^nh  nn';'n  ,  Gen.  i.  2 ;  but  if  the  accent  is  dis- 
junctive, Daghesh-lene  is  inserted,  since  in  this  case  the 
as])irate  is  regarded  as  removed  from  the  influence  of  the 
vowel  ^m^^s  ^3^^i'3 ,  GeiL  i.  26. 

EXERCISE  9. 

Correct  the  following  sentences  by  inserting  or  omitting 
Daghesh-lene : — 

Yashabh  bhafir  fadh  fom'dho  liphne  liafedha  I'mish- 
phat  fadh  moth  khohen  ghadhol. 

Vfasita  hhesed  fal  fabdeka  ki  bib'rit  *donay  hebe«t'ci 
^et  abd'ka  v'*im  bi  fa  von  h*miteni  v'f  ad  *abika  l6*  t'])T^enL 


HA   iil     14.  DAGHESH-FORTE. 


15 


§  13.     Dagliesh-forte. 

1.  Daghesh-forte  is  a  point  inserted  in  the  bosom  of  a 
letter  to  show  that  it  is  to  be  doubled ;  thus  h^Ti  vayylm- 
nial     It  is  never  found  in  the  gutturals  55  n  n  J7,  and 

rarely  in  i. 

2.  A  point  in  one  of  the  aspirates  is  Daghesh-forte  if  a 
vowel  precedes,  otherwise  it  is  Daghesh-lene,  §  12,  1, 
nia-n  diUartd.  The  aspirates  when  doubled  likewise 
lose  their  aspiration. 

3.  A  point  in  Vav  is  Daghesh-forte  if  a  vowel  pre- 
cedes ;  otherwise  it  is  Shurek  r^V,  y'tsavvu. 

4.  Daghesh-forte  is  sometimes  inserted  for  euphony,  as 
-^ilp,  inn'hhe  for  ^^p.  in'hli'e.  When  the  first  letter  of  a 
word  is  doubled  in  order  to  link  it  with  the  final  vowel 
of  the  word  preceding,  it  is  called  Daghesh-forte  con- 
junctive, ^55S?  ^^^P  hmnujs-ts^u. 

5.  Daghesh-forte  is  frequently  omitted  from  vowelless 
letters,  whether  in  the  middle  or  at  the  end  of  words. 
In  the  former  case  the  following  Sh'va  generally  remains 
vocal,  5|n^:3  vayliluq^li  for  flh^l  vmjtfhliapp. 

§  14.     Mapjyih. 

Mappik'  is  a  point  inserted  in  a  final  He  to  denote  that 
it  is  a  consonant,  and  not  a  vowel,  §  7,  3,  n3^Q  maTka\ 
nib"!?  malhd. 

EXERCISE  10. 

Write:— 

Shibbatsta,  bftttabbafoth-,  dilbb'rah,  *Mhttbb'ra,  gulg6lto, 
bikk^rtim,  vayyibbak'tii,  hayyiilladh,  tiikh'lu,  fasitha  Uo. 

Pronounce  the  following  words  and  name  the  points 
which  are  written  in  the  letters  : — 


\*y  ORTHOGRAPHY.  i^J^   15,  16 

,  '^3.^2n    ,  ^b%n    ,  nn^^2    ,  ?nb.nb  ,  o^ijs  ,  D-^bsia  ,  nh    ,  n'in 


§  15.    Ha^yJi^. 

Raphe  is  a  small  horizontal  stroke  placed  over  a  letter 
and  denotes  the  opposite  of  Daghesh-lene,  Daghesh-forte, 
or  Mappik,  as  the  case  may  be :  ^793??  liivva^dlid  not 
hivvds' dMh. 


§  16.     Accents. 

1.  An  accent  is  written  upon  every  word,  with  the 
twofold  design  of  marking  its  tone-syllable  and  of  indi- 
cating its  relation  to  other  words  in  the  sentence. 

2.  Accents  are  either  disjunctives  or  conjunctives,  a&i 
shoAvn  in  table  III.  The  former  indicate  that  the  word 
upon  which  they  are  placed  is  more  or  less  separated 
fi"om  those  that  follow;  the  latter  that  it  is  connected 
with  what  follows. 

3.  The  place  of  the  accent  is  either  over  or  under  the 
letter  preceding  the  tone- vowel,  with  the  exception  of  the 
prepositives  (marked  prep,  in  the  table),  which  always 
accompany  the  initial  letter  of  the  word,  and  the  post- 
positives  (marked  postp.)^  which  stand  upon  its  final 
letter. 

4.  Silluk  has  the  same  form  as  Methegh ;  but  the 
former  invariably  stands  on  the  tone-syllable  of  the  last 
word  in  the  verse,  while  Methegh  is  never  written  under 
a  tone-syllable.     Pashta  is  likewise   distinguished  fiom 


^17.  ACCENTS.  17 

Kadlima,    and   Y'tliibli   from   Malipakli,   only  by    their 
position. 

5.  In  the  poetical  books,  Job,  Psahns,  and  ProverlAS,  a 
different  system  of  accentuation  prevails  from  that  which 
U  in  nse  in  the  rest  of  the  Old  Testament. 


§  17.     Position  of  the  Accent. 

The  accent  always  falls  either  upon  the  ultimate  or 
penultimate  syllable,  and  is  governed  by  the  following 
rules : — 

1.  In  their  uninilected  state  all  words,  whether  primi- 
tive or  derivative,  are  accented  on  the  ultimate,  "li^  ,  St^ri . 
But  Segholate  words  and  forms,  that  is,  such  as  have 
an  unessential  vowel  in  the  ultimate,  inserted  to  soften 
the  harshness  of  concurring  consonants,  §  10.  3,  are  ac- 
cented on  the  penultimate,  tf^'b  for  1\^'a  ,  b^-i  for  hy}. 

2.  If  the  word  receive  an  addition  at  the  end  consist- 
ing of  a  vowel  or  beginning  with  one,  this  will  attract 
the  accent  to  itself  or  to  its  initial  vowel,  a"''i3\f ,  iinn  . 

Exceptions. — a.  Suffixes  added  to  the  3  fem.  preterite 
of  verbs,  cniin.  h.  Personal  terminations  of  verbs 
and  the  paragogic  vowels  T^^  ^  T,  _^  and  "^ .  ,  when  they  do 
not  cause  the  rejection  of  the  vowel  previously  accented, 
n)9p  ,  ^^'^■^nn ,  but  ^i"in . 

3.  When  a  simple  syllable  is  attached  to  a  word  either 
directly  or  by  means  of  a  union  vowel,  the  accent  is  given 
to  the  penult,  DSi?  ,  nos^  ,  ^Dnoi?^  ,  bp  ,  niV]?  . 

The  suffix  T{  follows  the  general  rule,  when  preceded  by 
a  vowel,  or  attached  to  the -3  fem.  preter.  of  ver])s  ;  other- 
wise it  draws  the  accent  upon  itself,  ?]''3l!? ,  ~\^lY,  ?  '^12  • 

4.  A  consonant  apj^ended  to  a  long  final  vowel  di'awa 
the  accent  to  the  ultimate,  ihto^  ,  pniQ"; . 


18  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §§   18,   19 

5.  Appended  mixed  syllables  always  receive  the  accent, 

6.  The  only  prefixes  wliich  affect  tlie  position  of  the 
accent  are  the  Vav  Conversive  of  the  future,  which  draws 
it  back  from  a  mixed  ultimate  to  a  simple  penult,  i'as''n; 
and  the  Vav  Conversive  of  the  preterite,  which  tlirows  it 
forward  from  the  penult  to  the  ultimate,  Pi'^'a^l . 

EXERCISE  11. 

Accent  the  following  words  : 

Hcabh  and  the  derived  forms  ha*abh,  *abhi,  ^^abhiniiu 
^.abhik,  *abhoth,  *^bh6thenii,  ht^^l^hothehem. 

PakMh'  and  the  derived  forms  j^ak'dhu,  pakitdhnu, 
pakAdhti,  p'kildhtiv,  p'kMhtem,  yiphkodh,  hiphkidli, 
yftphkidhehu,  hithpak'dhu,  hilmmiiphkadhim. 

§  18.     Recession  of  the  Accent 

A  conjunctive  is  frequently  removed  from  the  ultimate 
to  the  penult,  if  a  disjunctive  immediately  follows, 
whether  upon  a  monosyllable  or  the  penult  of  a  dissyl- 
lable, nb^b  snp^  Gen.  1  :  5. 

§  19.     Pause  Accents. 

The  greater  disjunctives,  which  mark  the  limits  of 
clauses  and  sections,  are  called  pause  accents. 

These  sometimes  stand  upon  the  penult  in  words 
ordinarily  accented  on  the  ultimate,  ''bbi? ,  ''pbsj ;  or  vice 
versa  upon  the  ultimate  in  place  of  the  penult,  ■>-^s''y. 

They  also  occasion  certain  vowel  changes,  viz.,  they 

1.  Lengthen  short  vowels,  particularly  (  . )  or  ( ^.  )  to 
( ,   )  -nb«  ,  TQX  ;  nny  ,  n^- 

\     '        /  -    T    7  «  T    7  ■;   ;    1  -If 


§  £0.  ACCENTS.  llj 

2.   Restore  vowels  dropped  iu  inflection,  I'la'n  ,  ^i3-n  . 
8.  Change  simple  Sh'va  to  Segliol,  '^T}'J ,  '^>12  • 
4.  Change  compound  ShVa  to  the  corresponding  long 
vowel,  ''3S  ,  ^:«  . 

§  20.     Conseczition  of  Accents. 

1.  The  last  word  in  every  verse  receives  Silluk,  and  ia 
followed  by  two  dots  vertically  placed  ( t )  called  Soph 
Pasiik  (i.  e.  end  of  the  verse). 

2.  If  the  verse  consists  of  two  clauses,  the  last  word  of 
the  first  clause  is  marked  by  Athnahh.  If  of  three 
clauses,  which  is  the  greatest  number  that  any  verse  can 
contain,  the  first  is  limited  by  Segholta,  the  second  by 
Athnahh,  and  the  last  by  Silluk. 

3.  These  clauses  are  divided  into  sections,  if  necessary, 
by  one  or  more  of  the  disjunctives,  Zakeph  Katon, 
Zakeph  Gadhol,  R'bhi*,  Pazer,  and  T'lisha  Gh'dhola. 

4.  In  the  sections  thus  created  the  accents  are  disposed 
relatively  to  the  disjunctive  which  marks  its  close,  see 
table  XX. 

5.  Each  disjunctive  of  the  first  class  is  regularly  pre- 
ceded by  one  conjunctive  and  a  disjunctive  of  the  second 
class ;  disjunctives  of  the  second  class  by  two  conjunctives 
and  a  disjunctive  of  the  third  class ;  disjunctives  of  the 
third  class  by  tliree  conjunctives  and  a  disjunctive  of  the 
fourth  class ;  and  disjunctives  of  the  fourth  class  by  four 
or  more  conjunctives. 

6.  The  trains  of  accents  thus  formed  are  adapted  to 
sections  of  different  length  and  character  by  omitting 
such  of  the  Conjunctives,-  and  more  rarely  by  repeating 
such  of  the  Disjunctives,  .as  the  mutual  relations  of  the 
words  may  seem  to  require,  and  breaking  off  the  series 
whenever  all  the  words  in  the  section  have  been  supplied. 


20  ORTHOGKAPHY.  §§   21.  2'i 

§  21.     MnMexjli.  ^ 

1.  Makke])li   (  "  )  is  used  to  connect  words.     Monosyl-        ; 
labic  particles  especially  are  frequently  tluis  linked  witli 

the  succeeding  or  preceding  word,  'iy-nt>;n"ns 

2.  Wliere  two  or  more  words  are  united  in  tliis  tnanuei 
the  last  only  has  an  accent.  Hence  a  long  mixed  syl 
lable,  followed  l)y  Makkeph,  must  be  sliortened,  §  9,  5, 
qiy'bi,  or  else  receive  the  secondary  accent  Methegh, 
§  22,  fisnti-ps; . 

EXERCISE   12. 

Connect  each  pair  of  ^vords  by  Makkeph,  inserting 
Daghesh-forte  conjunctive  whenever  the  former  ends  in 
a  or  e. 

Kol  yisra*el,  yal'dha  lo,  *eth  *elle,  *ethmokh  b5,  tih'y^ 
li,  ten  li,  sh'losh  *elle,  y'bhttkkesli  daf  ath,  I'kha  na*. 

§  22.     MethegTi. 

1.  Metliegh  (  T  )  represents  a  minor  stress  of  the  voice, 
which  usually  falls  upon  the  second  syllable  before  the 
accent,  and  again  upon  the  fourth,  if  the  word  have  so 
many,  riir'rnn^^ ,  il^-nj^-i;;'. 

2.  If  the  syllable  which  should  receive  it  is  niixed,  il 
niay  be  given  in  preference  to  an  antecedent  simple  syl- 
lable; or  if  none  such  precede,  it  may  be  omitted  alto 
getlier. 

3.  It  is  always  given  to  simple  syllables,  followed  by 
a  vocal  Sh'va,  ^n'as^ ;  also  to  intei'mediate  sylla])les  fol- 
lowed by  compound  Sh'va,  or  a  vowel  which  has  arisen 
from  compound  Sh'va,  nt^ytb ,  nnn;; ,  and  frequently  when 
the  Sh'va  is  simple,  n^2  v)b . 

4.  The   place   of   Methegh   is   often   supplied   by  ar 


S  28.  k'ri  and  k'thibh.  21 

accent   chosen    agreeably   to   the   laws   of    t-onsecutioii, 

CppTOX . 

EXERCISE  13. 

Apply  the  rules  for  Methegli.  A  liyphen  represents 
Makkcph. 

Ve*lohe',  liVdhonehem',  meh^mm^f  *rakha',  f  ^imminji- 
dhabh',  bcn-ha.iama',  berd,khniikliem',  v^yyir'*u',  hln- 
nogh'sira',  ha*ishsha',  me*artso',  lathcth-la'nu,  hithhM- 
lckh-uo*hh',  mef'^bhoclhath'khcm'. 

§  23.     IPri  afid  ICtUhh. 

1.  K'ri  (yveacl^  is  the  technical  name  of  a  marginal 
reading  in  the  Hebrew  Bible,  which  is  sanctioned  by  tra- 
dition as  a  substitute  for  the  corresponding  reading  in 
the  text,  or  the  K'thil3h  (j.oriUen).  The  vowels  of  the 
K'ri  are  connected  with  the  letters  of  the  text  and  a 
reference  made  to  the  margin  where  the  letters  of  the 
former  may  be  found. 

2.  If  a  given  word  is  to  be  omitted  in  reading,  it  ia 
Jeft  unpointed,  and  tlie  note  ''"ip  i^bi  n'TiD  written  hut  not 
read^  placed  in  the  margin.  If,  on  the  other  hand,  a 
word,  is  to  be  supplied,  its  vowels  are  inserted  in  the 
text,  and  the  letters  placed  in  the  margin  with  the  note, 
T^ty^  xbi  "^np  read  hut  not  written. 

3.  In  some  words  of  frequent  occurrence,  a  different 
reading  is  suggested  by  the  points  alone,  without  a  mar- 
ginal explanation.  Tlius  the  sacred  word  nin"",  which  the 
Jews  have  a  superstitious  dread  of  pronouncing,  is  read 
by  ihem  as  if  it  were  ''H^  Lord^  Avhose  points  it  accord- 
ingly receives,  nin^ ,  unless  these  two  names  stand  in 
ijiimediate  connection,  when  to  avoid  repetition  it  is  read 
C^rj^sS*   and  pointed  T\y\\\  =50  the  pronoun  Xin  is  read  si'^r}, 


22  OKTIIOGRAPHY.  §  23 

EXERCISE  14. 

"Write  the  following  words,  as  tliey  would  appear  in 
the  text,  and  in  the  margin  of  the  Hebrew  Bible,  uniting 
the  points  of  the  K'ri  with  the  letters  of  the  K'thiljli, 
and  making  the  appropriate  marginal  note. 

Lariibh  k'thibh — laribh  k'ri ;  sima  k'thibh — suma  k'ri ; 
f  asithi  k'thibh — f  asitha  k'ri ;  bisli'nAth  k'thibh — bcisli 
shana  k'ri ;  f ^bhdo  k'thibh — f^bhdekha  k'l'i ',  hotsithilia 
k'thibh — hittstsitliuha  k'l'i ',  bh'yisra*el  k'thibh — yisra^e) 
k'ri;  p'rath  read  but  not  written;  *im  written  but  iio( 
read. 


ETYMOLOGY. 

§  24.     Prefixed  F articles. 

1.  The  significant  elements  of  speecli  in  Hebrew  con- 
sist of 

( 1 )  Pj-efixed  particles,  wliicli  do  not  form  a  complete 
word  of  themselves,  but  are  always  attached  to  that 
lA^hich  follows. 

(2)  The  Pronouns,  which  are  used  ])oth  separately 
and  as  appendages  to  other  words. 

(a)  The  remaining  parts  of  speech,  which  always  con- 
stitute separate  words. 

2.  The  prefixed  particles  are  the  article,  He  interroga- 
tive, the  inseparable  prepositions,  and  Vav  Conjunctive. 

§  25.      The  Article. 

1.  The  definite  article  consists  of  n  with  Pattahh  fol- 
lowed by  Daghesh-forte  in  the  first  letter  of  the  word  to 
which  it  is  prefixed,  tfb^  a  hiiig^  trb^an  the  hing. 

2.  If  tlie  first  letter  of  the  word  have  Sh'va,  Daghesh- 
forte  may  be  omitted  except  from  the  aspirates,  §  13.  5, 
is"»n,  ni-i72n,  but  nsnan,  nzpsn. 

3.  Before  gutturals,  which  cannot  receive  Daghesh- 
forte,  §  13.  1,  the  article  has  Kamets,  §  9.  5.  This  ia 
always  the  case  before  s  and  n  and  commonly  l)efore 
y;  before  n  and  n  Pattahh  is  mostly  retained,  §  9.  7, 
bns^n.  yirnn,  to^^n,  uri^  but  x^nn,  ^iiJnn. 

a.  Tae  uouns  yi.X  earthy  "in  mmntfiin,  and  OS  p<y}2^le  on  receiving  the  article 
lengthen  their  vowels  to  y^^^  ,   ~v''7  ^^^  ^^"v"* 


24  HE   INTERIIOGATIVE.  §   26 

4  Before  the  strong-  o-utturals  witli  Kamets,  t\u)  article 
has  Seghol.  This  is  always  the  case  with  n,  Imt  with  r 
and  2^  only  takes  j)lace,  when  the  article  stands  upon  the 
second  syllable  before  the  accent,  inn ,  Dsnn ,  D'^'inn , 
D^nyn,  but  inn,   oyn. 

■     T       IV      /  T       T       7  T       T 

§  26.     Fie  Interrogative. 

The  letter  n  prefixed  with  Hhateph-Pattahh  asks  a 
question,  tfS?  v;e  shall  go,  ^??n  shall  we  go  f  Before  a 
vo  well  ess  letter,  §  10.  1,  or  a  guttural  this  becomes 
Pattahh,  QP^I^n  do  ye  hiow  ?  tf?sn  shall  I  go  f 
Before  gutturals  with  Kamets  it  is  changed  to  Seghol 
nn^n  it  tvas,  nn^nn  was  it? 

EXERCISE  15. 

Be  careful  to  apply  the  rule  for  Daghesh-lene,  §  12.  1 ;  and  observe  that  simple 
Sh'va  foUowmg  either  the  article  or  the  interrogative  is  always  vocal,  §  9,  a, 

cns'i'^n  not  cm'^'^n  . 

Prefix  the  article  to  the  following  words : — 

i»3  flesh ;  nnr  gold ;  Q^  sea ;  f  i?  tree ;  nix  light 
mb'ix  ground;  tftn  darkness;  nixbia  work;  nbsn  fig 
tree;  i£y  dust;  D^i^  bone;  on^  bread;  n3nD  corpse 
T^'}  firmament;  r\r\  spirit;  nny  evening;  nnn  sword 
nt  s-(m1  ;  niis  star;  n^y  leaf;  oi^  man;  niiS  year 
■-Ti:  river;  f'^K^  earth;  D?  people;  '•n  or  ^n  living 
^^131  \\ords;  nisns  shoulders. 

'  See  §  35.  3,  a. 

Prefix  He  Interrogative  to  the  following  words : 

^^i^y   ,n!ST    ,T37   ,055   ,13   ,  ^bp   ,  1^©   ,  i^iip  ,  "^Dss  ,  rtx 
,  ns3  ,  rm  ,  DPno©  ,  bi<b  ,  bs  ,  nns  ,  Qiiax  ,  ni-j  ,  tiD?^b  ,  ptn 
,!:n-x  ,  ns3"g    Dn-^iiin    n^xn'  ,  "ipn  ,"13319  ,  nnn  ,uiirn  ,nris< 

.  3n  ,  na  ,  uyxa  ,  i?2 

'  Resh  ie  not  regarded  as  a  guttural  in  the  rule  for  He  Interrogative. 


^^   27,  28.  INaEPAllABLE    PKEPOSlTlONa.  25 


§  27.     Inseparable  Prepositions 

1.  The  prepositions  n,  3  and  b  are  regularly  prefixed 
with  Sh'va,  nitDsn^ ,  ^"^3  ,  D!77^^"?  •  Before  vowellej^'s 
letters  they  take  Hhirik,  §  10.  1,  rpl?  foi'  ?'P"?^ ;  ])efore 
•.gutturals  Avitli  compound  Sh'va  they  take  the  corresj^ond- 
ing  short  vowel,  §  10.  1,  ''ii^s ,  ^^^:^,  ''"''^5  5  before  mono- 
syllables and  before  dissyllables  accented  upon  the  penult, 
they  fi'equently  receive  a  pretonic  Kamets,  §  10.  2,  rii^b , 
^^^^'j  before  the  article  its  n  is  rejected  and  the  vowel 
given  to  the  preposition  nn^s  for  ^i^ns,  T^s^  ^ oi"  7i^^)  • 

a.  The  initial  N  of  "'JIN  Lord^  "P""*  master  when  it  has  a  singular  suffix,  and 
Dinbi<  G'ofZ  quiesces  after  the  inseparable  prepositions,  §  7,  «,  "''j'lxb  ,  fl'^J'ixbj 
cn'bxa  for  cH^sa  the  Seghol  lengthened  to  Tsere  in  the  simple  syllable ; 
also  in  the  inf.  const.  ^i2J5    to  say  after  ^,   n^xb   but  ^52^3,   -.7DS3  . 

2.  The  preposition  ]^  from  may  either  be  written  as  a 
separate  word  or  shortened  to  the  prefix  tt  with  Hhirik 
folloAved  hj  Daghesh-forte  in  the  next  letter,  ^■)"n)3  for 
Xfl  I'o .  Before  n  Hhirik  is  commonly  retained,  §  9.  7, 
but  before  other  o-utturals  it  is  leno-thened  to  Tsere,  S  9. 
5,  f^rm  for  f^n  ]12,  but  f^x^ ,  ^I'ii^"^. 

a.  The  inseparable  prepositions  take  before  the  divine  name  nini  the  same 
P'^mtiug  that  they  would  receive  before  "^i  "IX  .which  the  Jews  substitute  for  it  in 
reading,  thus   niiT'3,   t^in-'S,   i^^'n'^b,   nin^^,   Gomp.  §  33.  3. 


§  28.      Vav  Conjunctive. 

Tlie  conjunction  l  and  is  regularly  prefixed  with  Sh'va 
?T;rni ,  "d^ryy .  Before  one  of  the  labials  n,  "a,  S,  or 
before  a  vowelless  letter  Vav  quiesces  in  Shurek  'p?^, 
nn3^ ;  before  a  vowelless  Yodh  it  receives  Hhirik,  in 
which  the  Yodh  quiesces,  T?'''] ;  before  a  guttui'al  with 


26 


ETYMOLOGY. 


§29 


compound  SJi'va  it  receives  the  corresponding  sLort 
vowel  ,^':i^^  ,  T^tyi  ,  "^Sni ;  before  monosyllables  and  dis- 
syllables accented  on  the  i)enult  it  frequently  receives  a 
pretonic  Kamets  ^n"i^ ,  yni . 

»  T       7  T   T 

Vocabulary  1, 

Tlie  parts  of  speech  are  distinguiilied  by  initials  or  abbreviations;  m.  denoloi 
masculine,  f.  feminine,  pi.  plural. 


37s  11.  m.  man 

lis  u.  m.  ligJa 

3  pi'ep.  171 

n^ns  n.  f.  heast,  cattle 

ri'a  n,  m.  Itouse 

*^j?s  n.  m.  7yiorning 

I'ij'a  11.  m.  flesh 

)  coiij.  and 

fjTcn  n.  m.  darhness 

UT^  n.  m.  day 

d;'  n.  m.  sea 

rrii  n.  m.  moon 


5  prep,  according  to^  as,  like. 

Q'^DDis  11.  in.  p],  stars 

)  prep,  to ^  for 

^  adv.  not 

Drt^  n.  m.  f.  bread 

'^"^^  n.  m  niglit 

1)3  prep.^y'om 

*iy  ])rep.  unto^  until 

17?  n.  m.  f.  evening 

njto  n.  m.  field 

D^/biD  n.  m.  pi.  lieaven 

ttjaiij  11.  m.  f.  sHii. 


Lesson  1  in  Reading  Hebrew,  see  page  111. 
Lesson  1  in  Writing  Hebre^v,  see  page  137. 
The  succeeding  lessons  are  connected  with  the  vocalni 
laries  that  follow  in  theii-  order. 


§  29      Personal  Pronouns. 
1    The  personal  2:)i'on(nins  are  tlie  follow.ng,  viz.  : 

SINGULAn. 

1.      /  ■'p:s  fiHoklii',   ''pK  *iii 

(  Thou  m.  nnx  atta' 
'     (  Thou  f.     nj?  C^nsj  att 


{$    2t>.  PERSONAL     PRONOUNS.  27 


ille 

Nin  hu 

' 

3 

\Blie 

s^n  (Kin)  hi 

PLURAL, 

I, 

We 
(  Ye  m 
\  Ye  f . 

i:nbK  "nalili'iiti, 
DPS   attem' 

:  - 

nahh'nu, 

2 

■jns    atten', 

njpifi? 

atte'na 

j  ^-^'^^ey 

in. 

on  hem, 

™n 

hem'ma 

3 

\  They 

f. 

in  hen, 

nsn 

hen'na 

^3s?    •iin 


%.  When  governed  by  verbs,  nouns  or  particles  they 
are  aj^pended  to  them  in  the  following  shortened  forms, 
called  pronominal  suffixes : 

emOULAB.  PLURAL. 

1.      Com.  \     "^3  ^3 

j  Masc.  ^  W 

^-    [Feon.  n  P 

j  3iasc.  in  o    an 

^'   [Fern.  n  1    in 

3.  In  the  first  person  singular  i  is  used  with  nouns, 
and  ""p  with  verbs.  The  third  plural  forms  on,  ]n  are 
used  with  plural  nouns ;  a,  ]  with  verbs  and  singular 
nouns.  The  suffixes  02 ,  "js .  nn .  -jn  are  called  gi-ave,  the 
rest  are  liglit. 

4.  The  ii]  separable  prepositions  are  united  with  pro- 
nominal suffixes  as  shoAvn  in  Table  IV. ;  3  is  prolonged  by 
the  syllable  i'a  and  "ita  l;)ecomes  before  light  suffixes  I'a'a 
or  "D'a .  The  suffix  in  preceded  by  —  is  contracted  to  '^ 
e.  a;.  "13  for  ma ,  ib  for  inb ;  n  preceded  by  —  is  short- 
ened to  n^  e.  g.  n3  for  na  and  in  like  manner  with  the 
^auRe  accent  '^3,   2  masc.  sing,  for  ^5  • 


28 


ETrMOLOQY. 


^  iit) 


Vocabulary  2. 


riis  n.  111.  f.  sign 
ns  n.  m.  brother 
X"^.  there  is  not 
sipos  n.  m.  pL  God 
Y'\'&  u.  f.  earthy  land 
X"^  j)rep.  between 
a^nT  11.  111.  gold 
'^n  adj.  living^  alive 
rrirri  n.  m.  JeliovaJi 


-N"?!?:'  n.  m.  Israel 

5103  n.  m.  silver 

Tiy  adv.  yet^  besides 

^?  prep.  %ifon^  over 

D'iy  n.  m.  eternity 

oy  prep,  tcitli 

i^^y  or  ^^V  toith  me 

nny  adv.  now 

nnr)  prep,  tinder,  instead  oj 


§  30.     Otlier  Pronouns. 

1.  The  demonstrative  pronoun  is 

MasG.    Fern.  Common. 

SiNGULAii    !^|     nsT  tliis  Plural    ''S?     h^s   thest 

The  poetic  form  IT  is  used  both  as  a  demonstrative  and 
a    a  relative. 

2.  Tlie  personal  pronoun  of  the  third  person  xin  is  also 
employed  as  a  remote  demonstrative  that. 

3.  The  relative  pronoun  is  11^55  lolio.,  ivhich.,  sometimes 
shortened  to  tC  ,  see  Table  V.  When  the  relative  is 
governed  by  verbs,  nouns,  or  particles,  it  stands  without 
change  of  form  at  the  beginning  of  its  clause,  and  the 
appropriate  pronominal  suffix  is  attached  to  the  govern- 
ing w(^]"d  '^i''  itCN  who  his  day  i.  e.  rohose  day  ib — -nrs 
loho — to  him  i.  e.  to  whom.  When  a  preposition  stands 
before  the  relative,  it  governs  not  the  relative  itself  but 
its  antecedent  understood;  thus,  "n^sb  means  not  to  whom 
or  to  ivhich  but  to  him  ivho  or  t:)  that  which.  li 
receives  an  adverbiaJ  sense  when  followed  by  w^  there. 


J5  •il.  VERBS.       TllElll    SPECIES.  2b 

e.    g.    DT» — ntisj:    where,    niais — -iirx    wldther,    DiBri  -its 
wlience. 

4.  Tlie  interrogative  and  indefinite  pronouns  are  "'p 
wliof  or  'whoever  and  rra  what?  or  tvhatever.  The  vowel 
of  rra  varies  ^vitli  the  first  letter  of  the  following  woid, 
see  "J'lihle  IV.  In  a  few  instances  its  voweldetter  is 
dropped,  and  it  is  converted  into  a  prefix,  e.  g.  r.TTa  for 
n?  ni?  wliat  is  thin  ? 

5.  Another  inteiTogative  is  formed  by  prefixing  the 
])article  "'X  to  the  pronoun  nr  ,  nsii,  thus  ni  "^s  which  f 
ov  what?  risirb  ^i^  for  what?  why?  n-i^  '^^,  from  what 
place?   whence? 

Vocabulary  3. 

^'3  n.  m.  ivhole,  all,  every        Dip'a  n.  m.  i.  j^lctce 

□^"b  n.  m.  pi.  water  it'ip   n,  m.  holiness,   a  holy 

-yis  adv.  ahove  jjlace  or  thing. 

VERBS. 

§  31.     Their  Species.- 

1.  Hebi'ew  verbs  have  seven  different  forms,  called 
speci(}s  or  conjugations,  viz. : 

1.  Kal  Simple  active. 

2.  Niphal  Simple  passive. 

3.  Piel  Intensive  active. 

4.  Pual  Intensive  passive. 
5    Hiphil  Causative  active. 

6.  Hophal     Causative  passive. 

7.  Hithpael  Reflexive. 

2.  The  first  of  these  species  is  called  Kal  light,  because 
in  it  no  other  than  the  three  radical  letters  appear,  and 
these  only  in  their  single  power.  The  other  names  ai-e 
taken  from  ^i?B  to  do,  being  the  forms  assumed  by  thi? 
rei'b  in  each  species  severally. 


80  ETYMOLOGY.  §  32 

3.  To  eacli  of  tliese  species  belong  a  preterite  and 
future,  two  forms  of  tlie  infinitive  called  resj^ectively  the 
absolute  and  tlie  construct,  a  participle,  and  except  to  the 
Pual  and  Hoplial,  which  as  pure  passives  cannot  express 
a  command,  an  imperative.  The  Kal  alone  has  two  par- 
tici])les. 

a.  All  of  these  species  very  rarely  co-exist  in  the  same  verb.  Their  sigiiificatioju 
is  c(  mmonly  but  not  invariably  what  is  stated  above.  The  Piel  is  sometimes 
causative  like  the  Hiphil,  and  the  Niphal  reflexive  like  the  Hithpael,  or  the 
Hithpael  passive  like  the  Niphal.  In  these  cases  one  or  other  of  the  equivah:nt 
species  is  often  dropped  as  unnecessary,  or  some  distinction  in  usage  is  created 
between  them.  In  intransitive  verbs  the  Niphal,  if  it  exists  at  all,  is  usually  the 
passive  of  a  transitive  or  causative  sense. 


§  32.     Perfect   Verbs. 

1.  Verbs  are  called  perfect,  when  they  conform 
throughout  to  the  standard  inflection ;  and  imperfect, 
when  in  consequence  of  a  weak  letter,  §  2.  2,  or  some 
other  peculiarity  in  the  root  they  deviate  from  it. 

2.  If  ^"^2)5  to  Mil  be  taken  as  the  model  of  the  perfect 
verb,  the  various  species  with  their  significations  will  be 
as  follows,  viz. : — 

to  hill 

to  he  killed. 

to  kill  many  or  to  massacre, 

to  he  massacred. 

to  cause  to  kill. 

tt>  he  caused  to  kill. 

to  kill  one^s  self. 

a.  It  is  in  each  case  the  third  person  masculine  singular  of  the  preterite,  whiut 
is  given  above,  and  the  strict  signification,  therefore,  is  he  has  killed,  etc.  But 
when  these  forms  aae  used  to  represent  the  species  their  proper  e  luivalent  is  th/ 
infinitive,  which  is  fue  form  employed  ha  designating  verbs  in  English. 


1. 

Kal 

^^1? 

2. 

Niphal 

^■^1?? 

3. 

Piel 

btop 

4. 

Pual 

^^i? 

5. 

Hiphil 

"=^^)?r^ 

6. 

H<)l)lii>l 

btspn 

7. 

Hitlipael 

^C5pnn 

^  33  KAL    PliETKlilTE    AND    1 N la N ITl VES.  31 

§  33.     Kal   Preterite   and  Infinitives. 

1.  The  Kal  iweierite  is  inflected  tlius : — 

PRETERITE. 

SiisTG.  S  masc.     bb]?  katal'  helciUed.,didMllorhashllU(i 

Zfem.     njif)^  kat'la'  8lie  hilled. 

2  masc.   r?^^)?  katal'ta  thou  (m.)  Tcilledst. 

2  feon.     n'sbj?  katalt'  thou  (f.)  Mlledst. 

1  com.    "^P^t?^  katal'ti  /  hilled. 
Plur.  3  com.      ^.Vj|^  kat'lu  they  hilled. 

2  m«.S(".  QP^PP  k'talteni'  '?/^  (m.)  hilled. 
2  fern.    I^'pt:]?  k'talten'  y^  (f.)  hilled. 
1  (?c>?/i.     ^sbbj?  katal'nu  tve  hilled. 

l^FTNiTiYF.  absolute  '3'it2)?  katoV,  construct  Vd]?  k'tol  ?fo  hill 

2.  The  vowel  of  the  second  radical  in  the  Kal  preterite 
Ib  commonly  Pattahh,  as  in  ^^"^ ;  in  a  few  vei'bs,  how- 
ever, most  of  which  are  intransitive,  it  is  Tsere  as  in  lis 
to  he  heavy.,  or  Hholera  as  in  Vit^  to  he  hereaved. 

Kal  Preterite  with  e. 

kinase  Scorn.        Zfem,  2  masc.  2  fern.  \  com. 

Sing     ^i|  n^ns  n^ns        vniz        ^rnda 

Pj.ur.  ^nns  DJBl??       ]n-33         '*:73| 

Infinitive  ahsolute  nii?  construct  ^'is. 

Kal  Preterite  \\dth  o. 

^  masc.  Scorn.        3  fern.  2  masc.  2  fern.  Icon. 

Sing.     Viis  nbsis  nbb©         nbaic         ^nbDt 

Plur.  'ifeir  dp^^ts       IJ^V?^^  ^-'?3« 

Infinitive  absolute  bii© ,  consPruct  bbiD . 


32  ETYMOLOGY.  §  34 

3.  The  eiidiugs  of  tiie  fii'st  and  second  persons  of  the 
preterite  are  fragments  of  tlie  corresponding  pronouns ; 
thus  ri  in  p^^'^1?  is  from  nns?  2  masc.  sing,,  r\  in  ^^^J^ 
from  ns?  2  fern,  sing.,  on  and  "in  from  the  2  plur.  cns* 
and  IP^ ;  "'ri  in  "^ri^tsp  is  by  euphonic  change  for  ''3  froiui 
^pbx  1  pers.  sing.,  13  in  ir^bp  from  i:j^^  1  pers.  plur.  As 
two  of  the  persons  are  thus  designated  by  pronominal 
fra3:ments,  no  such  desig-nation  was  needed  in  the  case  of 
the  third  and  only  remaining  2:)erson.  The  simple  form 
of  the  rerb  without  addition  ^i?]?  is  accordingly  used  for 
the  3  masc.  sing.  ;  n^  in  nVj;^  being  the  sign  of  the 
feminine  and  so  used  also  in  nouns  and  adjectives,  and  ' 
in  ll5t:;^  the  sign  of  the  plural. 

VOCABULAEY    4. 

's'la  V.  (fut.  a)  to  he  great        ni^^  adv.  very 
Y%^  y.  (fut.  a)  to  cleave,  adhere  nni'a  n.  f.  co7nma7idment 
nb"i  11.  f.  door  '^ir'a  v.  to  rule 

■Tin  n.  m.  majesty  1^?  v.  to  give 

"TTk  n.  m.  splendor  ^V^  v.  to  shut 

p2^  V.  to  pour  pns  n.  m.  righteousness 

^3  conj.  for,  because,  that       nil?   v.    to   rest,   cease,  'heep 
D"^^?  n.  m.  pi.  vessels,  articles        Sahhath 
rib  or  irnb  v.    (fut.   a)    to   rhtt  n.  m.  f.  Sahhath 
put  on,  wear,  he   clothed  13'<^  v.  to  dioell 
tolth  I'OT^  V.  to'heep,  ohserve. 

ns  is  the  sign  of  the  definite  object  and  is  placed 
before  pronouns  or  definite  nouns'  when  governed  by  a 
Iransitive  verb. 

§  34.    Niphal,  Piel,  and  Paal  Preterites  and  Infinitives. 

The  Niphal  is  formed  by  prefixing  D;  the  Piel  andPual 
by  doulding  the  second  i-adical  and  attaching  the  appro- 
j)i  iate  voA\els. 


^  81.  NIPllAL,    PIEL,    AND    PUAL    I'RETERITES,  .S3 


NIPIIAL    PRETERITE. 


3  masc.    3  com.  3  fern.  2  masc.             2  fern.  1  corn,. 

SiNO.     bi3p:  nVj]?;  nb:bp3         nbi:]??  '•nbi?-: 

Pluk.                ^'^2)|?3  DJi!'?^^?  )j?'?^)?2  '^-'?^i?- 

[nunitive  absolute  Vibj^n ,  consP^'uct  ibj^n. 


PIEL    PRETERITE. 


2  /««. 

1  COVl. 

S^"?^!? 

^nbtap 

l^r^P 

^-^^i? 

3  wa^c.    3  crni.        3  /m.  2  ma^c. 

Sing,     bbj?  hSdj?  P.bD]? 

Plur.  ^%i?  0J:)'?^P 

TNFimTivE  ahsohite  bD]? ,  construct  bio]?  . 

PUAL    PRETERITE. 
3  mrt.-ic.    3  cam.        Sfem.  2  masc.  2  fern.  1  cotn. 

Sing.     brb]5  nbrp)?  pbro]?  nbio]?  -^nbD]^ 

Plur.        '      i^E)]^  anb^p         ^nbto]?  ^Dbtap 

Infinitive  absolute  b'^jp,  construct  b^]?. 

Vocabulary  5. 

The  initials  K.,  N.,  P.,  etc.,  denote  the  verbal  species. 

irybN  11.  m.  Eleazar  li?  v.  N.  Pu.  to  he  shut 

"jinx  n.  m.  f.  cork  7^1?  v.  P.  to  gather;  N.  to  be 

b-ia  V.  N.    to  be  sejparated,  gathered 

divided  t»11?    v.    P.    H.    to   sanctify^ 

:?!,■'  V.  K.  to  hnow  consecrate;   N.  Pu.  to   be 

ttJ33  V.  K.  P.  to  subdue;  N.  sanctified 

to  he  subdued  2?4^  v.  N.  to  sivear 

•"S&b  />^/br^  bStD  V.  P.  to  bereave 

njbb  v^  K.  to  to^^                 "  "jittJ    v.    P.    H.   to   cause   k 

net)  V.  K.  to  anoint  dwell 

isirp  n.  m.  tahernacle^  dmell-  l^w  n.  m.  oiL 

ing 

2* 


34  ETYMOLOGY,  §   85 


§  35.     The  remaining  Preterites  and  Infinitives. 

TlioHiphil  and  Hoplial  are  formed  by  prefixing  n  with 
the  proper  vowels.  The  Hithpael  is  formed  l)y  prefixing 
Tin  to  the  construct  infinitive  of  the  Piel. 


IIIPIIIL    PRETERITE. 
3  masc.      3  com.  3  fern.         2  masc.  2  fern.  1  c^om. 

Sing,    ^^tapn  nb^bpn       P^^ipn       n'piipn     ^pbbpn 

Plur.  ^^^'^v^  DJiir'^pri     ir)^'^pn     ^:'?^pn 

Infinitive  ahsolute  'Ppn,  construct  b'^t:jpn, 

IIOPHAL    preterite. 

S  masc.      Scorn.  Zfein.  2  mnsc.  2  fern.  \  com. 

Sing,    btapn  '^^Pp^         ^'?*^p"'       r'V^Pv'     "^J^r^PO 

Plur.  'i^PPC'  °^^Ppf7      1^'?^P\'      ^^bbpn 

Infinitive  ahsohite  ^Pp^i ,  construct  bupn . 

HITHPAEL     preterite. 

3  TOcrsc.      3  co?«.        Sfem.  2  masc.  2  fern.  \  com. 

Sing,    ^lapnn  nSispnr,       ri^t?pnn     nbiopnn  inbDpnr 

Plur.  ^'^Ppr^ri  Di!)^?p^r    1^r^pr?n    ^a^t^pP^n 

Infinitive  ahsohite  ^ibprin ,  construct  ^Dpnri . 

Vocabulary  6. 

5'ia  V  11.  to  separate  5^?2<«b^  n.  f.  ivorh 

D^ia  n.  m.  pi.  nations  ^^^    v.  Ho.   2'o  5e  caused  U 

Da  conj.  «Zs6>  reir/n,  to  be  made  hing 

"Ty}  n.  m.  David  ?lb'^  n.  m.  hing 

tM]  n.  f.  animal^  wild  least  nob's?  n.  f.  hingdom 

n^3  V.  H.  ^0  cut  off ;  Ho.  ^'o  ts?^  n.  «  /^«Ze  * 
^^  G^it  off 

•  OSB  is  a  noun  meaning  a  little  thing  or  a  small  qxtnnlity  of  any  thing,  but  no' 


S  86. 


KAL    FUTURE. 


35 


wpia  V.  H.  to  inahe  small  or  ri2ic  v.   H.  to   cause  to  rest 

fexo  or  cea,se 

tJip  V  Hitli.  to  sanctifij  or  nriTU  v.  H.  to  destroy 

purifij  oiieh  self  nSir-  v.  P.  H.  to  send. 

3^)5  v.  H.  to  hring  near,  offer 


36.     ICal  Future,  Imperative,  and  Participles. 


1.  The  future  and  imperative  of  eacli  species  are 
formed  from  the  construct  infinitive  by  attaching  the 
proper  pronominal  fragments. 


FUTURE. 

SlXG. 

3  masG. 

^*^I?? 

yiktol' 

lie  shall  or  loill  hill 

2>  fern. 

bb)?n 

tiktol' 

she  tvill  hill 

2  masG, 

biipn 

tiktol' 

thou  (m.)  loilt  hill 

2  fem. 

''r'^pJ!> 

tikt'ir 

tJwu  (f.)  ivilt  hill 

1  com.. 

!:t3ps 

ektol' 

I  shall  hill 

Plur, 

.  3  masc. 

1^^)?? 

yikt'lu 

they  (m.)  will  hill 

"^fhn. 

n3)ji2pn 

tiktol'na 

they  (f.)   will  hill 

2  masc. 

iSippn 

tikt'lu' 

ye  (m.)  toill  hill 

2  fem. 

nDbupn 

tiktol'na 

ye  (f.)  tvill  hill 

1  com. 

bibp? 

niktol' 

we  shall  hill. 

, 

IMPERATIVE. 

Sll^G. 

2  masc. 

Isibjp 

k'tol' 

hill  thoii  (m.) 

2  fem. 

''^^p 

kit'li' 

hill  thou  (f.) 

Plor. 

2  masc. 

^-t2p 

kit'lu' 

hill  ye  (m.) 

2  fem. 

nsViij? 

k'tol'na 

hill  ye  (f.) 

\itiXe  or  small  as  an  adjective.  Thus  we  may  say  0*^73  05^  a  little  water,  liSV 
cnS  a  little  bread ;  but  'JV>2_  could  not  be  used  in  such  phrases  as  a  litUt  house 
a  Utile  door.     A  different  word  would  be  required  in  the  latter  case. 


3F, 


ETYMOLOGY. 


§30 


PARTICIPLES. 

Singular.  Active.  Plural. 

masc,  fern.  innse.  fern. 

kotGl'    kot'la'  kote'letli       kot'lim'  kot'lotli' 


kattil'    k'ttila' 


Passive. 


D^^iDp        niS^tsp      hilled 
k'tulim'    k'tulotli' 


2.  Some  verbs  Lave  Pattakk  in  the  second  syllable  oi 
tlie  Kal  future  and  imperative.  This  is  regularly  the 
case  with  those  which  have  Tsere  or  Hholem  in  the  pre- 
terite, thus  "las': ,  bsir? . 

KAL    FUTURE    with   d. 
3  masG.  3  fein.  8  masc.  2  fern.  1  com. 

Sing,      ^a?":  "la^i?         'lasi?  "^ia^i?         "?95? 


IMPERATIVE. 

2  masc.  2  fern.  2  masc.  2  fern. 

Sing,     "ins  ^ins.  Plur.     'i^ns  n:^i3 

3.  In  the  inflection  of  the  future  the  letters  prefixed 
mostly  denote  the  person  and  those  affixed  the  gender  oi 
number ;  •<  of  the  3  masc.  "^tbp^  is  by  euphonic  change  foi 
1  from  N^n,  and  as  in  the  preterite  l  is  appended  as  tlie 
sign  of  the  plural  ^Vjp^^ ;  n  of  the  3  fern,  bibpn  is  the  sign 
of  the  fem.  (see  al)Ove  the  fem.  ending  of  the  participle), 
and  n?  is  appended  in  the  plural  ri:^i2pn  fi'om  nsn .  In 
the  second  person  n  is  from  Hns ,  the  fem.  taking  "». 
from  "ips? ,  the  masc.  plur.  'i  as  in  the  third  person,  and 


§37 


NIPIIAL,    PIEL,    AND    PUAL. 


31 


the  feni.  np  from  nsni? .     In  the  first  person  sing,  "iwps 
i?  is  fiom  ^3S  ;  in  the  ])lur.  Viips ,  :  is  from  ^:s . 

4.  In  tlie  imperative  no  personal  prefix  is  needed,  as 
but  one  person  is  in  use ;  gender  and  number  are  distin- 
guished as  in  the  second  person  of  the  future. 


VOCABULAEY    7. 


nS^ns  n.  f.  pi.  virgins 
"li^  V.  P.  to  s])eak 
qbi^  n.  m.  Joseph 
1?  adv.  so 
ybo  n.  m.  roclc 


n?  n.  m.  f.  time 

D"'ritc^s  n.  m.  pi.  Philistintie, 

'\T1_  n.  f.  Zion 

*^zt  n.  m.  crimson 

"i5>t?  n.  m.  f.  gate. 


§  37.     Ni])lial,  Fiel,  and  Fual  Futures,  etc. 

1.  Where  the  infinitive  has  n  prefixed  to  the  radicals 
this  is  rejected  in  the  future  after  the  personal  prefix, 
thus  from  bbj^n  is  formed  ^^^^ . 

2.  The  participles  of  the  Piel  and  subsequent  species 
are  formed  from  the  construct  infinitive  l)y  prefixing  -Q ,  a 
frao-ment  of  the  indefinite  pronoun  ^^  or  Tm 


Sing. 
IVarR. 


3  mnse. 


NIPHAL    FUTURE. 

3  fern.  2  masc. 


y)^' 


^"i-j^ri 


2  foil. 

n:bt2;:!n 


1  G07H. 


2  masc 


Sing.       ^^j?n 


IMPEEATIVE. 


2  fe7n. 


Plur. 


2  matfc. 


2  fern. 

njb-osr 


PARTICIPLE. 
nwM.  fern.  mms.  fern. 

Sing.   bu]?D     nb-jp?    or   nbtsiips  Plur.    d^^^i??      ^^''Vl?? 


38 


ETYMOLOGY. 


^58^ 


3  mase. 

Sing.        ^isp,'} 


2  ma  36. 

Sing.       bbp 


PLEL    FUTURE. 

3  fcm. 

2  ??i«sc. 

2/m. 

1  co?« 

^^pP» 

''^pJ? 

'5^p-^ 

"^Japi^ 

^r'^^pJ!! 

^:Bpn 

n:bc3)?ri 

^^p? 

IMPERATIVE. 

2  /e??i. 

2  ma-sc. 

2  fern. 

^Sl3p 


Plur. 


iStop         n:bc5p 


^i^ 


id''U|x 


masG. 

Sing.       btsp^a 


PARTICIPLE. 


/<?/?i. 


n^Dp^a  Plur.         Q^bpj?^      riibipi^ia 


3  WlflWC. 

Sing.       bD)?^ 
Plur.      ^bia;?;' 


PUAL 

FUTURE. 

3  fern. 

2  7nasG. 

2  /m. 

1  CtWi. 

bioi^n 

broj^n 

'^^P^ 

'^'^I^^ 

ijbtspn 

^btpipn 

n;bibpn 

"^^i?? 

IMPERATIVE  wanting. 


PARTICIPLE, 
nifl^o.  fern.  vmac.  fen}. 

Sjng.       btap'a     nbrpp^  oi-  nbisj^'a       Plur.    3"'?:2j5ia    n'i^iflpp 


Vocabulary  8. 


Tax  V,  K.  to  say 
rr^na  n  f,  covenant 
n^.n  int.  ?i'>.^   hehold ! 
3it3  adj.  f7«'>(9<'/ 
3p?;^  n.  m.  Jacob 
■inni  n.  Jericho 


nns  V.  P.  ^^  Ac^Tio?",  N.  ^c 
/>6'  Zw  ored 

^iis  1],  m.  lionoi 

D'^bnip  n.  in.  pi.  priests 

n'is  V.  K.  ^(9  6'?/f,  malce  a  co- 
venant 


§38. 


HlPIIIL.    IIOPitAL,    AND    HITID'AEL. 


39 


y2U  V.  K.  to  withhold,  Iceq^  "it?]?  v.  H.  to  burn  inGe7ise 

bach  5?'i  aclj.  had,  evil 

n^i:?  D.  f.  eoonpany,  assembly  niffi  v.  K.  to  forget 

•'isi'br  ^?2  the  presence  of  "riaiij  v.  N.  to  hee]}  one's  self 
D?  n.  ID.  _peo2)le  take  heed. 

"js  conj.  ^6\«?^,  ^7i(2i5  ^ic)^ 


.38.     Hiphil,  Hophal,  and,  Hithpael  Futures,  etc. 


HTPHIL 

FUTURE. 

3  mmc. 

3  /m. 

2  masc. 

2  fern. 

1  com. 

Sing. 

"^^^T- 

b^tspn 

b^upn 

^b-^ppr) 

^^PI?^ 

Plue. 

i^^"^P- 

nsbujpn 

i^^:b)7n 

nsbupn 

^■'^I?? 

Slnq. 


2  ??!rtS(;. 


IMPERATIVE. 

2  /e?ra.  2  ?n«5c.  2  fem. 

''^^Pp!!'        Plur.       ^b^bpn         nsbbj^n 


SlN< 


PARTICIPLE. 

wi«sc.  /(??«.  wwMC.  fern. 

b^tip^    "b^ippi?  oi'  tnbisp^        Pj.ui;.  C'^^lppa    nibtajptt 


HOPHAL 

FUTURE. 

3  masc 

3  fem. 

2  masc. 

2  fem. 

1  com 

SlMG. 

bi:p; 

^^p^ 

'''^pJ;- 

■'btppn 

"^'^n 

Pun:. 

')b)-jp;» 

riibupn 

^,bi2pp, 

nsbiDpn 

^^P? 

IMPERATIVE  wanting. 


PARTICIPLE. 
mate.  fern.  masc.  fem. 

Sing     it2pi2      nbi:p)a  or  nbippi:       Pluk.    D^bi:pi2     nibwj^ij 


40 


ETYMOLOGY?. 


^  sa 


Sing. 
Plur. 


S  masc. 


inTHPAEL    FUTURE. 

3  fern.  2  mofo. 


2  fem. 


1  eom. 


njbiapnn     bropni 


2  i>i«.§c. 


IMPERATIVE. 

2  /(SW. 


2  ma«c. 


2  fem. 


Sing.        bDpnn         "•bropnn        Plur.       ibapnn      robippnr. 


PARTICIPLE. 

9?i«sc.  fem.  masc.  fem. 

Sing,  btopn^   nbropnia  or  nbropn^     Plur.  D^bspn-o   nibrapnia 


',^^)< 


Vocabulary  9. 

ion  n.  m.  hindness,  mercij  ^b^  v.  H.  to  cause  to  reign 

5'T?';  n.  m.  salvation  npy^  u.  f.  cry 

nis  adv.  thus  ^?^    v.    H.    to   he  wise,   act 
iJib  V.  H.  to  cause   to  2mi      vnsely 

on,  to  clothe  ^Tp^^  n.  f.  gladness 

■'.i?^  V.  H.  to  cause  to  rain  "jiiiJi^  n.  m.  joy 

11313  11.  in.  rain  n'^nstrj  n.  f.  remnant 


§  39.     Peculiar  Forms. 

1.  When  tlie  last  radical  is  3  oi-  n,  it  is  united  by 
Daghesli-forte  witli  personal  endings  beginning  A^-ith  tiie 
same  letter,  e.  g.  ''niicn  for  "^nniTrn,    r\pit7\  for  n:3btt^n  ♦ 

2.  The  vowel-letter  n  may  be  added  to  tlie  2  masc. 
sing,  of  the  preterite,  and  dropj)ed  from  tlie  fem.  plui-al* 
of  the  future  and  imperative,  e.  g.  Jir^'i^?  ,  j"???^  • 


if'  c-<^ 


ij    40.  PA.UAGOGIC    AND    APOCOrATED    FirrUIIE.  41 

o 

3.  Filial  ]  IS  soiiietlmes  added  t<)  a  of  the  ])rctoiite,  and 
to  u  and  I  of  tlie  future,  e.  g.  ^y^,"; ,  rpain. 

4.  riie  Kal  construct  infinitive,  in  a  few  instances,  has 
Pattahli  in  j)1ace  of  Hliolem,  :iiT2J ,  ^?T2J ;  and  occasionally 
it  takes  a  feminine  ending  nj^n"!  for  pi'^ . 

5.  The  Niphal  absolute  infinitive  may  be  either  Vijp?  ()?■ 
Vapn ;  biop  may  be  used  for  the  absolute  as  well  as  the 
construct  infinitive  Piel. 

(x  A  few  verbs  have  Pattahh  or  Seghol  as  the  vowel 
of  the  second  radical  in  the  Piel  preterite,  TC"ip,  131 
instead  of  li>^p,  131;  Pattahh  also   occurs  in  the    Hitli- 

pael  Sl4pt?r'. 

7.  Pual  sometimes  has  Kamets-Hhatuph  and  Hophal 
Kibbuts  in  the  first  syllable   rrns  ,    nsi^n . 

8.  Tav  of  the  prefixed  tin  in  Hithpael  is  transposed 
with  the  first  radical  of  the  verlj,  if  it  be  one  of  the 
sibilants  0,  to  or  to;  witli  s  the  ri  is  transposed  and  in 
addition  changed  to  t2;  with  n,  13  or  n,  and  occasionally 
with  other  letters,  the  n  is  assimilated  to  the  first  radical 
and  united  with  it  by  Daghesh-forte,  /ijnpn,  p^t^i^n, 
pii^n. 

§  40.  Paragogic  and  Apocopated  Future  ami  Imperative 

1 .  The  vowel  n^  is  appended  to  the  first  person  of  the 
future,  and,  in  a  very  few  instances,  to  the  third  person 
singular,  to  express  desire  or  determinatio  i,  r.pn33  we  will 
break  or  let  us  hreah.  This  is  called  the  paragogic  or 
cohortative  future. 

2.  The  apocopated  or  jussive  future  is  a  shortened 
form  of  the  second  or  third  persons  singular  and  expresses 
a  wish  or  command,  or,  with  a  negative,  dissuasion  oi 
prohibition.      In  perfect  verbs  it  is  distinguished  from 


42  ETYMOLOGY.  §  41 

the  simple  future  only  in  the  Hiphil  species,  in  which  the 
\  of  the  ultimate  is  changed  to  ( ..  ),  bh\i;ri  tlioii  mayest 
understand  or  nnderstand  thou. 

3.  Paragogic  n^  is  sometimes  appended  to  the  mascu- 
line singular  of  the  imperative,  softening  the  command 
into  an  entreaty  or  expression  of  desire,  nij'pii'  oh,  hear  ! 
or  pray,  hear  ! 

4.  The  addition  of  n^  to  a  future  or  imj)erative  com- 
monly causes  the  rejection  of  its  last  vowel,  except  in  the 
Hiphil  species  where  *»  remains  or  is  restored  nipif'i??, 
n^'^i^X .  The  Kal  imi^erative  with  0  becomes  "^^^j^ 
lioV  Id  ;  the  Kal  imj)erative  with  a  becomes  rri^Z)  Mhh'  dhd. 


§  41.     y<2«  Conmrsive. 


Vav  Gonversive  is  a  modification  of  the  copulative  1 
and,  and  is  so  called  because  it  has,  in  certain  cases, 
the  effect  of  converting  the  future  into  a  i^reterite  and 
the  preterite  into  a  future. 

Yav  Gonversive  prefixed  to  the  future  takes  Pattahh 
followed  by  Daghesh-forte  in  the  next  letter,  i-lp^  he  will 
shut,  iJp^l  and  he  shut.  If  this  be  Yodh  with  Sh'va 
Daghesh  is  usually  omitted,  t*"np.^^l .  Before  S'  of  the  first 
person,  which  cannot  receive  Daghesh,  Pattahh  is  length- 
ened to  Kamets,  "IS'^^S).  The  verb  commonly  suffers  the 
same  change  as  in  the  apocopated  future,  §  40.  2,  and  in 
the  first  person  sometimes  has  paragogic  n^  . 

Vav  Gonversive  prefixed  to  the  preterite  has  the  same 
pointing  with  Vav  Gonjunctive,  §  28,  "it^"  he  has  Tcept, 
"155^1  and  he  will  Jceep. 

For  the  influence  of  Vav  Gonversive  on  the  accent,  see 
§  17.  6. 


i5  42  verbs  with  suffixes.  43 

Vocabulary  10. 

pnx  11.  m.  Aaron  ^"2?^  v.  K.  to  chvell^  inliabit 

bx  adv.  not  f^.3i^3  n.  f.  tunic 

■bs  prep,  to^  unto^  res2'>ecting  nsb^  n.  f.  queen 

"ES  n.  m.  aslies  ^^"Tp^  u.  m.  Mordecai 

n-7^3  11.  m.  pi.  garments  bi)p  v.  P.  ^^  receive^  acGe])t 

lis  1).  m.  hail  ^S]?  v.  K   (fut.  a)  come  near, 

nsn  adv.  hitlier  afpioroacJi 

p^T  V.  K.  (fut.  «)  ^^0  cr^/  3>i)5  V.  K.  (fut.  «)  i!^  rend 

npyr  n  f.  cr?/  T^i^"i  u.  ni.  Amc/ 

i-ih  n.  f.  ncord  r^!"?  v.  K.  (fut.  «)  25o  '?^««A 

!?i\^  V.  K.  ^0  ^6  weary  pto  n.  m.  sachclotli 

t'd.  f.  /^rwit/  n^TB  V.  K.  (fut.  a)  to  se7id. 

oS^  or  ©n^  V.  K.  to  d/rive  out 

§  42.     y^T'Js  '?^ii!A   Suffixes. 

1.  The  personal  pronouns  are  frequently  suffixed  to 
tlie  verbs  of  which  they  are  the  object.  The  forms  of 
the  suffixes  have  already  been  given,  §  29.  2. 

2.  The  personal  terminations  of  the  verbs  suffer  the 
following  changes  before  suffixes : — 

PRETERITE 

Sing.  3  fem.     n^  becomes  n.. 

2  masc   n  sometimes  becomes  R  before  ''S. 

2  fem.     T\  becomes  ^^ . 
Plur.  ^  masc.    on  becomes  w.     T\\q 'i  fe7n.  plur,  does 
not  occur  with  suffixes. 

FUTURE. 

Plur.  2  a/itZ  3  fem.  Hi'piDf^n  becomes  iHi|))?n . 

3.  The  suffixes  are  joined  directly  to  those  verbal 
forms  which  end  in  a  vowel ;  those  forms  which  f  nd  in  a 


44  ETYMOLOGY.  ^42 

coiisouant  insert  befoie,  ^ ,  U2  and  "jS  a  vocal  Sli'va,  and 
before  the  remaining  suffixes  a  full  vowel,  which  in  the 
preterite  is  mostly  d  and  in  the  future  and  imperative 
mostly  e. 

4.  Nun  is  sometimes  inserted  between  the  future  of  tbo 
verb  and  the  suffix,  particularly  in  emphatic  and  pausal 
forms.  This  is  called  Nun  Epenthetic.  It  is  commonly 
united  by  Daghesh-forte  with  3  of  the  1  pers.  suffix  and 
T  of  the  2  pers.,  to  wdiich  it  is  almost  always  assimilated. 

5.  The  3  pers.  suffix  is  liable  to  the  folloAving  contrac- 
tions; in  the  masG.  ^n^  becomes  i,  ini.  becomes  v.,  ^nn 
becomes  w.,  ^n3 .  becomes  is., ;  in  the  fcm.  n  ^  becomes 
f^o  n*^-  becomes  nn.,  ns..  becomes  ri3__ , 

6.  The  first  and  second  persons  of  the  verb  do  not 
receive  suffixes  of  the  same  person  with  themselves. 

The  3  masc.  sing,  of  the  Preterite  Kal  baj^  assumes  the 
follo\^'iug  forms  in  combination  with  suffixes : — 

Sing.    1  com.        ■'?i'°^i?     k'tala'ni        he  hilled  me 

2  onasc.      ^^t^j?     k'tal'kha'      he  hilled  thee  (m.) 

Ifem.        "^^l?i?     k'talakh'       he  hilled  thee  (i.) 

.  ^n'stJp     k'tala'hfi     \  i     i  m   i  i  • 
S  masc.  J      :■   '■     ,  ,    -,   ,         I  he  hilled  him 
(     "h-o])     k'talo         j 

3  fern,.         f^^tpip     k'talah'         he  hilled  her 
PLrR.  1  com.         ^J?'9p     k'tala'nu       he  hilled  us 

2  masc.  D?'?'Jp  k'tal'lchem'  he  hilled  you  (ra.) 
2/(?m.  p'?"^!?  k'tal'khen'  he  hilled  you  ( f.) 
S  masc.  Q^^p  k'talam'  he  hilled  them  (m.) 

3  fern.  I^t^p  k'talan'  he  hilled  tliem  (  f ) 

7.  Verbs  having  e  in  the  Preterite  substitute  Tsere  foi 
Kamets  with  the  second  radical  throughout  the  Kal  pre 
terite  with  suffixes,  e.  g.  ''?3na  from  bis . 

The  remaining  parts  of  the  verb  are  sufficiently  repre 
sented  in  Table  VII. 


g  43. 


NOUNS,    GEJSTDEIl    AJMD   NUMBER. 


46 


Vocabulary  11. 


:iN  11.  TLi.fatlier 

^3  IS  11.  m.  Lord 

Di?  11.  f.  motlier 

n3  n.  f.  daughter 

b-ia  V.  P.  to  make  great 

pi"!  V.  H.  to  overtake 

D'l  n.  m.  hlood 


l^an  n.  m.  Haman 

T\%Vi2  11.  m.  altar 

rrianb-a  n.  f.  war^  fighting 

"1^0  V.  P.  to  shut  lip  I  H.  U 

cause  to  shut 
"ISO  V.  p.  to  recount^  tell 
nyn  n.  m..  famine. 


Vocabulary  12. 


nsi'^s  adv.  hotv 

TJlJi^S    11.  111.  ??Z«7i 

ri'i»s  11.  f.  woman 
nina  n.  f.  blessing 
pban  n.  Damascus 
?T"i'i  11.  m.  f.  '?/;(^^ 
?)^n  V.  K.  z'o  go^  walk 
i5t  v.  K.  to  remember 
f  ^n  T.  P.  to  deliver 
t\i'^   V.  P.  to  soil,  defile 
bicri  T.  H.  to  cause  to  rule 
S2  pi^ay,  I j^ray  thee 


^?5  pi'^^p.  before^  in  the  jyi'e 

sence  of 
^^2?  n.  m.  suckling^  babe 
"113!^  V.  P.  to  croivn 
tSTiJs  V.  K.  to  take  off  clothes 
Ts):!  n.  f.  trouble 
u^hyy  n.  f.  ^w.feet 
D^nn  adj.  merciful 
niabiri  n.  f,  garment 
Di'vD  V.  H.  to  rise  early 
ybffi  V.  K.  to  hear 
tosbri  V.  K.  to  lay  hold  of  seize. 


NOUNS. 
§  43.     Gender  and  Number. 

1.  Noims  ill  Hebrew  are  of  two  genders,  inasculiue 
and  feminine.  The  masculine  has  no  characteristic  ter- 
mination ;  tlie  feminine  ends  in  n^  or  ri. 

2.  Tliere  ai-e  three  numbers,  the  singular,  dual,  and 
plural.     The  dual  is  restricted  for  the  mDst  part  to  the 


46  ETYMOLOGY.  §  41, 

names  of  objects  occurring  in  pairs.     It  ends  in  D").  ic 
nouns  of  both  genders. 

3.  The  plural  of  masculine  nouns  ends  in  Q"'.  ,  or  mort 
I'arely  )"',  ,  and  that  of  feminine  nouns  in  ni . 

4.  It  is  to  be  observed,  hoAvever,  that  a  number  <»i 
feminine  nouns  lack  the  characteristic  endino;  in  tli<? 
singular.  Also,  that  some  masculine  nouns  take  rii  in 
the  plural,  some  feminines  take  w^,  ,  and  some  of  eacli 
gender  take  indifferently  D'' .  or  ni . 


§  44.     Feminine^  Dual^  and  Plural. 

The  following  changes  result  from  appending  the  ter- 
minations for  gender  and  number. 

I.  The  feminine  ending  n  . 

1.  If  the  ultimate  is  simj^le  there  is  no  change. 

masc.  fem.  masc.  fern. 

^^Tq     an  Egijptian,     iT''!^^  ^^t        second,   niii? 

■"i^;!     right,  t-\'^i'>2]  ^^^b^    third,      n^c^bis 

^ii^ps    interior,  niis^ps  ssiia     finding,  nxii^, 

2.  If  the  ultimate  is  mixed,  an  unaccented  Seghol  ia 
inserted  before  the  termination  to  prevent  the  concur- 
rence of  vowelless  consonants,  §  10.  3,  and  to  this  a  pre- 
ceding «,  e  or  t  is  commonly  assimilated. 


rnanc. 

fern. 

masc. 

fern.. 

^±t} 

hrohen, 

JT^^l^'? 

aiis" 

lying 

ri39b 

t^tyi 

tr'vple. 

mij|)ip73 

'^%^^ 

speahing 

^■}2"!'2 

r?)?^ 

gathered, 

fi^ip^ 

T>^ 

large 

^1^^ 

a'H^'is 

reddish, 

n^'iianx 

IS^^TiJ 

imperious 

npri? 

rfSiu 

shedding, 

t^3S'^' 

b-'sizju 

prudent 

n^3t?'a 

3.   If  the  last   letter   be   a  guttural,  Pattahh  is   sub- 
stituted for  Seghol,  §  10.  3. 


{$  44. 


FEMIJSriNE,   DUAL,  AND    PLURAL. 


47 


yiitJ  friend^    fern.  n^T'a        yairs    heard,  fern,  ny-bc: 

?i?to    hearing^  fem.  n?73tJ"        y^i^    toucJiing^     feiQ.  n^aia 

11.  The  femiuine  n^ ,  the  plural  D''.  or  ni,  aud  the 
dual  n\. 

1.  Kamets  and  Tsere  are  rejected  from  the  peiudt, 
except  from  nouns  in  n„ . 


biia  great,  fem.  n'^ina 

rnh5  high,  fem.  nnha 

n^ri|  written,  fem.  r.ivJns 

n^iria  restoring,  fem.  ni^ilj^a 

■jiis  master,  pi.  D-^ii^iJ 

"13T  'i^(97'4  pi.  D"''^n^ 

]in3T  memorial,  pi.  niiinDT 

pis  wifig,  du.  D^S53 


pi.  D-Si-ra 
pi.  D-'nha 
pi.  D^iins 
pi.  D'^n'^'ia^ 


f.  j)l.  niSiia 
f.  pi.  ninha 
f.  pi.  niiiins 
f.  pi.  m-^t-c 


y^'i'Q  interpreter,  \)\.  a^i^b^ 
nib  heart,  pi.  niinb 

niy   grape,  pi.  ciyS^ 

ybs  'r/^,  pi.  D^^ba 


2.  In  an  accented  mixed  ultimate 

(1)  Tsere  is  rejected  except  from  monosyllables,  or 
when  tlie  preceding  vowel  is  a  pretoiiic  Kamets.  Other 
v^owels  suffer  no  cliano-e. 


going,  fem.  J^ibh 
^£GJ  shedding,  fem.  nisiJJ 
DD-iri   ^*?^<:/^6,  pi.  D^psf' 


K>3 

but 


priest, 


pi.  D^inb 


p].  D^isirj 
bi?^ 


f.  pi.  mbbn 
f.  pi.  niisTiJ 
(^/?'r^/v    pi.  ninar^ 
ro4      pi.  nibp)3 


dead,  fem.  nn'a 

compdete,  fem.  nbbijj 

tZ/-,y,  fem.  nfcn;' 

^■?'^<?,  pi.  D^^y 

^/^i^A,  du.  Di^Dn;" 


pi.  Q'^h'a 

pi.  D^tlbTD 

pi.  D^irn;* 

QTU      name. 


f.  pi.  nina 
f.  pi.  niTsbifi 
f.  jjl.  niizJi;! 
pi.  niisTZJ 


^33    heavy,    pi.  D-i^ns 


(2)   If   two   consonants   have    coalesced   in   the    final 
letter,  this  is  doubled,  and  the  preceding  vowel,  if   long, 


in 


ETYMOLOGY. 


§44 


IS  siiortened.  A  like  doubliag  occurs  in  a  few  iiistancrs 
wliei'e  there  has  been  no  contraction  in  the  form. 

2n  (from  nin)  ^mwh,  fern,  nil  pi.  D'^iin  f.  pi.  nnnn 
DP  (from  ti'ior^)  perfect,  fem.  nisp  pi.  o^i^p,  f.  pi.  n-isp 
]6)^  .wir^/^,    fem.  nstaj^       pi.  D^spp    f.  pi.  nirt:;? 

p^^  ^/(?f^7,      fem.  nj^Toy      j)L  □■'|i)^y    f.  pi.  ni;?^? 

15  (from  ]i5)  garden,  pi.  0^5      I2ix  ^^'A^fZ,  pi.  a^Bis 

T?  (from  Tb)  ^6»<2^,  pl.n^Ty  b^i-in  bramble,  pi.  Q'^lJ^n 
ph  (from  ppn)  .s-to^^/^c^,  pi.  Q-'pn  nb  (from  nib)  heart,  pi.  niib 
qx  (for  ?1DS)  ??6>S6,     du.  n^'sx     1«  (fromlittj) /t;oM,pl.  C^sti^ 


3.  Nouns  having  an  unaccented  vowel  in  the  ulti- 
mate, commonly  called  Segholates,  §  10.  3,  drop  this 
vowel  1  )ef ore  the  feminine  ending  n  j  in  the  plural 
pre  tonic  Kamets  is  inserted,  §  10.  2,  and  the  vowel  of 
the  first  radical  falls  away ;  the  dual  sometimes  drops 
the  unaccented  Seghol  and  sometimes  inserts  pi'etonic 
Kamets. 


^ 

Ung, 

fem 

^TP. 

covert, 

fem. 

"m 

calf 

fem. 

'rck 

saying. 

fem. 

Dsy 

drengtlb 

fem. 

byi 

lord, 

fem. 

-f) 

foot. 

du. 

n-13 

hnec. 

du. 

queen, 


pi.   n^ib^    Ungs 
pi.  D^^no 

pi.  D^n^ax 
pi.  n-'^m 
pi.  D^bya    lords 
du.  D.iTX 
D":?"):;       Xi?.  Iiorn^^w.   D^^np  or  n^Tp 


nbbiQ 
nnnp 

T\yi^  or  'rHm 
D:^b;in       "jTS     ear 


a.  Medial  Vav  frequently  quiesces  in  Hholem  and  Todli  in  Tsere  before  tlw 
dual  and  plui-al  endings. 


n;ir3  death,        pi.  Qi'ri'a 
yiN  iniquity,     pi.  Qii'iK 


rr^T  (?ii»5  <r<?e,  pL  n'^n"'t 
y^y  eye.  du.  Q"'?''? 


g    45.  FEMININE,    DUAL,  AND    PLURAL. 

4.   Ill  a  simple  ultimate 
(1)  n^  is  rejected. 

nh"^      fair,  fem.  ns;;  pi.  u^i-^ 

ntby      domg,  fem.  ni^i?  pi,  u^ws 

ntr^yp   ivork,  pi.  n^ii??^  ni]?    r^ec?, 

ni<-iTa    c(/i)peara7ice,    pi.  CNHd  n'ito  ^^^6?, 

nbnt3    camp,  clu.  Df?^^  nth    5^^^', 


49 


f.  pi.  nion 

f.  pi.  nifejf 

pi  Q"^i)5 

23l.  ni'iiij 

pi.  D-'tn 


(2)  \  becomes  n;^ . ,  n^\  or  d\  ,  ni\ . 

int3    /7'6s7i,      fem.  nHtp  pi.  D'^'^nt)  f.  j^l.  ninia 

^31?     afflicted,  fem.  n^??  pi.  d^^:?  f.  pi.  ni*:? 

^"ins?  Hebrew,  fem.  n^niy  pi.  D^Hny  or  D^n^y  f.  pi.  ni^nny 
■"«      island,       pi.  D-'^x  "'riirbs  Philistine,  pi.  crnt^^?? 


§  45.     J??-  Feminine  Nouns. 

1.  Feminine  nonns  in  n^  of  tlie  form  derived  from 
SegLolates,  §  44.  3,  insert  pretonic  Kamets  in  the  plural, 
and  drop  tlieir  original  vowel ;  all  others  simply  substi- 
tute the  plural  for  the  singular  ending, 

salvation,  pi.  niyiiD^- 

blessing,  pi.  niinii 

vengeance,  pi.  rii)3p3 

counsel,  pi.  nii? 

garden,  pi.  nib 

67u}j>,  pi.  ni'^bs? 

2.  Feminine  nouns  in  ri..  (or  n_)  substitute  the  plural 
for  the  singular  ending,  and  reject  the  preceding  vowel,  if 
it  be  Hliolem  or  derived  from  Tsere ;  otherwise  they  restore ' 
it  to  what  it  would  have  been,  if  n  had  not  been  appended, 
8  44. 1,  2.    Nouns  in  rii_  take  ni",  and  nouns  in  ni  take  riv 


nsb^ 

queen. 

pi. 

ni5bi2 

T 

i^bm*} 

nnnp 

covert, 

pi. 

ni'inp 

ni-ia 

nsnn 

reproach. 

pi. 

nisnn 

n-i9)53 

n^)3s 

saying, 

pi. 

nin^aif: 

ni? 

nii-in 

desert, 

pi. 

niinn 

n25 

r    -:  I- 

lady, 

pi. 

niiya 

njps 

50 


ETYMOLOGY. 


§4G 


nih: 


n-i^T»Ta  (from  Toicia)  observance^   j)! 

nbssTa  (from  ^?^/'9)  ^^z?/^,             pi 

n^^^"ii«5  (froiu  nt^li!:)  reddish^ 

fipr'?  (fi'om  p'^r'a)  /rnrse, 

n?3T:  (from  5?i"i:)  y/;///, 

nyiji  (from  ?i|3)  touching^ 

njpji^  (from  p3i"'),  8uckei\ 

nng.  pi.         sing. 

nbatj  (?«r  0/'  c'oT"?^,  Q^?2T1J  n^ib^    kingdom^  rii'^Dbia 

3.  Before  the  dual  ending  n^   becomes  fi,  ;  and  nouns? 
in  t\^  follow  tlie  rule  of  other  Segliolates,  §  44.  II.  3. 


pi. 

Pl 
pL 

pl. 

pl.   nippi"! 


n3V  thigli^  du.  n^nsn^ 
nsis  li2},  du.  Q^nsia 
ni;c    ^^a;',      du.  Q^'nsffi 


^^i.    folding-door^  du.  D^nb^ 
nbi?  sloth^  du.  Qi'nb?? 

niiin:  Z'^'^ss,  du.  D'^ncn: 


Vocabulary    13. 


"jsx   n.  m.  f.  a  stoiie 
ni^x   n.  m.  Edam 
"iK3    n.  f.  a  10 ell 
li^na   n.  Giheon 
bi^a    adj.  grea%  large 
''ill   n.  in.  nation 
izJnn   adj.  new 
^5b    V.  K.  to  capture 


?[^^   V.  K.  to  reign 

^'S   n.  (witli  art.)  Ai 

T2?   n.  f.  city 

I'n    adj.  (nin)  much,  many 

r\T\  n.  f.  evil 

lySiD   V.  H.  /o  cast 

r\y^V\  n.  f.  [u'^\^v\)  fg-tree.,fig 


§  46.     Construct   State. 

1.  Wlien  one  noun  stands  in  a  relation  of  dependence 
on  another,   the  first  is  put  in  the  construct  state.     A 


§47.  FORMATION    OF   THE    CONSTRUCT.  51 

noim  whicli  is  not  so  related  to  a  followinc:  one  is  said 
to  be  in  tlie  absolute  state.  Tiius  ii'7  %oord  is  in  the  ab- 
solute state  ;  but  in  tlie  expression  ^^isri  nn"!  the  word  oj 
tJie  l^ing,  "inn  is  in  the  construct  state. 

2.  The  construct  is  a  shortened  form,  the  si^eakei 
unturally  hastening  forwai'd  from  the  fii'st  noun  to  the 
second,  which  is  necessary  to  comjDlete  the  idea. 


§  47.     Its  Formation. 

The  following  clianges  occur  in  the  formation  of  the 
construct : 

1.  The  feminine  n ^  becomes  fi.;  the  dual  u\  and  the 
plural  D"" .  become  ''..  . 

!^25  garden^  const.  t^|5  D'^^ri    statutes^  const.  ""^X] 

niib'a  qiieen^  const,  nib's  O'lpsp  judges,  const,  ^b^t' 

n;r»^  calf,  const,  nb.^^  o^ilnn   feet,  const.  r5;^n 

r^si  lady,  const.  nS^s  Q^iTi?    ears,  const.  ""iTX 

T  -:  I-  t/  7  -     :  I-  •  -  :    T  7  "IT 

2.  In  a  mixed  ultimate  Kamets  is  shortened  to  Pattahh : 
so  is  Tsere  when  preceded  by  pretonic  Kamets. 


absol. 

const. 

absol. 

const. 

T 

fish, 

^^ 

m 

old, 

ifer 

niis 

star, 

n5i3 

^^T} 

court. 

nin 

ttj-np^ 

sanctua/i'y, 

t'^'P'Q 

nil 

heavy, 

nis  or  'ins 

3.  Medial    1  commonly  quiesces  in  Hholem  and  ■>  in 
Tsere  ;  final  "^ .  becomes  "^ . . 

n^'b     death,         const,  rii^ '  s^5     valley,  const.  N''5 

^Ijn     midst,         const.  ?Tin  n'^a     house,  const.  tT'a 

ni^toip  c?/^;,!?,  const,  nitcj?  t\^T;t  fountains,  const,  ni:''!? 

but  "jiy  iniquity,  const.   ^iy  ^n      Z^/'6^,  const.  Tj 


52 


ETYMOLOGY. 


§4b 


4.  In  a  simple  ultimate  n..  becomes  n„  ;  other  vowels 
remain  imcliana;ed. 

nic       sJieep^        const,  nio         ^^^"0  going  for'th^  (ioi\9>i.  )f.%yc 
ni7T     sliepherd^  const.  rii?n        sis  Ac^*'?!,  const,  sns 

nip's   «/'?'//«?,        const,  nipia      s^n^  fearing^         c-^nst.  s'^;* 
niz??'a  worlt.,        const,  tib^'o     "i-iB  fruity  const,  "''^s 

5.  Kamets  and  Tsere  are  rejected  from  the  syllaVjle 
preceding  the  accent ;  and  if  this  occasions  a  concurrence 
of  vowelless  consonants,  a  short  vowel  is  inserted  between 
them,  §  10.  1. 


dbsol. 

const. 

absd. 

const. 

p'TS 

master^ 

V^^: 

nina 

blessing, 

ns-ia 

linsT 

memorial, 

^■^9? 

"^)?? 

vengeance, 

^■^1?? 

T     T 

iDord, 

"^2^ 

Ql^r^BTC 

lips. 

^b^^ 

m 

cloud, 

m 

D'lpb'Q 

hings, 

^?b^ 

^?? 

reed, 

s^.PP 

nisnn 

reproaclies, 

nisnn 

r^^ 

interpreter, 

r^^ 

niina 

threshing  floor. 

s,  niiia 

nib 

heart. 

nib' 

niiina 

beasts, 

nibr]3 

See  Table  XVII.     Declension  of  Nouns. 

VOCABULAKY    14. 

nbiax  n.  Amanah  "is:^  n.  m.  (ni)  ^?^.,9^ 

in  int.  Z^.''  behold/  nib?  n.  m.  ^^«« 

ini:  V.  K.  to  be  clean,  pure   I2"is  n.  Pharpar 

tibs  n.  f.  wing  bip  n.  m.  (ni)  '2)(9/(:?^,  sound 

n^i3  n.  m.  cAf^'?/5  pp ,    liip    adj.    (niap)    ///?'?e, 

ib-Q  V.  K.  to  sell  small 

in:  n.  m.  (D'' .  and  ni)  ?•^'^;67• 


§  48.     Paragogic   Vowels. 

1.  The  unaccented  vowel  n^  added  to  nouns  indicates 
motion  or  direction  towards  a  place,  whence  it  is  called 


^  49. 


NOUNH    Wrill    SUFFIXES. 


bA 


He  directive  or  He  local,  D^n'i^  heaven,  t^-q^^w    heaven 

fvard. 

2.  Paragogic  V  ,  i ,  or  n ,  are  iu  poetic  or  arcliseic 
forms  sometimes  appended  to  nouns  without  affecting  th«? 
sense,  e.  g.  ^?2  ,  Gen.  xlix.  11  for  1? ,  in^n  Gen.  i.  24  for 
n^n   nny^ffi''  Ps.  iii.  3  for  nib^uj;' . 


§  49.     Nouns  ivith  Suffixes,  see  Table  XYHI. 

1.  The  pronominal  suffixes  are  appended  to  nouns  in 
the  sense  of  possessive  pronouns. 

2.  The  forms  ^vhich  they  assume  when  attached  to 
sin o-ular  nouns  or  coml)ined  Avith  -^  ..  of  nouns  in  the  daai 
and  plural  are  shown  in  Table  V. 

I.  Before  the  grave  suffixes  (viz.  :  as  ,  19  ,  on   ,  ]n), 
Nouns  of  both  genders  and  of  all  numbers  take  the 
form  of  the  construct. 

suffix. 

IS7  ^vord,  const,  "i^n  °?7?7      yoio'  ivord 

zr^.:f\  words,         const.  '''32^  ni'^'D^'n    your  words 

D'l'nst;?  lijys,  const,  "^nsiri  ai'^ns^    your  lips 

nir£il7  h'ps,  const.   ni^siiJ  Di^nnSTiJ  f/ow  li]}s 

rona  blessing,      const,  nana  Din?73    your  blessing 

nisna  blessings,,  const.  i^i3"is  ai^nipna  your  blessings, 

n.  Before  the  light  suffixes, 

1.  Singular  or  plural  nouns  with  a  feminine  ending 
adopt  the  construct  form,  only  n.  is  changed  to   n^. 

nsbia  queen,        const,  nib^         suf.    '"'^f^'^  tny  queen 

m^'Q  queens,      const,  riiibp 

nina  blessing,    const,  nsna 

niina  blessings,  const.  tH:r\'3. 


suf.    ■'pbb''?  my  queens 
suf.    "'rii'ia  m.y  blessing 
suf.   ■'snbna  my  blessings 


2.  Singular   or  plural  iiouns   not  having   a   feminine 


64  ETYMOLOGY.  g   49 

ending  adopt  the  same  form  as  before  the  absolute  plural 
termination. 

plur.  sitf. 

na^  hearty  D^nnb  132b  *  my  lieai%  "^nnb    my  hearts 

"lai  word.,  °^'^5?  "''7^'?  ^^^y  word^  '''^n'^    my  words 

tjsir  jndge^  ditssin'  "lusp  myjudge^  liss'iD  ?>f^?/  podges 

^btt  ^^'7^^,  D'^sb'a  lib^a    ?72y  Icings. 

*  The  resemblance  to  the  plural  form  does  not  imply  that  the  word  is  plural, 
but  simply  that  appending  the  suffix  produces  the  same  efFect  upon  the  vowek 
and  syllables  of  the  word  as  the  addition  of  the  plural  ending. 

3,  Dual  nouns  retain  the  form  which  they  ha.ve  before 
the  absolute  dual  termination. 


mf. 

mf. 

^iy^     hands^  ^"1^     my  hands, 

D;^bTS     ears,  ''its     my  ears 

^i^T^  feet,       ''b^-l  my  feet, 

D;<nsTS  U2)s,   "^risis  my  lips. 

III.  Before  all  suffixes,  grave  or  light, 

1.  Segholate  nouns  in  the  singular  drop  theii'  unac- 
cented vowel,  as  before  the  feminine  ending  n^. 

mf. 

^btt      hing  ''?b'52      my  hing,      '^DSb^       your  king 

nnp      covert  ^^'^p.      niy  covert,   DDnfip       your  coveri 

r&b      strength       ''''bay    my  strength,  D^^^rs'     your  strength 
bsh       tvorlc  ''bc^S       qny  worlc,     oibys       your  worh 

Trfci/t'a  ohservance  '^n'l'at^^  my  ohserv.,  oin'i'aiC'a  your  ohserv, 
nspis    tunic  ^^^^^    my  tunic,     dinins     your  tunic. 

2.  Final  letters  which  are  doubled  in  the  plufal,  or  in 
which  two  consonants  have  coalesced,  are  doubled. 

plur.       suf. 

la      ifurdi  I!  W^h     ''sS      my  garden,       dis^     your  garden 
ab     heart     miiib     lab     my  heart,  diab     your  heart 

•jBis  ivheel    d'^isix  '^isis  my  wheel,  dbafiis?  your  roheel 

pn    statute  ^yv^     ^pn    my  statute,]n\i^^'^T\    your statuU. 


g  50  lliUEGULAi:    NOUNS.  55 

a.  Final  "^  is  dropped. 

n:bh    shejyherd    siif.  ^^i    my  shejJierd,    t]?7    thy  shejyhcra 
nbpia  caMle  siif.  '^?i?^  my  cattle,  ^fl?^  /%  m^Ze 

nDT2   rot/  suf.  ^a^   7?z  z/  rod,  ^ta^  ^A^  '^o^/ 

Vocabulary  15. 

nix    \.Y.  to  destroy  ^s?  y.\^.  to  fall  Jail 

inx    adj.  o/i.6  ®^3  n.  m.  f.  (ni)  soul,  life 

nns?    prep,  after  T^^?  v.  P.  to  demolish 

di?      11.  m.  tfire  "i^V  v.  K.  to  serve 

n7;\vii.f.  (q\  andni)pi7?r«'   qii?  v.  K.  to  />?^?'/i 

nn^     11.  m.  ■i^o?'<i  ">^^  v-  P-  ^^  ^>'(?<3^^  injneces 

nil      n.  m.  s^^t/  0®  ad\^  ^Aere 

nab     11.  m.  (ni)  A^^^?'^  CiT?  n.  iii.  (r^i)  ?i«m6 

nni^ia  n.  f.  statue 

§  50.     Irregular  Nouns. 

1.  The  following  nouns  of  frequent  occurrence  ar« 
irregular  in  the  plural : — 

Tlj^s  man  plur.  a^^_?^  rarely  D^t?^K 

niz?s  looman,  const,  nisi?    plur.       D"^? 

niaij  maid-servant  plur.  nimai? 

n^n  Ao^^S(3  plur.  a-'fjin 

13  son  plur.       °"'?2 

nn  daughter,  suf.  "^na      plur.       nibs 

oi^  day  plm*.       D^^:  rarely  ni^a^ 

-iny  (>/^;^  plur.  D^i?   once  D^V^ 

cs-i  A(?«r7  plui".  n"'^^:) 

2.  The  nouns  ns  father,  ni5  brother,  and  ns  ;/</>// /'/i 
take  tlie  vowel  ■•.  in  tlie  construct  and  before  suffixes 
e.  g.  const.  ^i»  ,  suf.  ^ii:?,  ^^32*  • 


56  ETYMOLOGY.  §  51 

§  51.     Imperfect   Verbs. 

Imperfect  verbs  depai't  more  or  less  from  the  standard 
inflection,  as  tlie  nature  of  their  radicals  may  require, 
They  are  of  three  classes,  viz.  : — 

I.  Guttural  verbs,  or  those  which  have  a  guttui'al 
letter  in  the  root. 

II.  Contracted  verbs,  two  of  whose  radicals  are  in 
certain  cases  contracted  into  one. 

III.  Quiescent  verbs,  or  those  which  have  a  quiescent 
or  vowel-letter  in  the  root. 

There  are  three  kinds  of  guttural  verbs : — 

1.  Pe  Guttural  verbs,  or  those  whose  first  radical  is  a 
guttural. 

2.  Ay  in  Guttural  verbs,  or  those  whose  second  radical 
is  a  guttural. 

3.  Laniedh  Guttural  verbs,  or  those  whose  third  radi- 
cal is  a  guttural. 

There  are  two  kinds  of  contracted  verbs : — 

1.  Pe  Nun  verbs,  or  those  whose  first  radical  is  Nun. 

2.  Ayin  Doubled  verbs,  or  those  whose  second  and 
third  radicals  are  alike. 

There  are  four  kinds  of  quiescent  verbs  : — 

1.  Pe  Yodh  verbs,  or  those  whose  first  radical  is  Yodh. 

2.  Ayin  Vav  and  Ayin  Yodh  verbs,  or  those  whose 
second  radical  is  Vav  or  Yodh. 

3.  Lamedh  Aleph  verbs,  or  those  whose  third  radical 
is  Aleph. 

4.  Lamedh  Pie  verbs,  or  those  in  which  He  takes  the 
place  of  the  third  radical. 

These  names,  like  those  of  the  verbal  species,  §  31,  are 
derived  from  the  verl)  ^i?s  to  do;  a  Pe  Guttural  verb  ir 


fj^   52,  53,  PE    GUTTURAL    VEKBS.  5? 

one  which  lias  a  guttural  in  that  place  which  Pe  occupies 
in  '5i?B  ,  that  is,  as  its  first  radical ;  and  so  with  the  lest. 


§  52.     Guttural    Verbs. 

Gutturals  have  the  following  peculiarities : — 

1.  They  prefer  the  vowel  Pattahh. 

2.  They  receive  Pattahh-furtive. 

3.  They  take  compound  in  pi-eference  to  simple  ShVa. 

4.  They  do  not  admit  Daghesh-forte. 

Resh  shares  the  last  peculiarity,  but  partakes  of  the 
others  only  in  a  very  limited  degree. 


§  53.     J^e  Guttural   Verbs,  see  Table  VIII. 

1.  Hhirik  of  the  letters  prefixed  to  the  root  is  changed 
to  Pattahh  or  Seghol ;  to  the  latter  chiefly  in  those 
parts  o]'  tenses  in  which  the  second  radical  has  prevail- 
ingly a. 

2.  For  simple  ShVa  the  guttural  takes  compound,  either 
Hhateph-Pattahh,  or  a  Hhateph  conformed  to  the  pre- 
ceding short  vowel.  Before  a  vowelless  letter  this  com- 
pound Sh'va  becomes  a  short  vowel  in  an  intermediate 
syllable. 

3.  Upon  the  omission  of  Daghesh-forte  in  the  infinitive, 
future,  and  imperative  Ni23hal,  the  preceding  Hhirik  is 
lengthened  to  Tsere. 

4.  A  few  verbs,  whose  first  radical  is  S5,  receive 
Hholem  in  the  first  syllable  of  the  Kal  future,  the  second 
vowel  being  Pattahh  or  Tsei'e.  This  is  called  the  Pe 
Aleph  (i^s)  mode  of  inflection. 

3* 


58  ETYMOLOGY.  §  5  I 


Vocabulary  16. 

ansj  or  anif   \  K.  (fut.  a)  to  l\t7}   v.  K.  to  turn,  N.  to  h 

love  turned 

C'^K *  n.  m.  a  inan,  each  pTn   v.   K.    (fut.   ci)    to    hi 
biij  V.  K.  (i?s)  to  eat,  H.  to        strong 

cause  to  eat  I'Q     n,  m.  manna 

5^?     iL  m.  God  ^13;^  n.  m.  servant 

)y2i<  v.'N.  to  he  verifodjfo'und  ^iy    v.  1^.  to  leave,  forsaJse 

true  Toy  V.  K,  to  stand 

Tax  V.  N.  («b)  to  5^  s^/t/  Dsy   n.  f.  (d\  and  ni)  houe 

15     n.  in.  (D''?3)  son  njbjp  u.  f.  «  curse. 

*  tti^X  is  the  common  word  for  an  individual  man ;  ttJiDX  is  poetic;  □'IN  is  a 
generic  term,  denoting  man  generally,  and  is  also  the  name  of  the  first  of  the 
human  race. 


§  54.     Ay  in  Guttural  Verhs,  see  Table  IX. 

1.  T]ie  v^owel  following  the  guttural  is  converted  into 
Pattahh  in  tlie  future  and  imperative  Kal  and  in  the 
feminine  plurals  of  the  future  and  imperative  in  the  other 
species. 

2.  When  the  second  radical  should  receive  simple 
Sh'va,  it  takes  Hhateph-Pattahh  instead ;  and  to  this  the 
new  vowel  formed  from  Sh'va  in  the  feminine  singular 
and  masculine  plural  of  the  imperative  is  assimilated. 

3.  Daghesh -forte  is  always  omitted  from  the  second 
radical  in  Piel,  Pual,  and  Hithpael,  in  which  case  the 
preceding  vowel  may  remain  short  in  an  intei'mediate 
syllable,  or  Hhirik  may  be  lengthened  to  Tsere,  Pattahb 
to  Kamets,  and  Kibbuts^  to  Hholem. 


i>  55.  lamedii  guttukal  verbs.  59 

Vocabulary  17. 

?in3    V.  K.  p.  to  bless,  N.  Pu.  ^^^23  n.  m.  benefit 

to  be  blessed  T^jna    v.  P.  to  drive  yut 

bxa    V.  K.  to  redeem^  P.  to  -in:p  v.  P.  to  ]piir if  ij,  demise 
defile  N.  to  be  purified 

§  55.     Lamedh  Guttural   Verbs,  see  Table  X. 

1.  The  vowel  preceding  the  third  radical  becomes  Pat- 
tahh  in  the  future  and  imperative  Kal  and  in  the  femi- 
nine plurals  of  the  future  and  imperative  in  the  other 
species. 

2.  Tsere  preceding  the  third  radical  may  either  be 
changed  to  Pattahh  or  retained;  in  the  latter  case,  the 
guttural  takes  Pattahh-furtive. 

3.  Hhirik,  Hholem  (of  the  infinitive),  and  Shurek 
suffer  no  change  before  the  final  guttural,  which  receives 
a  Pattahli-furtive. 

4.  Tlie  guttural  retains  the  simple  Sh'va  of  the  perfect 
verb  before  personal  terminations  beginning  with  a  con- 
sonant, though  compound  Sh'va  is  used  before  suffixes. 

5.  When,  however,  a  personal  affix  consists  of  a  single 
vowelless  letter,  as  in  the  second  feminine  singular  of  the 
preterite,  the  guttural  receives  a  Pattahh-fui'tive. 

Vocabulary  18. 

p'^ij  n.  m.  lord,  master  '    ^'IT  v.  K.  to  sow 

TX  adv.  then  iiy^  adj.  deaf 

IT'S  n.  f.  ea/r  yh^  v.  P.  H.  to  weary,  came 

tTjT  n.  m.  olive-Pt'ee,  olive  to  toil 


«30  ETYMOLOGY.  §  50 

robia^  n.  f.  Mngdom  nps  v.  N.  to  he  opened^  used 
5?;'a  V.  N;  to  ^6  withheld  specially  of  the  ey^^;5 

■^■•ly  adj.  /y//7^c/  nns  V.  N.  to  he  o])ened 

"i"'?  n.  f.  eye  n^is  v.  K.  to  send 

r?  11.  111.  tree  t\il%  adv.  tJiitlier. 


§56.     Fe  JS\m  {it)    Fm>5,  see  Table  XI. 

Nun,  as  tlie  first  radical  of  verbs,  lias  two  peculiarities, 
viz. : — 

1.  At  tlie  end  of  syllables  it  is  commonly  assimilated 
to  tlie  following  consonant,  the  two  letters  being  written 
as  one,  and  the  doubling  indicated  by  Daghesh-forte.  In 
the  Hophal  Kamets-Hhatuph  becomes  Kibbuts  before  the 
doubled  letter. 

2.  In  the  Kal  imperative  with  Pattahh  it  is  frequently 
dropped,  its  sound  being  easily  lost  at  the  beginning  of  a 
syllable  when  it  is  without  a  vowel.  A  like  rejection 
occurs  in  the  Kal  infinitive  construct  of  a  few  verbs,  the 
abbreviation  being  in  this  case  compensated  by  adding 
the  feminine  termination  ri. 

]np  assimilates  its  last  as  well  as  its  first  radical 
nj?b  has  the  peculiarities  of  Pe  Nun  verbs. 

Vocabulary  19. 

n'ins  n.  f.  sister  '^)^  n.  m.  death 

TiJn^  n.  in.  honey  ^i?  v.  H.  to  tell^  Ho.  to  he  fold 

D'^^n  11.  111.  pi.  life  t^5?  V.  K.  N.  to  approach 

^sn  11.  111.  ("^i^n)  half  fTii3j?  n.  f.  incense 

n-bb,  xrt^^  for  what?  ivhy?  D'^^n^  n.  m.  ^\.  mercies^  com- 

i6^TQ  11.  m.  instruction  passions. 


^  57.  AYIN    DOUBLED    VKUBS.  6i 


§  57.     Atjin  Doubled  {'$'$)    FtW^s,  see  Table  XI L 

1.  In  tlie  Kal,  Niplial,  Hipliil,  and  Hoplial  the  repeti- 
tion of  tlie  same  sound  is  avoided  by  uniting  tlie  tvvT. 
similar  radicals  and  giving  the  intervening  vowel  to  tlif 
previous  lettei',  thus:  no  for  ^io,  no  for  ::i3D . 

2.  In  the  Kal  this  contraction  is  optional  in  the  pret- 
erite ;  it  is  rare  in  the  infinitive  absolute  though  usual  in 
the  construct,  and  it  never  occurs  in  the  participles. 
With  these  exceptions  it  is  universal  in  the  species  already 
\:amed. 

3.  This  contraction  produces  certain  changes  both  in 
the  vowel,  which  is  thrown  back,  and  in  that  of  the  pre- 
ceding syllable. 

(1)  When  the  first  radical  has  a  vowel  (pretonic 
Kamets)  this  is  simply  displaced  by  the  vowel  of  the 
second  radical,  nio ,  nc;  nncn  ,  3i0n . 

(2)  When  the  first  radical  ends  a  mixed  syllable,  this 
will  become  simple  upon  the  shifting  of  the  vowel  fi*om 
the  second  radical  to  the  first.  Then  a  Daghesh-forte 
may  be  given  to  the  first  radical  in  order  to  preserve  tlie 
preceding  short  vowel,  or  the  preformative  may  take  the 
simplest  of  the  long  vowels  «,  or  its  previous  vowel  may 
be  lengtliened  from  Hhirik  to  Tsere,  Pattahh  to  Kamets, 
and  Kamets-IIhatuph  to  Shurek,  thus:  nso';'  becomes 
atj')  or  j6;  ,  and  Ti^":  "li?: . 

(3)  The  vo^\  el,  which  has  been  throw^n  back,  is  com- 
pressed as  vowels  usually  are  before  two  consonants. 
Thus  in  the  Niphal  future  and  imperative,  nis';' ,  ns;*  ; 
nnsn ,  ssn  (comp.  bibp ,  n^iop)  ;  in  the  Hiphil,  n'-aon , 
son  (comp.  biup^ ,  n:bi3jpri). 

4.  Although  the  letter,  into  which  the  second  and 
tliird  radicals  have  been  contracted,  I'epresents  two  con- 


82  ETYMOLOGT.  §  57 

soih-iuts,  the  doubling  cannot  be  made  to  appear  at  the 
end  of  a  word.     But, 

(1)  When  in  the  coui'se  of  inflection  a  vov/el  is  added, 
the  letter  receives  Dagliesh-forte,  and  the  preceding 
vowel,  even  where  it-  would  be  dropped  in  peifect  verl)s, 
is  retained  to  make  the  doubling  possible,  and  hence  pre- 
serves its  accent,  §  17.  2.  b^  5^??  ,  ^-C^ . 

(2)  Upon  the  addition  of  a  personal  ending  which 
begins  with  a  consonant,  the  utterance  of  the  doubled 
letter  is.  aided  by  inserting  o  (i)  in  the  preterite,  and  e 
("i.)  in  the  future.  By  the  dissyllabic  appendage  thus 
formed  the  accent  is  carried  forward,  and  the  previous 
part  of  the  word  is  shortened  in  consequence  as  much  as 
possible,  ncn ,  niicn ;  36; ,  "picr^ . 

(3)  When,  by  the  opei'ation  of  a  rule  already  given, 
the  first  radical  has  been  doubled,  the  reduplication  of 
the  last  radical  is  frequently  omitted  in  order  to  relieve 
the  word  of  too  many  doubled  letters,  ^i&l ,  f^J^GFi .     • 

5.  The  Piel,  Pual,  and  Hithpael  sometimes  preserve 
the  perfect  forms,  sometimes  reduplicate  the  contracted 
root,  as  ^099,  ^pfii^ri ,  a,nd  sometimes  give  u])  the  redup- 
lication altoo-ether  and  insert  the  lono;  vowel  Hholem 
after  the  first  radical,  siis,  ^Ip^riv'. 

6.  In  the  Kal  and  Hiphil  futures,  when  the  penult  is  a 
.';imple  syllable,  the  accent  is  drawn  back  hy  Vav  Con- 
versive  and  the  Towel  of  the  ultimate  is  shortened,  ab;* , 
30''")  :  ^D"' ,  21?"!] . 


Vocabulary  20. 

3S  conj.  if  '5?a  n.  m.  Baal^  lord 

nis  V.  K.  to  curse     Ho.  to  ^%  v.  K.  to  roll 
be  cursed  W^  ^  11.  toe ncsJi, pulverize 


§    58.  PE   YODH    VERBS.  6S 

!ibn  V  H,  to  hegin  ^io  v.  K.  surround 

Tr^^T\'}  u.  m.  Judali  n3  n.  m.  (cojist.  "^s)  mouth 

"•Tn^  11.  m.  a  Je^.v  O^iB  n.  m.  x\.faGe. 

Ths^  11.  f.  cave 


§  58.     Pe   Yodh  {<^)    Fer^  see  Table  XIV. 

1.  The  first  radical  is  mostly  Yodh  at  the  beginning, 
and  Vav  at  the  close,  of  a  syllable. 

2.  In  the  Kal  futui-e,  if  Yodh  be  retained  it  will  quiesce 
in  and  prolong  the  previous  Hhirik,  and  the  second  radi- 
cal will  take  Pattahh,  e.  g.  tih'^l ;  if  the  first  radical  be 
rejected  the  previous  Hhirik  is  commonly  lengthened  to 
Tsere,  ^p.'? ,  the  Pattahh  of  the  second  syllable  being 
sometimes  changed  to  Tsere  to  correspond  with  it,  2©;^ ; 
in  a  few  instances  Hhirik  is  preserved  by  giving  Daghesh- 
forte  to  the  second  radical  as  in  Pe  Nun  verbs,  niki ,  pd'^ . 

3.  Those  verl:>s  which  reject  Yodh  in  tlie  Kal  future, 
reject  it  likewise  in  the  imperative  and  infinitive  con- 
struct^ the  infinitive  being  prolonged  as  in  Pe  Nun  verbs 
by  the  feminine  termination. 

4.  In  the  Nijjhal  preterite  and  participle,  Vav  cpiiesces 
in  its  homogeneous  vowel  Hholem ;  in  the  infinitive, 
future,  and  imperative,  where  it  is  doubled,  it  retains  its 
consonantal  character. 

5.  In  the  Iliphil,  Vav  quiesces  in  Hholem ;  a  few  verbs 
have  Yodh  quiescing  in  Tsere,  3"''0"'n ,  s'^tb"'.';' ;  more  rarely 
still  the  first  radical  is  dropped  and  the  preceding  short 
vowel  is  preserved  by  doubling  the  second  radical,  -^'^^n, 

G.  In  the  Hophal,  Vav  quiesces  in  Shurek ;  occasionally 
the  short  vowel  is  preserved  and  Daghesh  inserted  in  the 
second  radical,   il^.?. . 


64  ETYMOLOGY.  J<   59 

7.  Ill  the  Hitlipael  the  first  radical  is  commonly  Yodlj 
Init  a  few  verbs  have  Vav. 

?I^0  follows  the  analogy  of  Pe  Yodh  verbs. 


Vocabulary  21. 

^r\^  11.  111.  te7it  y'l'^  V.  H.  to  cause  to  hioio^ 
n^riK  n.  in.  Allah  let  hnoio 

T\i'&  adv.  wlieref  ©n^  v.  H.  to  drive  out 

?j^n  v.  H.  to  cause  to  go^  ngs  n.  in.  (ni)  throne 

lead  "i?"?^  11-  ^^-  wilderness 

tii^  v.  K.  to  he  dry  ust^  n.  m.  judgment. 


§  59.     Ay  in    Vav  (fy)  and  Ay  in  Yodh  (''"3?)    Verh%. 
see  Table  XIII. 

1.  The  quiescent  may  be  rejected  and  its  vowel  given 
to  the  preceding  radical.  So  in  the  Kal  preterite :  D]5 
for  Dijp,  where  a  is  in  partial  compensation  for  the  con 
traction,  n^  for  thi.  Active  participle  Qp  for  Dj]?,  rra 
for  Thyi ,  the  ordinary  participial  form  being  superseded 
by  that  of  another  verbal  derivative.  Hijihil  and  Ho- 
phal:  D-ipn  for  a-'ijpn,  □^p;'  for  n^ip^,  np^n  for  oipn, 
the  short  vowel  of  the  prefix  being  prolonged  in  a  simple 
gyllal)le. 

2.  Or  it  may  be  converted  into  its  homogeneous  vowel 
u  or  /,  D^p,  n^n ;  a^p^,  ^"•■^r?  the  prefix  usually  taking 
the  simplest  of  the  long  vowels,  dju  combined  with  a 
preceding  or  accompanying  a  forms  o,  Kal  abs.  infin.  Dip 
=hmm^  Niphal  Dip?  for  Dip?. 

3.  In  the  first  and  second  persons  of  the  Niphal  and 
Hiphil  preterites,  6  (i)  is  inserted  before  the  affixed  termi- 
nations, and  sometimes  e  ('^,)  in  the  feminine  plui'als  of 


§  (')().  LAMEDII    ALEril    VE1IB8.  6f, 

tlie  Kal  future.  lu  the  Niplial  preterite,  wlieu  the  in 
serted  i  receives  the  accent,  the  preceding  i  is  for  eu])honj 
changed  to  ^. 

4.  In  the  Kal  and  Hiphil  species  the  apocopated  future 
takes  0  and  e  in  distinction  from  the  ordinary  future 
which  has  u  and  i,  3123"^^ ,  ^i?^ .  With  Vav  Conversive  tlie 
accent  is  drawn  hack  to  the  simple  penult,  and  the  vowel 
of  the  last  syllable  is  shortened,  ni^H  ,  nic^i . 

5.  (1)  In  the  Piel,  Pual,  and  Hithpael,  the  form  of  j)er- 
feet  verbs  is  rarely  adopted,  the  second  radical  appearing 
as  1,  e.  g.  ^-i^,  or  as  '',  e.  g.  D!:p. 

(2)  Commonly  the  third  radical  is  reduplicated  instead 
of  the  second,  which  then  quiesces  in  Hliolem,  Pi.  D^aip , 
Pu.  Diaip,  Hith.  oiiipnn. 

(8)  Sometimes  the  quiescent  letter  is  omitted  from  the 
root,  and  the  resulting  biliteral  is  reduplicated,  Pi.  bibs , 
Pu.  bsbs. 

Vocabulary  22. 

rfbiijt  n.  f.  ground,  land        "\^i  n.  m.  young  man 

Xlk  adv.  loTieref  only  after  "in;?  v.  K.  to  hury ;  N.  to  he 

'j'a  ,  yM'Q  tvlience  f  hurled 

n3s<  adv.  whither  f  ^^^^.  n.  i.  former  state 

si2  V.  K.  (fut.  Nii^^)  to  come;  D^p  v.  K.  to  arise 

H.  to  cause  to  come,  hring  S"^"i  v.  K.  to  contend 
Tf?n  Hith.   to   go  for  one^s  y^t  v.  K.  to  return ;  H.   t<^ 

self  go  ahout  cause     to     return,     hring 

]''b  V.  K.  to  lodge  hach 

n^Q  V.  K.  to  die ;  H.  to  ])ut  nnsiij  n.  f.  handmaid 

to  death 

§  60.     Lamedh  Ale]?h  (x^)    Verhs,  see  Table  X\. 
1.  Aleph,  as  the  third  radical  of  verbs,  retains  its  con 


66  ETYMOLOGY.  §  61 

soiiantal  character  only  when  it  stands  at  the  beginning 
of  a  syllable. 

2.  At  the  end  of  the  word  it  invariably  quiesces  in  the 
preceding  vowel,  and  if  this  be  Pattahh,  it  is  lengthened 
to  Kaniets;  so  always  in  the  Kal  future  and  imperative, 
where  X  as  a  guttural  requires  «,  i^^'Q'j  for  s^i^'? . 

3.  Before  syllabic  affixes  i5  quiesces  in  Kamets  in  the 
Kal  preterite  T)^^'^ ,  except  in  those  words  which  have 
Tsere  as  their  proper  vowel,  C^'^t  •  I^  the  preterites  of 
the  derivative  species  it  quiesces  in  Tsere,  and  in  all 
futures  and  imperatives  in  Seghol. 


VOCABULAKY    23. 

i^K  n.  Z7?'  ^'?^   V,  K.  to  find 

sna  V.  K.  to  create  ^y^  n.  f.  Ma/i^a  (hitter) 

"i™  adj.  dean^pure  ''''35^5  n.  f.  Naomi  (sweet) 

KS^  V.  K.  to  go  out ;  H.  to  ""bv  n.  m.  £Jli 

bring  out  x'^1?  v.  K.  to  call 

D'l'iiss  n.  m.  pi.  Clialdees  a"''pnn  n.  m.  pi.  troughs 

n^  n.  m.  (try^)  heart  f  ^i  v.  K.  to  run 

k3^  v.  K.  to  he  full ;  N.  to  niis  v.  K.  to  lie  down 

he  filled;  P.  to  fill  bkrc^i)  n.  m.  Samuel 


§  61.     Lamedli  He  (nb)    F^rJs,  see  Table  XVI. 

1.  The  third  radical  which  is  Yodh  or  Vav,  does  not 
appear  at  the  end  of  the  word  except  in  the  Kal  passive 
participle  '^'hl ;  in  all  other  cases  it  is  rejected  or  softened, 
the  resulting  vowel  termination  being  usually  expressed 
by  the  letter  n . 

The  various  preterites  end  in  n,. 

The  futures  and  participles  in  n... 


S  61.  LAMEDII    HE    VERBS.  6(? 


S 


The  imperatives  in  n.. 

The  absolute  infinitives  in  n'  or  n_ . 

The  construct  infinitives  have  the  feminine  ending  tii . 

2.  Before  personal  endings  beginning  with  a  vowel,  the 
last  radical  (thougli  occasionally  retained  in  prolonged 
and  pausal  forms  ^''50)?  is  commonly  rejected,  and  its 
vowel  o;iven  to  the  antecedent  consonant,  ^"^a  for  TOS^ . 

O  /  T  ;  FT 

3.  Before  personal  endings  beginning  with  a  consonant 
the  radical  "^  remains  and  quiesces  in  either  Hhirik  or 
Tsere  in  the  preterites  and  in  Seghol  in  the  futures  and 
imperatives. 

4.  The  third  person  feminine  of  tlie  preterites  retains 
the  primary  characteristic  n^,  l^i^^,  which  is  commonly 
softened  by  an  appended  n^,  nnbs, 

5.  Forms  not  augmented  by  personal  endings  lose  their 
final  vowel  before  sufiixes,  e.  g.  "i^^a  ,  tjba  from  nb5  .  The 
preterite  3  fem.  takes  its  simple  form,  e.  g.  ^nn^a  or  ^r\"3a  . 

6.  The  final  vowel  n.  is  rejected  from  the  futures 
when  apocopated,  or  when  preceded  by  Vav  Conversive. 
6-  g-  ^^? ,  ^5!"!^  from  T^j^^ .  The  concurrence  of  final  con- 
sonants thence  resulting  in  the  Kal  and  Hiphil  is  com- 
monly relieved  by  inserting  an  unaccented  Seghol  between 
them,  Kal,  b^\  or  b^j.  from  nb.v ;  Hiph.  ^.nj ,  b.)^i  from  nb^i^ . 

7.  The  final  vowel  n_  is  sometimes  rejected  from  tho 
imperative  in  the  Piel,  Hiphil,  and  Hithpael  species,  e.  g 
h  for  n^a,  bin  for  ^'?^k},  H^^n  for  n^ann. 

fi^n  to  ije,  fut.  ti"!n;? ,  apoc.  Tn;! ,  part,  n'in . 
njn  to  live,  fut.  n.in;'. ,  apoc.  ''n^. 

Vocabulary  24. 
D5^«  adv.  truhj,  indeed      ■      tiia  v.  K.  to  huild 
"•3  r|S{   how  much  more,   or     T\^^T^  v.  K.  to  le 

after    a    negative    hoio     Ti^  v.  K.  to  go    down^  do 

much  less  scend 


68  ETTMOLOGY.  §§    62,  ^3 

pbffin^  ^  n.  Jerusalem  r\i6'J  v.  K.  to  make,  do^  N.  U 

-nrs?3  as  he  done 

bi3  V.  P.  (^sb^)  to  contain 

n33  V.  P.  to  comjylete^  finish  nna  v.  P.  to  command 

ni3)a  n.  f.  led  nsjn  v.  K.  to  see^  N.  to  5^  s6^'J 

nSs"  V.  K.   to   <7c>   uj},  H.  /c*        to  a^yjyear 

hring  up,  offer  n'tfbiJ:  n.  m.  Solomon 

nSi?  11.  f.  hurnt-offering  rr^iTiJ  ad^^  <x  second  tiryie 

^  Pointed  as  though  it  were  written  D^llUI'i'i . 


§  62.     Douhly  Imperfect   Verbs. 

Verbs  which  have  two  weak  letters  in  the  root,  oi 
which  are  so  constituted  as  to  belono-  to  two  different 
classes  of  imperfect  verbs,  commonly  exhibit  the  peculiar- 
ities of  Ijoth,  unless  they  interfere  with  or  limit  one  an- 
other. Thus,  a  verb  which  is  both  SB  and  n'i?  will  follow 
the  analogy  of  both  paradigms,  the  former  in  its  first,  and 
the  latter  in  its  second  syllable.  But  in  verbs  which  are 
])oth  13?  and  ri'b,  the  1  is  invariably  treated  as  a  perfect 
consonant,  and  the  n'^  peculiarities  only  are  preserved. 


§  63.      Unusual  Forms. 

1..  Verbs  V)elonging  to  one  class  of  impei^fect  verbs 
occasionally  adopt  forms  from  another  and  closely  related 
class.  Thus,  a  n's  verb  may  appear  with  a  n"b  form,  oi 
an  "^V  verb  Av^itli  an  ^''S  form,  or  vice  versa. 

2.  A  few  verbs  of  different  classes  adopt  the  peculiar 
y'y  or  "^"y  modes  of  forming  the  Piel,  Pual,  and  Hithpael, 
inserting  the  vowel  b  instead  of  the  usual  reduplication 


§g  64,  05.  NUMERALS.  6^\ 

\i;^w  and  ^'':}^L; ,  Piels  of  ^'Htw  ,  ^•'^^?5ri'^  and  'ifc^an^  from 
ffiya ,  or  doubling  the  third  radica-l  in  pLice  of  the  second, 
e.  g.  I??';],  ^?^«,  s^i^?.  (=1^1x2)  from  nsp  (  =r  "^.ss ), 
f^ins^'^f?  (fut.  ninPT2J;>,  with  Vav  Conv.  Tihitc^^)  from 
nfiffi,    01-   reduplicating   an  entire   syllable,  e.  g.  "i^ipn, 

3.  A  very  few  instances  occur  of  what  may  be  called 
compound  species ;  thus,  Niphal  of  Pual  llsJ^ia ,  Niphal  of 
Hithpael  ^n&^i?,  is?5 ,  Jninic?. 

§  64.     Quach'iliteral   Verbs. 

The  number  of  quadriliteral  verbs  is  very  small.  Some 
adopt  the  vowels  and  inflections  of  the  Piel  and  Pual 
species,  while  others  follow  the  liiphil. 

§  65.     Numerals,  see  Table  XIX. 

1.  The  cardinals  from  three  to  ten  are  in  form  of  the 
singular  number,  and  have  a  feminine  termination  when 
joined  to  masculine  nouns,  but  omit  it  when  joined  to 
feminine  nouns. 

2.  The  tens  are  formed  by  adding  the  masculine  plural 
termination  to  the  units,  Q'^'ito:^  tiventy  being,  however, 
derived  not  from  tioo  but  from  te7i  "li^i^ . 

3.  There  are  no  distinct  forms  for  ordinals  above  ten, 
the  cardinal  numbers  being  used  instead. 

4.  Fractional  parts  are  expressed  by  the  feminine  ordi' 
nals,  as  well  as  by  special  terms. 

VOCABULAEY    25. 

•^S'^i?  n.  f.  epliah  TO'is  n.  m.  Pharaoh 

^'in  n.  m.  month  naio  n.  f.  (ta"^,)  year 

nb  n.  m.  Noah  b^»  n.  m.  shskel 
n'^iijy  n.  m.  decade^  ten 


70  ETYMOLOGY  §  06 

§  66.  Separate  Particles. 

1.  The  longer  particles,  wlietlicr  adverbs,  prepositious 
conjunctions  oi  interjections,  are  written  as  separate 
words. 

2.  The  prepositions  "ifi^  after ^  "bs  to,  ^?  unto^  ^?  ujyor.^ 
and  nnn  under ^  assume  before  suffixes  the  form  of  nouns 
in  the  masculine  plural,  e.  g.  '''inN ,  ^'^'ins ;  'j''3  hetioeen^ 
adopts  sometimes  a  singular,  sometimes  a  masculine 
plural,  and  sometimes  a  feminine  plural  form,  ii'^s  and 
'T'D'^a  ,  ^rra  and  ^s-^nis^a  . 

3.  The  preposition  ns  with^  commonly  becomes  PS 
before  suffixes,  e.  g.  "^ri)* ,  D3r>« ,  and  is  thus  distinguished 
from  fii?  the  sign  of  the  definite  object,  which  beconicjE 
tiiK ,  or  before  grave  suffixes,  riK ,  e.  g.  ''ri«,  oSr'^ . 


SY  NTAX. 

§  67.  Tlie  Copula. 

1.  The  predicate  of  a  sentence,  if  a  substantive,  adjeC' 
tive,  or  pronoun,  may  be  directly  connected  with  its  sul)- 
jeet  without  an  intervening  copula,  DiSi^  n''nin''n3-b3  all 
Iter  paths  (sire)  peace,  V?*?  ^"^^  ^^^  ^^^<?  (was)  good. 

2.  Or  the  verb  njin  to  Je,  or  the  pronoun  sin  of  the 
third  person,  may  be  used  as  a  copula,  inn  nn^n  f'ji^T^ 
the  earth  was  desolate,  tr^?  ^^"^  ''^'^^T'D  ^'hr'^  l^^  fourth 
river  is  Euphrates. 


§  68.   The  Article. 

1.  The  article  is  used  in  Hebrew  as  in  English  to  dis- 
tinguish an  object  as  one  which  has  been  mentioned 
before,  as  well  known,  as  the  only  one  of  its  class,  or  as 
distinguished  above  others  of  like  kind. 

2.  It  is  also  prefixed  to  nouns  employed  in  a  generic  or 
imiversal  sense,  ^^V^^  gold.,  rriyziV^ry  wisdom.  So  in  com- 
parisons, 1^3  as  a  (lit.  the)  nest,  Isa.  10 :  14. 

3.  It  is  likewise  found  in  some  cases  where  tlie  English 
idiom  requires  a  word  still  more  specific,  as  a  possessive 
pronoun :  she  tooh  Sl^^^n  the  veil,  Gen.  24  :  65,  i.  e.  the 
one  which  she- had,  her  veil ;  or  a  demonstrative,  as  be- 
fore words  denoting  time,  Di'^n  to-day,  '^'X^^  this  yea/r ^ 
or  tlie  sign  of  the  vocative,  ^^^n   0^  Icing  ! 


72  SYNTAX.  §g  69-1 


§  69.  Nouns  definite  without  the  Article 

\ .  The  following  are  definite  without  the  article  : — 

(1)  Proper  nouns,  which  only  receive  it  if  they  were 
originally  appellatives. 

(2)  Nouns  with  pronominal  suf&xes. 

(3)  Noiuis  in  the  construct  state  before  a  definite 
Qoun. 

2.  The  article  is  often  omitted  in  poetry  where  it  woii]»l 
be  required  in  prose. 

§  70.  Adjectives. 

1.  Both  qualifying  and  predicate  adjectives  agree  in 
gender  and  number  with  the  nouns  to  which  they  belong. 

2.  Qualifying  adjectives  usually  stand  after  the  noun 
and  agree  with  it  likewise  in  definiteness,  that  is  to  say, 
if  the  noun  is  made  definite  whether  by  the  article  or  in 
any  of  the  ways  specified  in  the  preceding  section,  they 
receive  the  article,  Din  ia  a  ivise  son,  nDiDH  7";^i«n  the 
good  land. 

3.  Predicate   adjectives   commonly   stand   })efore   the      I 
noun,  and  do  not  take  the  article,  even  though  the  noun 

is  definite,  "li'^r?  sits  the  ivord  is  good.  j 

§  71.  Demonst/i'otive  Pronouns. 

1.  Demonstrative  pronouns  follow  the  same  rule  ol 
position  and  agreement,  only  the  nouns  which  they  qualify 
are  invariably  definite,  ''^^T)  C'^^'^O  these  things,  rhk 
D'^'i^^'^r?  these  are  the  things. 

2.  If  both  an  adjective  and  a  demonstrative  qualify 


i^g  72,   7i).  i^UMKKALS.  7iJ 

l]ie   same   douii.   the    demonstrative  is  placed  last^  yi^'Q 
rs-7r  niitsn  this  good  lancL 


§  72.    Comparison  of  Adjectives. 

1.  Comparison  is  expressed  by  means  of  tlie  preposL 
Hon  I'a  from^  placed  after  the  adjective  or  other  word 
expressive  of  quality,  D'^2'':s^  •^''9?0  r^^i'D  wisdom,  is  better 
than  riibies^  lit.  is  good  from  rubies ;  ^i2)a  b'^ss  /  will  he 
greater  than  thou. 

2.  The  superlative  degree  may  ])e  expressed, 

(1)  By  adding  bs  all  to  the  comparative  particle  "jti, 
Dnj:""':n-b3'a  biia  greatest  of  all  the  sons  of  the  east,  lit. 
great  fi'om  all,  etc. 

(2)  By  an  emphatic  use  of  the  positive,  so  as  to  imply 
the  possession  of  the  attribute  in  an  eminent  degree, 
DU^aa  ns^n  0  fairest  among  iDomen,  lit.  the  fair  one,  etc. 

§  73.  Numerals. 

1.  The  cardinal  "1<7N  one  and  the  ordinal  numbers  are 
treated  like  other  adjectives,  and  follow  the  rules  of  po- 
sition and  agreement  already  given. 

2.  The  other  cardinals  may  stand, 

(1)  In  the  absolute  state  before  the  noun  to  which 
th«;y  belong. 

(2)  Before  it  in  the  construct  state  (if  they  have  such 
'I  form). 

(3)  After  it  in  the  absolute  state. 

3.  Nouns  accompanied  by  the  cardinals  from  2  to  10 
are  almost  invariably  plural,  while  those  which  are  pre- 
ceded by  the  tens  (20-90)  or  numbers  compounded  vnth 
them  (21,  etc.)  are  conmionly  put  in  the  singular,  D'^Htoj 
QiJTS  yniT"!  nb©  twenty  years  and  seven  years. 


74  SYNTAX.  §§  74,  75 

4.  The  cardinals  above  one  may  receive  the  article 
when  the  noun  is  not  expressed,  but  not  when  joined  to  a 
definite  noun,  n^i^s^^n  the  forty,  ni'^n  D'^i^s'is  the  forty 
days. 

§  74.  Apjyosition. 

One  noun  may  be  in  apj^osition  with  another,  not  only 
when  both  denote  the  same  person  or  thing,  but  also 
when  the  second  specifies  the  first  by  stating  the  material 
of  which  it  consists,  its  quality,  character,  or  the  like, 
n;i;n:n  "i^an  the  oxen  the  brass,  i.  e.  the  brazen  oxen; 
T\ii^_  D"^ND  ti^it  tJwee  measures  (consisting  of)  meal. 

§  75.   The  Construct  State. 

1.  When  one  noun  is  limited  in  its  meaning  by  another 
the  first  is  put  in  the  construct  state.  The  relation  thus 
expressed  corresponds  for  the  most  j^art  to  the  genitive 
case,  or  to  that  denoted  in  English  by  the  preposition  of 

2.  When  the  relation  between  two  nouns  is  expressed 
1  )y  a  preposition,  the  first  commonly  remains  in  tlie  abso- 
lute state;  it  may,  however,  especially  in  poetry,  be  put 
in  the  construct,  ?3^iil  ''■in  mountains  in  Gilboa. 

3.  Nouns  are  sometimes  in  the  construct  before  a  suc- 
ceeding clause  with  which  they  are  closely  connected  ; 
tliirs  before  a  relative  clause,  "itJJi  D"ip^  tJie  j^htce  whci\\ 
etc.,^  particularly  when  the  relative  is  itself  omitted, 
nbirn'l^a  by  the  hand  of  (hjm  whom)  thou  uiilt  seid^ 
and  even  before  the  copidative,  ri^ni  r^ban  tolsdom  and 
knowledge. 

4.  An  adjective,  pai'ticiple,  or  demonstrative,  (pialify- 
ing  a  noun  in  the  construct  state,  cannot  follow  it  immC' 
d lately,  but  must  be.  placed  after  the  gov^erned  noun. 
binsn  nVn;*  nii??^  the  great  worh  of  Jehovah. 


^§   76,  77.  THE    PRETERITE.  75 

5.  An  article  or  suffix  belonging  to  a  noun  in  the  con- 
struct must  be  attached,  not  to  it,  but  to  the  governed 
noun,  ^^nn  ^vaa  tlie  mighty  men  of  valor,  iinr  ''l?''bx /^/s 
idols  of  gold. 

6.  The  preposition  ^  to,  belonging  to,  with  or  without 
a  preceding  relative  pronoun,  may  be  substituted  for  the 
construct  relation  in  its  possessive  sense,  2?T2?^bNb  n'^sn  tJie 
house  of  Elislia,  O'^^s'?  itc«  li^sin  her  father's  sheej). 

§  76.   Tenses  of  Verbs. 

The  Hebrew  has  distinct  forms  of  the  verb  correspond- 
ing to  the  two  grand  divisions  of  time,  the  past  and  the 
future;  but  all  subordinate  modifications  or  shades  of 
meaning  are  either  suggested  by  accompanying  particles, 
or  left  to  be  inferred  from  the  connection.  Whatever  is 
or  is  conceived  of  as  past,  is  put  in  the  preterite;  the 
future  is  used  for  all  that  is  or  is  conceived  of  as  future. 

§  77.   The  Preterite. 

The  preterite  may  accordingly  be  employed  to  denote, 
1.  The  past,  whether  it  be, 

a.  A^bsolute,  i.  e.  the  historical  imperfect,  God  vn^ 
created. 

b.  Relative  to  the  present,  i.  e.  the  perfect,  ivhat  is  this 
ilat  ri^ii?:?  tliott  hast  done? 

c.  Relative  to  another  past,  i.  e.  the  pluperfect,  God 
elided  his  worh  which  T^m  he  had  made. 

d.  Relative  to  a  future,  i.  e.  the  future  perfect,  he  shall 
he  ccdled  holy,  ivhen  the  Lord  T^n*  shall  have  wash.cd,  eta 

e.  Conditional,  except  the  Lord  had  left  a  remnant, 
ir^n  ivL  sliould  have  been  as  Sodom. 

f.  Oi)tatIve,  ^2n73-^b  0  that  ii^c  had  died, 


7A 


SYNTAX.  §   78 


g.  Subjunctive,  QSnsn;'  "iyiab  in  order  that  ye  might  fear. 

2.  The  present,  regarded  as  a  continuation  of  the  past 
-rras  I  am  tldrsty,  prop.  /  have  been  and  still  am  thirsty. 

3.  General  truths,  embodying  the  experience  of  the 
past,  a,7i  ox  yi^  l-noweth  his  owner,  oxen  always  have 
done  so,  and  always  will. 

4.  The  future,  when  described  by  the  prophets  ag 
though  it  had  already  taken  place,  Babylon  nbs3  ha^ 
fallen. 

§  78.   The  Future. 

The  future  tense  is  used  in  speaking  of, 

1.  The  future,  whether  it  be, 

a.  Absolute,  •^i^'ys  I loill  nutke. 

b.  Relative  to  a  past,  Elisha  was  fallen  sicJc  of  his 
sickness,  whereof  ri^^a^  he  was  to  die. 

G.  Conditional,  but  (if  it  were  my  case)  'izJ'^7'$  1  would 
seeh  unto  God. 

d.  Optative,  expressing  desire,  determination,  permis- 
sion, or  command,  so  lisii^  inay  all  thine  enemies ^lerish  ', 
all  tliat  thou  eommandest  us,  s^'-?'?,?  we  will  do;  of  the  fruit 
b5«:  toe  ?nay  eat;  mine  ordinances  ^"i"ai^n  ye  shall  keep. 

e.  Subjunctive,  ^"^^^^^  1?'^^  in  order  that  my  soul  may 
bless  thee. 

2.  The  present,  when  it  is  conceived  oi  -^s  extending  into 
the  future,  why  "'sit'i  weepest  thou  ?  lit.  why  wilt  thou  go 
on  to  weep  f 

3.  General  truths,  which  are  valid  for  all  time  to  come, 
righteousness  D'oiin  exalteth  a  nation,  it  does  so  now  and 
always  will. 

4.  Habitual  acts  or  states  continuing  for  an  indefinite 
period  from  the  time  spoken  of,  thus  Job  T\'by_;^_  did  con 
tinually,  not  only  that  once,  but  thenceforward^ 


§§  79,  80  PARTICIPLES.  77 

5.  The  past,  in  aniruated  desci'i})tion,  as  we  use  tlie  })re 
sent,  the}i  "I'^Tp;'  sings  Moses. 

(').  The  future  is  idiomatically  used  with  w\b  and  cnibli 
not  yet^  before,  whethei*  the  period  referred  to  is  past  or 
futuie. 

7.  The  apoc(.)pated  and  paragogic  forms  of  the  future 
mostly  have  a  conditional^  optative,  or  subjunctive  sense. 

8.  The  negative  imperative  is  made  by  prefixing  bx  not 
to  the  apocopated  future,  ^3>"Dr»"'5i?  licvrm  not. 


§  79.   Tlie  Secondary  Tenses. 

1.  When  a  future  with  Vav  Conversive  is  preceded  by 
a  preterite,  or  by  any  expression  referring  to  past  time,  it 
becomes  a  secondary  preterite.  And  a  preterite  with 
Vav  Conversive  preceded  by  a  future,  an  imperative,  or 
any  expression  indicating  future  time,  becomes  a  secondary 
future. 

2.  A  narrative  or  a  paragraph,  which  begins  with  one 
of  the  primary  tenses,  is  mostly  continued  by  means  of 
the  corresponding  secondary  tense,  provided  the  vei'h 
stands  at  the  beginning  of  its  clause.  If  for  any  reason 
this  order  of  the  Avords  is  interrupted  or  prevented,  the 
primary  tense  must  again  be  used. 


§  80.  Peirticiples. 

1.  Participles  may  express  what  is  permanent  or 
habitual,  (the  Lord)  :ins  loveth  rigJiteousness.  Passive 
participles,  so  used,  suggest -not  only  a  constant  experience, 
but  a  fixed  quality  as  the  ground  of  it,  xniD  not  only 
fem'ed.\)\it  tvorthy  to  hefeeired. 

2.  Active  participles  most  commonly  relate  to  the  pres- 


78  SYNTAX.  §§  81,  82 

ent  or  to  the  proximate  future,  and  passive  participles  to 
the  past. 

3.  In  narratives  and  predictions  the  time  of  the  ]>arti- 
ciples  is  reckoned,  not  from  the  moment  of  speaking,  but 
fi'om  the  period  spoken  of,  iJie  tiuo  angels  caine^  and  Lot 
ao*  was  sitting  in  the  gate  of  8odom. 


§  81.   The  Infinitive. 

1.  The  absolute  infinitive  may  be  used  for, 

(1)  The  preterite  or  the  future,  when  one  of  those 
tenses  immediately  precedes. 

(2)  The  imperative,  when  it  stands  at  the  beginning 
of  a  sentence. 

2.  The  infinitive,  which  is  a  verbal  noun,  may  be  put 
in  the  construct  state  before  a  following  noun,  whether 
this  be  its  subject  or  its  object.  The  construct  state  is 
also  used  after  nouns  or  prepositions,  and  sometimes  after 
verbs. 

3.  When  one  vei'b  is  dependent  upon  another,  it  ia 
sometimes  put,  not  in  the  infinitive,  but  in  the  same  tense 
with  the  governing  verl),  ^bn  b'lsin  he  was  willing,  he 
ivalhed,  for  he  was  willing  to  walk,  or  loalhed  willingly. 

§  82.  Object  of  Verbs. 

1.  The  object  of  a  transitive  verb,  if  a  definite  noun,  or 
a  pronoun,  may  be  preceded  by  the  particle  ris . 

2.  The  subject  of  passive  verbs,  which  is  really  the  ob 
ject  of  their  action,  and  nouns  placed  absolutely,  occasion- 
a.'ly  receive  ri? . 

3.  Some  ver])s,  not  properly  transitive,  are  capable  oi 
a  transitive  construction  ;  thus, 

(1)  Verb^  signifying  plenty  and  want,  or  motion,  the 


§§  83-85.  NEGLECT    OF    AGKEEMENT.  70 

house  Q^TCpsn  sSia  ^uas  full  of  men^  i^ibn-ns  i;s'i;^^  they 
went  out  (of)  the  city. 

(2)  Any  verb  may  govern  its  cognate  noun,  or  a  noun 
which  defines  the  extent  of  its  application,  V^-^^'i^i?  ^4^ 
he  was  diseased  in  his  feet. 

4.  The  verb  usually  stands  first,  its  subject  next,  and 
its  object  last,  rnless  the  emphasis  requires  a  different 
ordei*. 

§  83.    Vei'hs  with  more  than  one  Object. 

1.  Some  verbs  have  more  than  one  object,  viz. : 

(1)  The  causatives  of  transitive  verbs. 

(2)  Verbs  whose  action  may  be  regarded  under  differ- 
ent aspects  as  terminating  upon  different  objects. 

(3)  The  instrument  of  an  action,  the  material  used  in 
its  performance,  its  design,  or  its  result,  may  be  its 
secondaiy  or  remote  object,  l^s  ini5  ^'o^n^;!  and  they  over- 
lohelmed  him  witli  stones,  "isy  oisn-nx  "^i^i^i  and  he 
formed  the  man  of  dust. 

2.  If  an  active  verb  is  capable  of  governing  a  doubl(3 
object,  its  passive  may  govern  the  more  remote  of  them. 

§  84.  Adverbial  Expi^essions. 

1.  Adverbs  commonly  stand  after  the  words  to  whi^}l] 
they  belong. 

2.  Nouns  may  be  placed  absolutely  to  express  tlie  rela^ 
tions  of  time,  place,  measure,  number,  or  manat;r, 

§  85.  Neglect  of  Agreement. 

1.  When  a  predicate  adjective  or  verlD  precedes  its 
noun,  it  often  prefers  a  primary  to  a  secondary  form,  that 


80  SYNTAX.  §  86 

is    to    sa\^,    tile  masculine   may  be  iised  instead  of   the 
feminine,  and  the  singular  instead  of  tlie  plural. 

2.  Collective  nouns  may  have  verbs,  adjectives,  and 
pronouns  agreeing  with  them  in  the  plural. 

3.  Nouns  plural  in  form,  but  singular  in  signification, 
commonly  have  verbs,  adjectives,  and  pronouns  agreeiug 
Titli  them  in  the  singular. 

4.  Plural  names  of  inanimate  or  irrational  objects  oi 
either  gendor  are  occasionally  joined  ^\^th  the  feminine 
singular. 

5.  The  masculine  is  sometimes  used,  when  females  are 
spoken  of,  from  a  neglect  to  note  the  gender,  if  no  stress 
is  laid  upon  it. 

6.  Singular  predicates  and  pronouns  are  sometimes 
employed  in  a  distributive  sense  of  plural  subjects. 

7.  Nouns  in  the  dual  have  verbs,  adjectives,  and  pro- 
nouns agreeing  with  them  in  the  plural. 

§  86.   Compound  S^ihject. 

1.  When  the  subject  consists  of  two  or  more  words  con- 
nected by  the  conjunction  and.,  the  predicate,  if  it  precedes 
its  subject,  may  be  put  in  the  masculine  singular  as  its 
primary  form,  or  it  may  be  put  in  the  plural,  referring  to 
them  all,  or  it  may  agree  with  the  nearest  word. 

2.  If  the  predicate  follows  a  compound  subject,  it  is 
commonly  put  in  the  plural,  though  it  may  agree  with 
the  principal  word  to  which  the  others  are  subordinate. 

3.  If  a  predicate  refers  equally  to  two  words  of  dif- 
ferent genders,  it  \v\\\  be  put  in  the  masculine  in  prefer- 
ence to  tlie  feminine;  if  they  are  of  different  persons, 
the  predicate  will  be  put  in  the  second  in  preference  to 
the  third,  and  in  the  fii'st  in  preference  to  either  oi  the 
others. 


i-^  87-89.  CONJUNCTIONS.  SI 

§  87.    Tie])etition  of  Words. 

1.  Repetition  may  denote  distribution,  niiij  niw  yeai 
by  yem'^  plurality,  nirnn  generation  and  generation,  i.  e. 
viany  generations,  or  emphasis  and  intensity,  paj;.  pQi; 
o.ccteding  deep. 

2.  In  verbs  tlie  absolute  infinitive  is  joined  with  the 
finite  forms  for  tlie  sake  of  emphasis  or  intensity,  tim 
n^"bn  thou  slialt  surely  die. 


§  88.  Belative  Pronouns. 

1.  When  the  relative  "itc»  is  governed  by  a  verb,  noun, 
or  preposition,  this  is  shown  by  appending  the  appro- 
priate pronominal  suffix  to  the  governing  word,  thou 
?i'^ri"in3  TiJS|  whom  I  have  chosen,  i^nr  m^x  lohose  seed. 

2.  When  the  relative  is  preceded  by  rs  the  sign  of 
the  definite  object,  or  by  a  preposition,  these  pertain 
not  to  the  relative,  but  to  its  antecedent,  which  is  to  be 
supplied. 

3.  The  rehitive  is  frequently  omitted,  not  only,  as  in 
English,  when  it  is  the  object  of  its  clause,  but  also  when 
it  is  the  subject,  «7?(/7^.<?/w6'(?6»y^  God  inisy  (who)  made  him. 

4.  The  demonstrative  n?  or  'iT  is  frequently  used  in 
poetry  with  the  force  of  a  relative,  in  w^hich  case  it 
gufEors  no  change  for  gender  or  number. 

§  89.    Conjunctions. 

1.  The  simple  copulative  )  is  used  in  Hebrew,  where 
our  idiom  requires  different  conjunctions ;  the  relation  be 
tween  clauses  so  connected  must  often  be  inferred  from 
their  sio-nification. 

2.  Vav  also  serves, 

4* 


82  SYNTAX.  §  80 

(1)  To  introduce  the  apodosis  or  second  member  of  a 
conditional  sentence,  if  God  loill  he  loith  me  and  hee])  me 
n^ni  tlien  shall  Jehovah  he  my  God. 

(3)  To  connect  a  statement  of  time  or  a  noun  placed 
absolutely  witli  tiie  clause  to  wliich  it  relates,  on  the  tliir  i 
jAiy  on^nx  NiSfT  Ahraham  lifted  up  his  eyes. 


GRAMMATICAL    TABLES. 


1.     The  Letters,  §1. 

i 

:Mer.  ! 

Forme  and  Equivalents. 

1 

Names. 

Kabbinical 
Alphabet. 

Numeric*! 
values. 

1 

1 

55 

Cl^sjj     Alepli 

f' 

1 

2 

a 

Bh,  B 

n-'a    Betli 

3 

2 

3 

a 

Gh,  G 

bm     Gi'-mel 

i 

3 

4 

T 

Dh,  D 

nb-H     Da'-leth 

7 

4 

5 

n 

H 

sn     He 

p 

5 

6 

1 

V 

1^     Vav 

1 

6 

7 

T 

Z 

•\^X     Zayin 

1 

7 

8 

n 

Hh 

n'^n     Hheth 

p 

8 

9 

t3 

T 

n^u     Teth 

V 

9 

10 

•< 

Y 

ni"'    Yodh 

« 

10 

11 

3    1 

Kh,  K 

t]?     Kaph 

1  = 

20 

12 

b 

L 

^'aV    La'-medh 

i 

30 

13 

12   D 

M 

un     Mem 

OP 

40 

14 

=     1 

N 

•j^D     Nun 

]  = 

50 

15 

D 

S 

TjTao     Sa'-mekh 

p 

60 

16 

y 

X:^,     Ay  in 

5? 

70 

17 

B  ci 

Ph,  P 

SS     Pe 

c^V 

80 

18 

sr 

Ts 

•''li     Tsa'-dhe 

••      T 

P 

90 

19 

P 

K 

S|ip     Koph 

P 

100 

20 

n 

R 

njin     Resli 

:> 

200 

21 

« 

Sh,  S 

•jiia     Shin 

c 

300 

22 

n 

Th,  T 

in    Tav 

p 

400 

11.     Classification  of  the  Letters,  §2. 


Gutturals,  N  n  n  y 
Palatals,  ^  ^  3  p 
Liiiguals,  1  '0  b  ;  n 
Dentals,  T  o  2  is 
Labials,  n  1  'a  B 
1  sliares  the  peculiarities 
of  the  Gutturals. 


Weak, 
Medium, 

Strong, 


^s  n  1  1  Vowel-l.etters 

]s  n  n  2?  Gutturals. 

(b-Q  :  "I  Liquids. 

]  T  c  22  Ti:  Sibilants. 

^^  s  1  .     . 

J  I  Aspn-ates  and 

l^T  n  -J  J 


Mutes. 


Serviles  i"3Dl  ni2JT2  'jn-'S.    Radicals  the  rest  of  the  Alphabet, 


The    Points,  §4. 


Long  Vowels. 

Short  Vowels. 

Douhlful  Vowels. 

Ka'mets  a  t 

Pattahh                   a  — 

Hhi'rik    —      i  or  i 

Tse're      e  ~ 
Hho'lem  6  — 

Seghol                    e  — 
Ka'mets-Hhatiiph  o  t~ 

Shii'rek  -  )   - 
Kib  buts   r  ) 

Pronouace  a  as  in  father^  a  as  in  fat^  e  as  in  there,  e  as  in  met,  I  as  in 
machine,  I  as  in  pin,  b  as  in  riote,  b  as  in  not,  u  as  in  tmle,  u  as  in  full. 

^  7.     Simple  Sh'va  —  silent  or  vocal. 

^    (  Hhateph-Pattahh  ^:  ;  thus  lb?  "modk. 
^Gi  '  1  Hhatepli-Seghol    -.t  ;  thus  lbs  'mor. 

(  Hhateph-Kamets  ~  -,  thus   ''Sif  °nl. 

^  8.    Pattahli-furtive  ~  with  y,  n  or  <^  at  the  end  of 
words. 

§12.   Daghesh-lene  in  3  a  "^  3  a   n  removes  aspiration. 

§  13.    Daghesh-forte  doubles;    not  found  in  i?  n  n  y 
rarely  in  "i . 

§  14.    Mappik  in  final  ^  when  a  consonant. 

§  15.    Raphe   —   opposite   of    Daghesh-lene,   Daghesh 
forte,  or  Mappik. 

§  21.   Makkeph  (")  connects  words. 

^  22.    Methegh  —  second  syllable  before  the  accent. 


III.        'hiK    ACOKNTS,     ^-Ki. 

DISJUNCTIVES. 
Class   I.     Emperors. 


I.    Siiluk 

(.) 

;pi2iq 

a.   Athnahh 

(J 

n:nN 

Class  II.  Ki 

ngs. 

8.    S'gholta 

(•••) 

xribio    p<mtp^ 

4.    Zakeph  Kaioi 

1 

C) 

T^P,  =li^I 

6.    Zakeph  Gadhol 

C) 

'">  r,l?t 

6.    Tiphhlia 

(J 

snso 

Class  III.  Dukes. 

7.   R'bhr 

/  •  \ 

V'V^ 

8.   Shalsheleth 

/  ( ,^ 

rbbbii) 

9.   Zarka 

/  *^\ 

Ki:?ni    postp 

10.    Pashta 

f  "*  \ 

k::!15s     /jos/p. 

11.  Y'thibh 

\*  } 

-T'?,     prep. 

12.   T'bhir 

y 

Class  IV.   Counts. 

13.  Pazer 

/  '^  \ 

nta 

14.    Karng  Phara 

I'KPs 

n^E  •':-i;? 

15.   TMisha  Gh'dliola 

(  ''^ 

nb-ina  xtli'^bri    prep, 

16.    Geresh 

/  f  \ 

ilins 

17.    G'l-ashayin. 

(  "\ 

cyina 

18.    P'slk 

(  ') 

i-'p^ 

CONJUNCTIVES. 

Ser 

vanfs. 

19.    Merka 

\>  ) 

N3-I"!: 

20.   Munahh 

(-•) 

21     Merka  Kh'phala 

^  «  ' 

nbns3  xxnt: 

22.   Mahpakh 

V«  / 

-?-n'? 

23.    Darga 

^ «  / 

'^^'^'' 

24.    Kadhma 

f  ^  \ 

«?"?s 

25.  Yerahh  ben 

YomO 

V  v/ 

ipi-^-ia  nn^ 

26.  T'lishaK'tai 

ma 

,\     V 

hijiij,  x'v^-'bn    7x«f| 

^ 

n 

•n 

•n'a* 

^ 

n 

r 

rra 

"^ 

n 

n 

rM2 

•a 

Pi 

n 

rm 

IV.     In"separable  Propositions  anu  Vav 

Conjunctive,  §§  27,  28. 

Primary  form,  ^  ^  .  ) 

Befor*  vowelless  Consonants,  3  3  ?  1* 

Before  Gutturals  with  Compound  Sh'va,  the  corresponding  short  wwel 

Before  monosyllables  and  accented  syllable?,  •]"  3  S  5  * 

WitL  the  contracted  article,  the  voiccl  of  the  O/rticU. 

*  Also  before  the  labiiils  ~  .   "C  ^  and  2  .  but  ""  before  vowelless  Vodh. 
t  With  the  interrogative  n533  ,   niss  ,   n^^  or  nib  . 

The   Preposition   '\'ci,  He  Interrogative,  the  Ariicle, 
AND  THE  Interrogative  rra. 

Before  strong  consonants. 
Before     vowelless    consonants  and    strong 
gutturals, 

Before  weak  gutturals, 
Before  gutturals  with  Kamets, 

*  But  with  a  disjunctive  accent  commonly  ,-72 . 

Inseparable  Prepositions  with  Sufi-ixes. 

Singular. 

1  c.  !Z1  ^  i  '  '"-^  f  " '        "  .  '    r  '•?:  f 

2/       4  ■  ^^  -  1^- 

V.    T\%  rib'  ni:i3  ns^-: 

PlU  E  A  L. 

2.«..  Din  D^b   D53,D?ra  D2-; 

V    T  .  T  .    ■  .  >  ^ 

8  tn.   Di ,  tsnn   Tjb ,  Dfib  on^  Dgi'-s  ^^i^-;  ^ycz 

8/  "jrin,  "jnn  th  —  "^"^ 

8() 


V,       rj;RS()NAL    PllCNODNs,    <J>  29. 

SINGULAR.  I'LURAL. 

^5:s,  "iDN  We       ^='7'?^,  ^3"?,  ^^.s; 

J  Tiiou  wz.  nns,   ni?  Ye  »z.       dps 

1  Thou  /     ns ,  "^ns  Ye  /.        ^pn  ,  r,;ps 

'He  5«in  They  w^       □",  nr)n 

She  s-'n,  sin  §  23.  :3.  They  /       in,  n^n 

Suffixes. 


1       I 


B 


Simple.        With  union  Vow 

els  oi 

Verbri. 

Witl 

.  Sin-.  No 

uns.        W'.thDu.il  anl 

1  r. 

r  3    .         r  - 

"'?.. 

1? 

O^J 

1 

— >            1  lUr.  xvou  ..i^ 

1 

pi. 

13             12^ 

^3.. 

13. _ 

13 

0=J 

^12^ 

2  /«. 

^  (^?)   (^ J 

(^) 

!)... 

(tfrJ 

i. 

{\) 

T, 

?'?• 

DD 

=5: 

^T. 

2/. 

^C?)     1  ,^... 

^- 

n- 

v.. 

pi. 

1? 

^?. 

)T.. 

3  «2. 

in        in^  ,i 

in„ 

^3., 

0"?...) 

i 

(r\,  in 

.)    ^\  (^'^\. ,  ■'P'^j 

;./. 

D(i'a)    Q,  ,0. 

□.. 

D^ 

nn\.  (i^ij 

3./: 

n         n^ 

n. 

"3 

T  V 

n 

T 

n-i 

vi. 

1(5^?)     1. 

I. 

], 

r)\ 

Demonstrative 

Masc.  Fern. 

Sing,  nr  (it)     nsT  (ir,  nr)  t/iis 


Common. 

Plur.  bs,  nbs  f/iet'e. 


Relative. 

■nOi5  ?«;/^(9  or  w/iic/i;  abbreviated  form  -^  (-ts,  w,  V) 

Interrogative  and  Indefinite. 
^  who  ?  or  whoever,     nia  ivhat  ?  or  lokatever. 


Verbs. — Their  Species,  §§  31,  32. 

1.  Shnple  act.        Kal  ^^'i}  to  kill. 

2.  "     pass.      Niphal 

3.  Intensive  act.     Piel 

4.  '*        pass.  Pual 

5.  Causative  act.    Hiphil 

6.  "         pass.  Hophal 


bt3):3  to  be  killed. 
.  b6p  to  kill  many  or  to  massacre 

bisp  to  he  massacred. 
bibjpn  to  cause  to  Jdll. 
b'j|?n  to  be  caused  to  kilt. 


7    Reflexive  Hithpael bisj^nn  to  kill  ones  self. 


VI.     Paradigm  oi 

KAL. 

Nli-IIAL. 

P1EI>. 

PUAL. 

Pbet. 

3  m. 

^tbp 

btp? 

^t2p 

^^P. 

3/. 

-'?9R 

~?P)?2 

nbi^p 

nbtfp 

2  m. 

^'^i? 

nbtjpD 

T  :   —1;  • 

nbtp 

r)bt2p 

2/ 

r^^^i? 

rib'^p: 

^^V. 

s^ib^p 

1   c. 

T'^^i? 

^^^^p? 

^nb^p 

^nb^p 

Plur. 

3   c. 

;  'it 

^'i^P? 

^b'lip 

^b-Lfp 

2  m. 

C^SD^^P 

sfe^^p? 

t3P)b^p 

CJ^^'^P 

2/ 

■jnb'^p 

lJj}^"^P? 

l^r^P 

i^r^p 

1    c. 

^DbDp 

^Dbtp? 

^:bbp 

^:bibi; 

Inpin. 

ahsol. 

bitip 

bbpn 

rr    • 

btip 

bbp 

1 

•onslr. 

bbp 

^^^m 

^feP 

(%) 

FUT. 

3  VI. 

brbp: 

"^^T. 

^^p; 

b-^p": 

3/. 

bbpn 

^^pr^ 

^topn 

b^pri 

2  m. 

btbpn 

bpprn 

btopn 

btopn 

2/ 

^5^1?^?' 

^bp^n 

^bi3pn 

^bispn 

1   c. 

^^p^ 

'"^^m 

^tap!!^ 

^^p!^ 

Plur. 

3  m. 

^^^p; 

^^^pr 

^^^p" 

^^tcp: 

3/ 

Hjbtipn 

T  :       ';    • 

in:btDpn 

?^.'r^pJ\i 

n^b^pn 

2  HI. 

^bppn 

^btppn 

^bppn 

^btfpn 

2/ 

n2bt2pn 

n^btpn 

T  :    ■•  (t    • 

rijbtapn 

rijbt^pn 

T  :    — '  ■•.    ; 

1    f. 

bbp? 

^bp? 

-^P? 

btsp^? 

Imper. 

2  m. 

btbp 

'bpn 

^%P- 

2/ 

^^^1? 

^5^pn 

'^^P 

Plur. 

2  «i. 

^btpp 

^^^pn 

^btfp 

wanting 

2/ 

nDbtbp 

T  :      »: 

Mjbbpn 

n:btop 

T  :     ••■— 

Part. 

act. 

^'^P 

^^%m 

pans. 

bitop 

^^P? 

'^'^P? 

Perfect  Verbs,  §§33 

-38. 

SAL  (««■(?.  O), 

HU'lllL. 

110PII-4L. 

iiniirALL. 

KAI.  (7i(/i/.  i). 

b"t:pn 

%n 

btbpnn 

lis 

T 

rb±\)r} 

nbtipn 

nbiipnn 

n-ins 

nbj^ 

T     ;    n 

pbt:pn 

nbii:pn 

T  ;   -•:   T 

r}bbpnn 

mis 

T  :  — T 

.    nb'iir   ■ 

T  ;        r 

ribtopn 

nbt:pn 

nbDpnn 

n-n3 

rhbt 

:  :       T 

^li^btopr; 

'^bbpn 

-nbtbpnn 

"n-ii^ 

•  :       T 

^b-^pn 

iib^pn 

^biapnri 

^133 

qbpib    : 

D^btipn 

□nbt:pri 

Dnbt^pnn 

°^"5? 

(Dnbr^r) 

l^b^^pn 

iribt:pn 

13r!b^)2^r' 

■|n-;3 

(|i^^^^) 

^3^t:pri 

^Dbi:pn 

'i^bi^pnn 

:  — T 

^:b"iu:   ^ 

btipn 

^^i?T 

(btipnri) 

r 

bii-j: 

T 

b'Ppu 

bbpri 

btopnn 

nn3 

b'i^ 

b-pp: 

'^^i?: 

btapn: 

"i^?": 

b^i?:  • 

b-^pn 

bt:pn 

btDpnn 

-is^n 

bs^Fi 

b^ibpn 

bbpn 

btopriri 

nisn 

b^irn 

^b-'tppn 

^btppn 

^biopnn 

^"7^?!^ 

^b^irn 

b^icpp^^ 

btpi^ 

btopnt5 

"i??^ 

bs^'^ 

^b^tpp: 

^bifp: 

^bt^pn: 

^^T?' 

^bsir: 

•^^btspn 

nDb^pn 

nDbtapriri 

nr^^ri 

n:b2tr 

^b-^^pn 

^btppn 

^btppnr, 

Ti^jT) 

^bsu-n 

riDbtbpn 

•^jbDpn 

{-iab^pnn 

ru'^h.'zr} 

n-blirn 

b'tjps 

b^p; 

btopnp 

■jI?? 

b2^3 

btbpri 

btopnn 

"i^? 

^b'tbpn 

^btppnn 

^IDS 

^b^tbprt 

wanting 

^btcpnr; 

iiins 

nsbtipn 

s^jbibpnn 

h2^?? 

b^6p)j 

ii?l?'? 

b^pn-j 

89 


VII.    Paradigm  of  the  Pekpect 


Singular. 
1  com.        2  mase.         ^fem.        3  masc.  Sfem. 


Kal  Preterite. 

Sing.  3  mase.       "D^Dp         iTjbtip  Tjbt3p  ^nStSp  ^        t^ilitip 

', "■  ^^^ 

8/m.      ^pn^^p      ^O^^P  "^^^^P  ^»"r^?^P  )     •'^P)^^I? 


1  com.     '^j'ri^^p  ^^ri^^p    vribt:p  ri-nbtii: 

Plue.  3  co7n.     ^p^btip  *?|^bt:p  T|:ibt!p    iin^bt:p  rj^bt^p 

2  mcT^.  ■'i^irribiip     ^n^nbt:p  u^nbt:p 

icom.      ^-i^btop  T|^i)bt:p  ^n^iibtip  M^Dbt:p 


Infinitive.  ^bpp  )      !?;bt:p         ^jbtip  ibtpj^  S^btJg 

^pbtpp  J 


Future. 

Sing.  3  muse,    ^pbipp; )  ?|bt2p;^ )  t]bt:p^    ^nStjp;^ )  tiopi)^^ 

^3bt:p;  (  ,^bt:p:  J               ^-5'9P' )  ^^bpp? 

Plttr.  3  masc.    "IS^bpp:      ^^^tip;  Tj^btip;    ^H^blfp;  ^^^^P-'' 


Imperative. 
Sing.  2  ?ttasc.       *'pbpp 

^nbtpp 

^J^15 

PiEi.  Preterite. 
Sing.  3  masc.       "pbtpp 

^^^1? 

^?^:p 

ibtap 

f^^tap 

HiPHiL  Preterite. 
Sing.  3  mase.  "^b^tppH 

HT^p^' 

^^^ppr' 

ib^tjpn 

Mb-'topn 

QQ> 


Verbs  witi 

1  Suffixes, 

§  42. 

Plural. 

1  com. 

2  masc. 

2 /em. 

3  wioac. 

2  fern. 

^=5^1? 

°5^^I? 

)^>^l? 

°^¥;? 

1?^^ 

?i3r\bt2p 

D^nbt:!? 

■j5nbt:|^ 

Dn5t:p 

P^W 

^Dnbt:;^ 

Dnbt^i^ 

W^^l? 

iirinbt:!^ 

D^nb^I^ 

r^^^i? 

siD^nbt:p 

DD^nb^j: 
DD-.bt:j^ 

ci9^jbt:p 

D^ribt:]^ 

n^bt:i^ 

D^nbiDj: 

d^bb^p 

1^nbt:p 

^:h,]Qp^  d5bt:p         -jibtip  nbtp):  -j^tpjD 


^Dbtpp^)      UDbx^p^:        libt:^.''         Dbt)p         -jbtpp^ 
^D^btpp;'       dis^btpp;^       l?^^Pl??        c^^bpf;^        I^Spp," 


^3?^)^ 

»=!?Pi? 

ilD^tfp 

dibtsp 

■    t?^^P 

dbtfp 

)5^^P 

lib^topn 

T     • ':    • 

diytjpn 

1?r"?I?n 

Db^tpipn 

■jb^tppn 

91 


VIII.     Paradigm  op  Pe  Guttural  Verbs,  §53. 


HIPHIL.         HOPHAL. 


^B 


FUT. 


Pret.  3  m. 

^IZV 

-Tjiv: 

T7::3'n 

1723?  M 

3/ 

T    :  IT 

T    :  viv 

nT7^2?n 

r         •  v:  IV 

T   :  T  IT 

bi^n 

2  m. 

T  :   —  T 

T  ;    —  V.IV 

m7!2^'n 

T  :    —  v:  IV 

n772^:n 

bii^n 

2/. 

ni7jy 

ni/b:?: 

^"1723?^ 

rM723>  n 

"bs^in 

•    :         1 

1  e. 

^mby 

^rn7b3'D 

^n"i7iyn 

•   :    -  v:  IV 

-n^7byr! 

•  :  — -r   IT 

bifi^ 

Plur.  3  c. 

^^■^3? 

^^723'D 

iTp.yn 

^■i^yn 

'     ^b^'«^ 

:       1 

2  m. 

!=!J!]"'"^? 

2^523?: 

Drn723?n 

Drn-23''n 

riDbii^n 

2/ 

1^7'^? 

1  V  ;  -v.- IV 

inT23^n 

■jri772^"ri 

1 

1  c. 

iiDnij:? 

'^Tn2Tj 

^j-i7j3?n 

W723''n 

HjbDs^n 

^5^3 

Infin.  Absol. 

117^3? 

T    1" 

■i^'O 

T!2^;rt 

Consir. 

1523? 

1723?" 

..  T    '•• 

"^'r^C! 

T2yn 

Kal  (/m<.  a.) 

Fdt.  3  m. 

nt:>"^ 

1723''^ 

-^by^ 

"1723?^ 

3/ 

I't^'n 

T23?n 

■I^723?n 

n723?n 

pias 

2  m. 

it^T\ 

^723?n 

••  T    l~ 

i^72yn 

n723'Tl 

—  T?     IT 

vim 

2/ 

^^12V7\ 

^T2yn 

^1^723?n 

^T23'n 

^vm 

1  c. 

iwx 

"li2S'i^ 

••  T    1" 

T72yj5 

TJ3>1!< 

vm 

P.'m»-.  3  m. 

r\^T 

^n52r 

^1^7J3?^ 

!11723'^ 

:  TIT 

*jo,: 

s/. 

»^J7'^?rD 

np77i]yri 

n:i723?n 

^T^^r^ 

npi^Ti-n 

2  m. 

r\'2y7\ 

^T23"n 

!i-H23?n 

^n723'"n 

^pinn 

2/ 

T  ;       -:  .- 

^^TT'P^i 

n377!:^n 

n3T23?n 

T  :    —  t:   it 

1  rijpTnn 

T  ) .  -  v:  IV 

le. 

-3- 

•■    Tl" 

1^/23?: 

•  -n- 

^72^5 

Pis 

Ikper,  2  t» 

"1523? 

i723*n 

••   T    1" 

7723>n 

Ph 

2/ 

^ia^ 

^n^i-n 

^i^7jyn 

wanting 

^pjn 

Flur.  2  w 

il17J3' 

^i-jyn 

^T722?n 

iip|n 

2/ 

nD"ia3> 

r  :        -: 

nn7j3'n 

T  :    ••  T  p- 

•^r'^^v' 

nji^T.n 

Part.  Ad. 

riys 

1"723?-2 

Past. 

T 

Tby:- 

T  V.IV 

TO3?» 

T  ni  T 

1 

92 


IX. 

Paradigm 

OF  Ayin 

Guttural  Verbs 

,  §  54.       1 

KAL. 

NIPIIAL. 

riEL. 

PL'AL. 

IIITIIPAEL. 

Pret.  3  m. 

bsr; 

b^-z 

bi<3 

h^ 

bs-irn 

3/ 

nbsB 

nbxro 

Mb5<3 

nbjiii 

T    -;iT   : 

2  m. 

vb^zs 

Th^ZZ 

nb^^r. 

nbi^b 

nbsynn 

2/ 

Tb)^j 

nbs3D 

rbs^s 

nbi^s 

nb^?•lnM 

\c. 

Tnbk3 

'nbi<5:o 

^nb^?-i 

^nb^b 

TbskBnn 

Plur.  3  c. 

^^!^3 

^bsro 

^bii5 

^b!j<r, 

^bi^snn 

2  m. 

Utb^j 

Dnb>5:o 

D^lb^^s 

Dribi<!i 

Dnb^isnn 

2/ 

l^^^f 

1^?^?? 

I^t'^,5 

l^^^T^ 

■r)b5<:,nn 

1  c. 

^]b^5S 

^Dbi?:o 

^2bi<r. 

^]bsb 

^2b!J<5nri 

Infin.  ^JsoZ. 

bi^-i 

bwssn 

bka 

Constr 

bi<? 

••  T     • 

bi<a 

••  T 

^J<|i?n 

Fur.  3  TO. 

b.<^r 

bJ55^ 

bkT 

bxb^ 

bksn' 

3/ 

b^53n 

b^-in 

bkzsP\ 

b^5bn 

bksnn 

2  m. 

bi^r^n 

bikan 

b5J53n 

b^?:n 

b>5-inn 

2/. 

^b^^^n 

^S^5!in 

^b>!ijn 

^bxbn 

^Si^snn 

Ic. 

bi55^5 

bj5Si^ 

bk^3^i! 

bjf<bi!< 

bkr.m 

P?«r.  8  m. 

"^^T 

^bi^r 

6j5.V 

^^zr 

^bj^rin'' 

3/ 

rrbi^:^ 

n^bjj^sn 

nsbjk^n 

-Db^^bn 

-jbv^sinn 

2  OT. 

^3^53n 

^bj^sn 

^b55:*n 

^bxbn 

^bsj^-inn 

2/ 

n:b.<?.-n 

n:bN-in 

rrhkz^ 

rijb^bn 

nDbw<5-inn 

Ic. 

^^f? 

bi<:o 

bk:o 

bkr^w 

Imper.  2  m. 

bi^a 

bj^sn 

bs5 

bksnn 

2/ 

-bj<B 

^b»5n 

^b^^r, 

wanting 

^bNijnn 

Plur.  2  7??. 

-.bs^n 

^bijisn 

^bxs 

^s^snn 

2/. 

^r-^^^ 

n:b^3n 

T  :  —  T    • 

nsb^s 

r  :  — T 

rijbiisnri 

Paet.  Act. 

bjib 

bj!<"j 

bKsn:^ 

Pau 

b^x3 

T 

b^:3 

T       ; 

X.   Paradigm  df  Lamedh  Guttural  Verbs,  ^55. 

KAL.  NIPHAL.  PIEL.  HIPniL.  HITHFAEI. 

-b'l^  nSirp  r^t  n^pOT  n'in-^n 

nnbii:  Tirbmn  nfibuj  tirr^'jin  nn^jm-^n 

t;it  t::*  r:-  t':*  t  :    -    i    • 

nn^TD  nribiDD  nnlsu:  rn^'^n  ri'nintti 

t:-t  t:-;»  r;-'  t:-;'  t;--:- 

nnbt  ri"?iD?  rin'i!'^  ri~5u:r;  nn^n^an 

^nnbic  ^rinS'^^?  ^nnj-ij  ^r^"?*.^-  ■nn'iriipn 

Tibw  ^nbir?  -inVjJ  ^n^S"in  ^ii'pm^n 

Dnnb"^  ofer'^^'?  tDnnbir  Dnnb'i:n  Dnribn-^jn 

]tr^'^  ifer'^'^?  ifeinb'^  "i^"b"^n  "innbri'irn 

nibizj  nbirp  n^ia  r;Su:n       

nb'i^;'  nb^;  n^tr-  n^bip'^_  n^snir^ 

nbizjn  nb^^n  njirn  n^b^ri  n^nirn 

nbtr'n  nbisn  n^tn  n-b'^n  nten 

^nbipn  "nV^ri  •^fibirri  ^n^b'jpn  "nbnirn 

nbT25<  nb^^5  njiiiN;  rr^m  nbrnr5$ 

^nbp;«  ^nb^;^  ^nbir';^  Trf^l  ^fibn^: 

nsnSirin  nsrib'sn  n^nbian  n:rib»rn  riDnbriaJn 

t:':*  t:-T'  t:--:  t;-;-  t  :  -    -    :    ' 

^nte  ^inbisn  ^hVi^n  ^n^biT'n  ^nbnirn 

njnH"^  ^j^j^r}  njnl'vT'n  npnSirn  npnbntsn 

nSirp  nbtLb  nb-^:?  in^Sir?  i^^ri'i? 

nb'jp  nbisn  nb^!  nbirn  nbriirn 

''nbu?  ^nbTzJri  ^nb^j  ^^^^'^ri  ■'nbri'irn 

^nb'^  ^nbisn  ^nV^  Tyj^ri  ^fibnirn 

nsnbTzJ  n^nb^n  nsnbir  ninbxn  n-nbrrin 

nbir  nbiD-j  ri^b^-j  tibnpij 

n^bir  nb"iJ3 


Peet.  3  TO. 
3/ 

2  OT, 

2/. 

1  c. 
Plur.  8  c. 

2  7?J. 

2/ 

1  c. 

Infin.  ^5soZ, 
Constr. 


FuT.  3  ffi, 
3/ 

2  TO. 

2/ 
Ic. 
PZur.  3  TO, 
3/. 

2  TO 

2/ 
1  c. 


Impkii.  2  m. 

2/ 

P?«r.  2  TO 

2/ 


Past.  -4ci, 
Fass. 


XL 

Paradigm  op  P 

E  Nun  Verbs,  §  5 

6. 

KAL. 

NIPUAI,. 

HipniL. 

HOPHAL. 

KAL. 

Pkkt.  3  m. 

12335 

—  r 

ID^p 

t^^n 

aj^n 

1^5 

8/ 

T  ;  • 

T         "       • 

T  ;    \ 

nina 

T    ;  IT 

2  m. 

T    :  — r 

n"LD32 

ri'ip^M 

r     :  -  •% 

r  — T 

2/ 

nlD:^D 

n*r^2 

mi:5n 

P'iESm 

nro 

:   — r 

Ic. 

•    :  -T 

TT^'-i: 

^niiijsn 

^n'^BH 

"      — T 

Plur.  3  c. 

^m: 

^b'riD 

^iT'^xin 

^b'-in 

^bni 

2  TO. 

Dn^rro 

DniC"33 

DniD-iM 

Dih-^'Br: 

Dnns 

2/. 

'jri"i::o 

ir}"u?"53 

l^P£»n 

■J^T^'^n 

1^^? 

1  c. 

:  — T 

^r^BD 

^1312:  iri 

^D'^r'in 

—  T 

Infin-  ^JsoZ. 

T 

T      • 

uiiiH 

UJilH 

■jin; 

Constr. 

^^ii 

■iZj'isr; 

^"~ 

nn 

FuT.  3  ?w. 

t'^1 

^jT 

u;-r_ 

ir'r 
— ••. 

w. 

3/. 

iziijn 

iD'i-n 

••T      • 

iD^sn 

iriin 

]t]'^ 

2  m. 

irsn 

iD'-on 

ir^iin 

irsn 

]t\^ 

2/. 

^■icsn 

^b"3in 

^Tii^iin 

^•d^'sn 

^inn 

Ic. 

irii^^ 

••T    V 

12^3^5 

ir'iiu^ 

1^^ 

Piwr.  3  m. 

iiizja^ 

iii-ro- 

rj:^|i^ 

^Dn^ 

3/ 

™^ri 

T     :   "r    • 

nr^r'ijn 

»ij'ii)'3ri 

(-inn) 

2  m. 

^"iiiin 

;  IT    • 

Voj'^fin 

vi'sn 

^Dnn 

2/. 

n:iri3ri 

T     ;   -'T    • 

n:ir't)n 

T    ;  —  \ 

(M?rin) 

1  c. 

^'^? 

i2:;»S2 

••T  • 

iD^ro 

)t^;. 

Imper.  2  ?re. 

12J5 

T2;:.sn 

Tl'lilj 

t 

2/ 

•'ira 

^'b'r.sn 

^ir^Sn 

wanting 

'?!^ 

ZV;/r.  2  TO. 

^b'it 

vb^s.i 

^"L;^:tn 

^Dn 

2/ 

nr^r'i 

n:iir33sn 

T     ;    "T    • 

n^ir'iiiri 

(-3^) 

Part.  Act. 

ir'ib 

1D''ip2 

(^■^ 

Pass. 

T 

T  • 

V^l 

0;-) 


XII. 

Paradigm 

OF  Atin 

KAL. 

NIPHAL. 

FIK^ 

Pret.  3  m. 

nio 

-b 

nc2 

— T 

nnio 

s/. 

nine 

T   :  IT 

nno 

T    — 

nnc2 

T  — r 

nnnic 

T  :     1 

2  m. 

(^?=-?) 

niihc 

niic2 

nnnio 

2/ 

(^^??) 

nino 

nincp 

nnnio 

le. 

'^T^? 

^niJiD 

^ninop 

■nnnic 

IHur.  3  c. 

^^^0 

^no 

^nc3 

— T 

^nnio 

2  m. 

(Dnnnc) 

nnino 

Dn^nc? 

onnnio 

2/ 

(i^?5P) 

IJ^i-? 

inincp 

IJ^nn'io 

1  c. 

^Dnno 

^Dino 

iijincp 

^Dnnio 

Infix.  Absol. 

nine 

T 

.1 

no 

nibri 

nnio 

Constr. 

n'io 

nb 

=ibri 

nnic 

FuT.  C  ?«.. 

T 

no: 

^k: 

^nio-; 

3/ 

nbn 

T 

nbn 

n^n 

nnicn 

2  TO. 

nbn 

T 

nbn 

nbn 

nnicn 

2/. 

^nbn 

T 

^ntpn 

^nbn 

■nnicn 

•    :      1    : 

Ic. 

nb5< 

nbij 

^bx 

nniCis; 

P^Mr.  3  m. 

^nb^ 

tiio^ 

tisb: 

^nnic": 

3/ 

•^j'^cn 

nanbn 

T    ;         • 

npnbn 

njnnicn 

2  m. 

^nbr 

r 

^nsn 

^nbn 

^nnicn 

:     1    : 

2/ 

n:nsn 

npnbn 

nsnnicr;! 

1  c. 

T 

nb? 

nb? 

^iy^) 

ImPEK.  2  TO. 

no 

nbn 

nnio 

2/ 

^no 

^'^^^} 

■nnio 

•    :      1 

riur.  2  TO. 

^nb 

iinbri 

^nnio 

2/ 

M^no 

npnbin 

n:nnio 

Fart.  Act. 

nnb 

niiop 

Pass. 

n^no 

T 

noD 

TT 

96 


Doubled 

Verbs,  §  57. 

HIPHIL. 

HOPllAL. 

HITHPAEL. 

PIKL. 

'^tn 

nc^n 

^iircn 

?]P=P 

f^^?n 

T  — 

ninincn 

T  :      1   ;    • 

nicx 

T  :  ;  • 

r)iiipn 

nniir.cn 

P)?P?P 

t^iiicn 

nniinpJi 

^?^?? 

^miion 

^nniincn 

'J??^?P 

^=icn 

^sp^n 

:      1   :    • 

^5d5p 

Dhincn 

Drinnincn 

V   :  -      1    :    • 

nijn?P?P 

P^^^: 

-jnnnirpn 

ir)?P?P 

^3iiipn 

iiDnnirDH 

^3?p?p 

:^D?7 

!]ppp 

3Lpr! 

niinpn 

"^P?? 

ID-* 

"T 

26^'' 

nninp") 

■^P?!?" 

•'    T 

np^m 

niinpn 

=1?^?^ 

:^Dn 

np^n 

niinon 

^cxn 

^^cn 

^4P^n 

^inincn 

•    :       1   :    • 

^npppn 

m 

n6^i< 

niinpi^ 

=]^?P^ 

^^c: 

^^6^-' 

dninc^ 

^ip??': 

nrncr;) 

nDniincn 

rirsc^cn 

^ncn 

Jinp^n 

^iniron 

^ipspn 

nrl?^ 

HDniincn 

nrscDcn 

"T 

nfc^5 

nninpp 

^^T?? 

non 

niiinpri 

^595 

...     X 

iinbn 

wanting 

^nnippn 

'P?9C 
^5p5p 

?^r5?^! 

TOniinpn 

T  :   ••  ;  — 

^o'-? 

nniPip'j 

'^P?P"9 

20^-2 

T 

97 


XIII.     Par 

ADIGM    OF 

Ayin  Vav 

KAL. 

NIPHAL. 

PIEL. 

PUAI.. 

Pbet.  3  m. 

t^fe 

Dip5 

D72ip 

D7bip 

8/. 

•^•^1? 

ri7jip] 

T\t'q^'\) 

n7b7jij? 

2  m 

vrqt 

r            '    ; 

n-j7bip 

n-fbip 

2/. 

ri7j^ 

niijpD 

n:;7bip 

ri7^7iip 

\c. 

^Pi'-212 

wbpD 

^Fi-97bip 

^n7j7bip 

Plur.  3  c. 

^■Jfe 

^7jipD 

ii2'T\X> 

^7i7jip 

2  m. 

t3ri7jj2 

cirji'-ii^? 

Dn-f^ij^ 

Dteii: 

2/ 

m'^ 

ft"'"^'^!?? 

m'^ii 

■)n7j7jip 

1  c. 

^"-2)2 

!l3i7blp3 

^D7J7jip 

^27^rip 

Infin.  ylJsoZ. 

Dip 

Dipn 

Constr. 

n^p 

Dipri 

D7bip 

FuT,  8  ?ft. 

Dp; 

DSp: 

D'^T' 

D-bip: 

3/. 

D^pn 

Dipn 

D7bipn 

D7bipn 

2  wi. 

D^pn 

Dipn 

D7iipn 

D/bipn 

2/ 

-:i^pn 

^aipn 

rbx2ijDn 

^7bi3ij:Dn 

Ic. 

D^ps 

Dipi< 

D7bipis: 

D7jipyt 

PZur.  3  7/1. 

^•j^p: 

ii7;]ip: 

ii7b7ji):^ 

'^m 

3/. 

nr-bpn 

n":iipn 

T    ;     J 

nD*;7bipn 

n-fbipr;^ 

2  fn. 

\-^^pn 

^•2ipn 

^7b7jii:n 

^7b7jipn 

2/ 

nr7bprn 

nr^ipn 

ri57j^ipn 

ri:7i:]ipn 

1  c. 

^   DT>? 

Dip? 

t3°^T? 

D-bipp 

ImPER.  2  TO. 

D^p 

Dipn 

D-^ip 

2/ 

TJ^p 

^7;?ipr! 

"^^^'i? 

wanting 

Plur.  2  m. 

^■r.p 

^•^ipn 

^■27jipj 

2/. 

"?tP 

HD-^ipri 

s^^'-^'bip 

Part.  Act. 

^i^ 

cpipp 

Pcm. 

D^p 

Dip: 

d7bipti 

98 


AND    AyIN 

YoDH  Verbs,  ^  59. 

■ V 

HIPHIL. 

nOPHAX. 

UITlIPAKr,. 

KAI.. 

C3^pn 

Dp^n 

Diiptri 

T 

ni-j^pn 

rtj^pr 

n-bp^n 
(n-j)b^n) 

ri/raipnn 

T    :    i,    :    . 

n-jbipnn 

T   :  —   '     :    • 

r-fbiprn 

nnn 

T    T 

T                 ■ 

^nrj^pri 

(^n-j^^n) 

^n-fjipnri 

"pn^ 

^ni3"n 

(Dri22p^ri) 
(^::^p^n) 

■)F):a:5iprn 
^37fbiprin 

T 

^n^n 

DPO 

nii 

1 
nn 

t^^n 

Q'iipnri 

l^n 

c^t: 

DpV 

&;:ipn^ 

•  T 

fi^pn 

Dp^n 

nisiprn 

•     T 

D^pn 

Dp^n 

D:jipnn 

•     T 

^'^"pn 

^■j"j^prn 

"     T 

D^PS 

tlpj^ 

D-^^pr:^ 

n-'H^ 

^•^t: 

^■^P^' 

^:j'jipnt 

'^Zl^I^ 

(r::5:p^n) 

^5i3p^in 

HD'j-jiprin 

T    ;   ••  T 

•     T 

(np'^p^n) 

dp^D 

np-fbiprn 
D/bipn? 

Dpv 

d-bipr^'n 

i"n 

wanting 

»^2"JP0 

n:-j?biprn 

in^) 

D'i?'^ 

d-bipn-^ 

T 

apvj 

n^n 

XIV 

.    Paradigm  of 

Pe  Yodh 

Verbs,  §  58.            \ 
^                  1 

KAL, 

NIPIIAL. 

HIPHIL. 

HOPHAL. 

KAL. 

Pbet.  3  m. 

nir-' 

niriD 

n^tjin 

-izTi 

•T 

3/ 

nn-uL"^ 

T    ;     1 

nn^iL'in 

Tl'CZ^ 

2  m. 

T    :    —  r 

rin-i;i2 

nn-ibin 

nnTT^n 

T    :  — T 

2/. 

nniz:'- 

nz'jjiD 

mir-n 

nnTi^n 

Fiicn^ 

Ic. 

^pn^- 

*riniri] 

^nniijin 

"rntTin 

•    :  — T 

Plur.  3  c. 

:  IT 

:    1 

^n^izjin 

1 

iiiij-" 

2  m. 

tSP^l'^^ 

DnniriD 

Dnn^in 

Draiii^n 

or)"^?' 

2/ 

1^?"^' 

l^^^"^'? 

irin^^in 

tF^ 

1^'^'5: 

1  c. 

;    — T 

^DniriD 

^inirin 

ii:2iii^n 

:  — T 

Infin.  ^5sc>Z. 

T 

nirin 

r 

Constr. 

^5^' 

n^irin 

nir^n 

iijn;^ 

FuT.  3  ??i. 

^^!! 

n^'|r 

niziv  : 

^5'? 

3/ 

^VJi] 

n^irin 

nu^^n 

iL-n^n 

2  m. 

nirn 

••T      • 

n^TTin 

n-ij^n 

izjn^n 

2/ 

^iujn 

^nTijr,n 

^n^d^in 

•    :       1 

^ujn^p 

Ic. 

nirx 

••T     • 

n^irij5 

n^^^^ 

irn\N5 

PZwr.  3  m. 

:  [•' 

;'T  • 

^n^iDi"* 

:     1 

:     !• 

3/ 

T   :   —  •• 

njiizj^n 

T   :     ••T    • 

nDnibin 

T    ;     ■• 

ninui^n 

T    :   — 

2  m. 

^Tu^n 

^n^-i'in 

:       1 

;      r 

2/. 

T   :   —  •• 

T   :    --T    • 

T    ;     •• 

T  :    - 

n:m-n 

1  c. 

n-i:_D 

••T  • 

n^-I^iD 

nic'^D 

irn^D 

Impee.  2  TO. 

-'4? 

••T      • 

n-ijin 

T2Ji' 

2/. 
PZwr.  2  TO. 

;iT    • 

wanting 

2/ 

T    :     •• 

T     I      ••T      ' 

"r^5: 

Paet.  Act. 

^T 

n^TTTJ 

tn^ 

Pass. 

T 

T 

T 

T 

lOU 


XV. 

Paradigm  of  Lamkdti  Aiepii  Verbs 

,  ^«o.     j 

KAL. 

N I  I'll  A  L. 

PIliL. 

HiriiiL. 

IIITKIaEL.    I 

Pket.  3  m. 

^^12 

srj3 

T    ;  • 

^^r 

u^-r^n 

^^i'^nn 

3/ 

nik:ii2 

nxiia; 

T    :    • 

r      ■    :    • 

T    ;    -   :    • 

2  m. 

n^irj 

rj^i'j: 

T             ••     • 

nj<^':nn 

2/ 

r.j52::a 

rwsr;D 

r.s"4ti 

ni^:2i:n 

nx2i-:nn 

le. 

^nj^r^ 

^nj5i-j2 

"m^7j 

'T\^T2n 

T^^^-^nn 

Plur,  3  e. 

^.sr:] 

^^^rjD 

^^^12 

^i<-i:t!n 

^^i^iarn 

2  m. 

Dn^5:i■J 

Dnj5::7^3 

nr^i^Tg 

an^r^n 

nns^/^nr;  ■ 

2/. 

l^^^-^ 

l^n^^"^? 

]T\i^^'n 

-jn^^rjn 

■^l^^5r^^^ 

1  c. 

T     T 

^:5<r;D 

r.i!<T2 

ii:i<r^n 

r.i^T2t^tl 

Infix.  ^5soZ 

.    ^^irj 

^^b:°j2 

^k'2 

^^^u 

Constr 

i!(T2 

«i2^n 

^T2 

^•^i^':::] 

t^s^nr; 

FuT.  3  m. 

i^T'T 

^^2^ 

1^"^°^: 

«k"^n^ 

3/ 

T      .       ' 

•■     T      • 

i^'2p2T\ 

.s^r;n 

«r»nri 

2  TO. 

a^'i^n 

••      T       ' 

i^Tcr} 

Lr:i^n 

«ii°2nr 

2/. 

'^^•r2r\ 

^^5:2  tin 

■^b^rijn 

\s^rjn 

^^^'ntyr) 

Ic. 

t^T2^ 

T    :    V 

x:2/2b5 

^^"=^ 

^<•i2:2^5 

i^T^Vi^ 

PZ«r.  3  m. 

^ki'T 

:    IT* 

^kT'T 

^^5^rr 

^k^•ct^^ 

3/ 

nr.si^jn 

n:«i"/2n 

riD^^s^n 

rr,^T2r\ 

n:552iar.n 

2  TO. 

^^•^■2n 

^^•ii2r\ 

^;:<!i7^n 

^^•r^n 

^kss7-nn 

2/ 

T        V    ;     ' 

j-i:i<:k/2n 

T             V     T      • 

n:b5E-:]n 

Hji^r^n 

n:iJ5-i°^nri 

1  c. 

j^r;3 

^^'^? 

n^::?j: 

^i^=f?? 

Impek.  2  TO. 

T    : 

■•     T     • 

xfi^ 

i^tzti 

^^■=t^ri 

2/ 

-t<rj 

•    :   IT   • 

^^^'2 

^^•"k^ti 

"i^r^nn 

Plur.  2  TO. 

1^5:I•a 

;    IT    " 

^i<T2 

iiw^^-^iS'^n 

^&52i:2nri 

2/ 

T        V    ; 

T           V     T     • 

n:m-2 

T            V    — 

n:^iis';n 

T       •••—:• 

Part.  Act. 

x^b 

i^-1-2'2 

t^-r^-g 

i^k2rc2 

Pass. 

N1HD 

X22522 

1 

XVI. 

Paradigm 

OF  Lamldh 

KAL. 

NIPHAL, 

PIEL. 

Pbet.  3  7)1. 

H^S 

nb'ro 

nba 

3/ 

nnbs 

nhbro 

nhbs 

T  :  • 

2  m. 

n-br, 

n^b:o 

rr^t 

2/ 

•      T 

n^b'3? 

n^bs 

le. 

-n^b-i 

^n-^b'j^ 

^jn^ba 

Plur.  3  6. 

T 

^3;;? 

^bs 

2  m. 

fiti'br. 

t^r^'b^D 

Qn^ba 

2/ 

"|h^ba 

1^^^^??? 

ir)'^3 

1  c. 

iirba 

•    r 

^='!?^? 

^rba 

Ikfin.  ^fooZ. 

nba 

n^':^: 

n-b3 

C<??is?r. 

nib's 

nibr^n 

nibs 

FuT.  3  m. 

nbr 

nb'r 

rHT 

3/. 

nb.-n 

nb'sn 

nbbn 

2  m. 

nbr^n 

nb'sn 

•••   T     • 

nbjiN 

»  —  : 

2/ 

-'brin 

^b'sn 

-%7\ 

1<5. 

nb3« 

nb'sj^ 

r^i-y^ 

Plur.  3  OT. 

^^;^: 

T  • 

"1%^. 

3/ 

■  nrbsn 

TV;- 

nrb'sn 

nrb.-n 

2  w. 

^b:*n 

^bsn 

^%T\ 

2/. 

T    V   :    • 

ribro 

nrb'sn 

T     V  T    • 

nb|»2 

nrb'^p. 

Imper.  2  ??i. 

nba 

M  jsn 

nb'a 

2/ 

^i5 

^br,n 

^b'a 

Ptttr.  2  m. 

tiba 

^% 

2/ 

nrbn 

T    V  : 

^r-?''?^ 

^r^ 

Part.  ^c«. 

"% 

nhp 

Pass. 

'«3 

r 

nb:iD 

V  :  • 

102 


He  Verbs,  ^61. 

PUAL. 

niriiii.. 

HOPHAL. 

HITHPAEL. 

T  •.. 

T  ;     • 

T  ;    T 

uVrinn 

nnb:n 

T  ;  ; 

nhbjn 

r  :  :    T 

nribsnn 

T     ••  •.. 

n-b'.-n 

T    •  :    • 

n^b^n 

T     ••  ;     r 

n^b'r,nri 

n^V-i 

n^b'^n 

n^bbn 

n^b^nn 

r\^% 

^n^^:«ri 

•n^b'jH 

^n^^snn 

^^ 

^^fH 

"&n 

^b'snri 

V    ••  ••. 

D^'^?n 

^^'^fO 

^t'^^srin 

It!-*? 

1^^^?" 

"n^b:ii 

■n^bsnn 

«'& 

r-^b'rn 

rAynfi 

(n-53) 

r!b'3n 

(ribsDii) 

niSan 

(m'b'rtn) 

nibsnri 

nbV 

nb':r 

V  ;  T 

V  —  ;  • 

V  \   : 

•^.y^^D 

nbjFl 

nb'snn 

n53n 

V  ^    : 

nb'^n 

n5:»n 

V  :    r 

nb'ijriri 

^bbn 

'?'^»^ 

^bbn 

•  ;   T 

"fenn 

¥  \  -: 

nb3^5 

V  :  — 

V  —  :  V       t 

«?: 

:  r 

^%n: 

T    V  •..   : 

nrb'^n 

T    V  :  — 

T    V  :   T 

riw^bitriri 

^%n 

^%r\ 

:   T 

^bsnn 

T    V  ..  : 

T    V  :  — 

nrb;*n 

T    V  :   T 

nrVsriin 

nb'33 

-bb: 

^.y^ri? 

nb:»n 

1  )iiin»  1 

wanting 

^bJsn 

w  anting 

^Srn 

^3ij 

^Vsnn 

^r^?'^  ■ 

r    V  —  :    • 

rip2 

5^)5^'^ 

V  \  : 

nb'37j 

V  :   T 

103 


XV^II.    Declension  of  Nouns,  §§  44-47. 

I.  Nouns  ivliich  ■suffer  a  cliange  in  the  vowels  only. 
i.     With  Kamets  or  Tsere  in  the  penult. 


S-TfG    Ahs,      "lilS^  master 
l"i^3T  memorial 


PL.  Ahs.  D^plJSJ 


Const.  "^  JlN; 


Masc.  tl^D-n-i      Fern-  Imblli^ 


Const,     n-n:^ 

yi^Tp  imerpreter  "fb^P 

J/«sc   bili^  great  Fern.  nbi"l5 

T  ♦ 

^TltOp  ^1-  pass.  part.        nb^tOp 

ii.     With  Tsere  in  the  ultimate. 
a.  Monosyllal^les 

Sing.  Ahs.         ^k  *^^®-  ^^"*^      T^-       ^^'  ^^*'    °"'^'^  ^''"^*'    ^^■^: 

Z*.  Polysyllables  having  pretonic  Kamets  in  the  penult. 

Sing.  Ahs-.       1^3  heavy  Const.  ^nSorHn.li      Pi-  ^^s-  0^1??         ^''"^^-  ''1?^ 

1/rtsc.  'ojn"'  tiry    Fern.  niD^";  -^^"s^'-  tj''tijni     -f''^''»-  tiTtun"] 

r    Polysyllables  having  any  other  vowel  than  Kamets  in  the 
penult. 

Sing.  Als.   "Dvi^"  J"^°^-  ^^'"*'^-   '^•^'^"^    ^^    ^^^'  ^^P?P       ^^"^^-  ^P?? 

J/rtSC.  bpp  KaL  Act.  part.  Fern,  ubpjb  or  D.bpp  ^lasc.  t:"^bpp        -?''e'«-  tllbpp 

bt2p?;Pielpart.  H^I^p.n  or  Jnbpp.^         t]^btOp)2  n1btDp)2 

iii.     AVith  Kamets  in  the  ultimate. 

;  ?rau.  Abb  y^  fish  Const.        y^        Pl.  Ahs.     tT^y^ 

i  'D'^P'O  saucluary  tlJ'^P^  tD^iP'lp?? 


-I^T  word 

I 

"j^^  cloud 

^^b  heart 

Mafc.     Slsn  wise 

T     T 

y^T-'^  ^'ip'^-  part- 


nni 


15? 
nib 


Fcm.  n'o^n      ^«sc.  t3"''>3Dn    ^e»j.  rii^Dn 
nbt:D>rnbbp5   □^"rjpD         nib-jpD| 

_:  11 :  •       :_] 

104 


I 


XVII.    Declension  of  Nouns,  §§  44-47. 


iv.      With  final  n.,. 

Sisu.  J6.^.    n;<"l'3    appcarauce    Const.   n;^173    P^.     Jfo.   Q*i;5"l.^ 


J 


reed 
Masc      nS"'    fair 


n?p 


Fern.  riiS"' 


SiNO.  Ahs. 


!]D^  king 
"iJPO  covert 

^  r 

tD^^;  strength 

^;^3  lord 

I 
nVO  death 

"I"i^  eye 

^-^-j  loci 

"^TS^  ear 


V.     Segliolates. 

Const.     tlbTO    Pi^     -46s.  D^Db^        C'ons*.    ipb?? 


^  I 

tt3;22^  strength  C!^5' 

b'S'k  lord  b5>3 

'l"'^?    Dual. 
b  "(ti  ear  'jtJj^ 

P  IL  Nouns  which  double  tJieir  final  consonant. 

^  I  III 

Smo.  ^?w.        b^!\  camel  Co«s«.      b^O^i     Pl.   Ahs.    Qi^^^^i         Cohs^.    \b)Pi\ 


an^sntp 

"^If^P 

W^'^l^ 

••    :   T 

n^b:?n 

T     t 

''•??? 

^^"^1)2 

^nl)3 

Q'.^-'^- 

^T^.. 

Q'bpri 

'?^1 

Q^DTii 

^5tk 

"1^  garden 

pn  statute 
•I'Q)  tooth 

Masc.      \'0'p  small 
I 
p733?  deep 


1^- 


Fern.   nStOP     PL.  lf«sc.  D^SDp 

IT  )  T  \   -:  )  •   \  -:  II. 

I,  I  ,11 

Als.      nnS?  Hebrew  Co)!s?.  ^.-|p5?  Pl.  J6s.  □"'^'ID]?  orCTl^5?  C'o»&<.i_'i-l23? 
Masc     ^"It:  fresh  Fern.       n'^"l'D^^«sc.  Q^^lt:        ^^»»-  m*'"l'C: 

III.   Other  ivouns  suffer  no  change. 

I  III 

Smti  ^Z-s.-OJ^nb^  garment      Const.  "[rinb^PL.  J&s.  tD^tp^Sb^  ^-^-^^  ^u?^,Sb^ 

B'     ]^rt5o.  niiD  good         2^ew.  nnito      ^«sc'.  d^^ii:  i<'ew.   mmt: 

*  b^tpp72   Hiph.  part.     nb^Pp'O  or  ribip/2       t]^D^Pp)2      Jllb^tpp)? 

— — -  —^ 


XVII.    Declension  of  Nouns,  §§  44-47 


Nouns  tvitJb  the  feminine  ending  n^. 
i.     With  Kamets  or  Tsere  in  the  penult. 

I  111 

SiKCJ.  Ahs.       TVy^  fish         Co7ist.  '^y^    Pl.  Ahs.        ty\'.\l       Const.     ty\y^ 

T    T  -     :  T  "     • 

n^p^D  vengeance  n^pD  T\'\it>^  SllT^p? 

T  T  -    :  •  -    T    ;  "    :     • 

ii.     From  ISegholates. 

Sing.  -46s.    HS 570  queen       Cn^ist.        n^b)2    Pl.  J5s.    n"!Db72    Count.     fllDbD 


nnr,p  covert  i^nnp  niitip 

n?o^:?  strength  ^72^5?  ni?2:£3? 

T    :    T  -    ;    T  T   T  I 

iii.     All  others. 

Const.  tl_5^    PL.  Ahs.        riiS^       C'o«s«-     m'35 

ni^T25\  nii'^ti)-'^         nii?^^""'. 

Nouns  with  the  feminine  ending  n. 
I  I  I.I. 

SrKA^&s-m72t2))2  observance Co«sf.n^)2tn)2  Pl.  ^&s.  m"l^^?)2  fo>w^  Jl1"l)2tr)?a 


Sing,  Ahs.        HSy  garden 
Hi'^tD''  salvation 


npDV  sucker 

^P^V 

nip^l"'^ 

hipjv 

nb!ib-i  skull 

S^bibs 

m'b!ib-i 

nib!ib3 

1 

pi"||Q3J  Hebrew-woman 

nnn3? 

nl^nn:^ 

ni^"in? 

n^.Sb??  kingdom 

n^Db)2 

sni^DbD 

\  :    - 

tii^Db^ 

10(3 


1  XVIII.  Paradigm  of 

Nouns  with 

Suffixes, 

H9.      ! 

SiNGULAE. 

lieart 

nhb 

king 

^^ 

queen     HSb/J 

hand 

T 

Cmtt. 

nnb 

^^ 

nsb^j 

^*^ 

Sing.  1  c.  my 

« 

^nnb 

•  T  : 

i^'^ 

(( 

'^?t'^ 

(i 

^1" 

2  m,  thy 
2/.  thy 
8  m.  his 

?jn2b 

ii)b-j 

u 

u 

n^3b^ 

ih3b7j 

(4 

ir 

8/   her 

u 

ninb 

T  T  ; 

nsb-j 

li 

nh3bu 

r  T  ;   — 

(( 

•^7r 

riur.  1  c.    our 

<i 

••  T  : 

^J3^15 

u 

^;n3b"^ 

^:t 

2  »J.  your 

u 

Dii^^b 

C]i?b7j 

(( 

C3^I?5^"^ 

D57: 

2/   your 

(( 

15^5^ 

l^?i^ 

u 

15^?^^ 

U 

197: 

8  m.  their 

(C 

Dnnb 

T  T  ; 

Dsb-:: 

u 

Dhsb^:: 

or 

«/   their 

u 

R?^ 

ll^^ 

u 

1^1^-^ 

t^ 

PluE  AL. 

Dual. 

hearts 

D^inb 

kings 

D^ib^j 

quee 

ns  niibr 

bands 

n^r 

Cow^e.  ^inb  ^ibx]  niib7j  ^t 


-s-/??^.  1  c.  my  "      "inb  "      ^ib^^  «     ^nisb?^  »  "^  j^ 

2  m.  thy  "      Ti?'^  "      T^^"^  "     T^'^'^^'^  ''  TT 

2/  thy  "    Tji^inb  "    T|;'5b:a  "    tji'niDba  "  'q;^^'' 

3  m.  his  «'     riub  "    riba  "    rhibb":)  "  rV 

8/  her  "   r.-'inb  "   n-ib-j  "  n^t^'^'^^"^  "  n^V 

piur.  1  c.  our  "    ^rizb  "   ^rib'j  "   iiD^hisb*.]  "  ^d-'t 

2  m.  your  "  Di"'njb  "  D5"'sba  »  Di^nisbTj  »  cin^ 

2/.  your  »  "i'lnb  "  "j^jb-j  "  "jD^nibb^  »  -ji^i;^ 

8  OT.  their  "  DH^i^b  »  Dn^'Db^j  •'  Dn^Mbb/j  "  firi^^'' 

8/  their  »  l^-^nnb  «  in-'^bia  "  "jn^nibb^j  »  in^i;^ 

107 


XIX.     Numerals, 
Cardinals. 

Masculine. 


Absol. 

Comtr. 

One 

T    V 

nn« 

Two 

D;b'i' 

^?.^ 

Thre« 

F;nr 

T   T  :  — 

n^a-ii^ 

Five 

T   •  -: 

n"j37jn 

Bix 

T      • 

nib-j3 

Seven 

n:^Ti 

Eight 

T         : 

nibib 

ITine 

T    :    • 

r.^ibn 

Ten 

T  T  -: 

nnibji? 

V    V  -! 

Eleveu 

I  nibs' 

T  r 

T   T 

Twelve 

T  r 

Thirteen 

nib  2? 

T   T 

T      : 

Fourteen 

T   T 

T  T  :  — 

Fifteen 

nib" 

T   T 

T  •  -: 

Sixteen 

nibr 

T  r 

mbii:" 

T       • 

Seventeen 

nib::? 

T  r 

T  :    • 

Eighteen 

nib^' 

T    I 

T        : 

Nineteen 

ni^ibn 

Twenty  O'l-ni)?  Sixty  D'^l^ffi 

Thirty  cinbl^  Seventy  D''y?t2^' 

Forty  a'^ifSIN  Eiglity  Wh^t 

Fifty  D'^ffi^n  Ninety  U^btX>^ 


First  •JITCS-I 

Second  "litO 

Third  ^it-'bt 

Fourth  ■'yS"! 


Ordinals. 

Fifth         ^i^'Pi] 
Sixtn  W 

Seventh     ^^_'^'2V 

108 


§(35. 

Fem 

Ahsol. 

TiJbu) 

T 

ysn;^ 

"■    T 

tcib 

yibn 
niri? 
nnicy 
•^■^'^? 

Mnir:^ 
nnir?? 
nnir^ 

innir:^ 
»^!}"^? 

One  hundred 
Two  hundred 
One  thousand 
Ten  thousand 


I  N  IN  • 

Comir. 

nns 

"^"■? 
ii:b"u: 

ib/bn 

:-ibr, 
nbjj 

V  V 

"^^■? 
tSizJ 

—  : 


Eiglith       ■'S'^'Q© 
Ninth        ''T'ltiJn 

s 

Tenth        "^Tb'J^ 


< 


XX.      Consecution  of  Accents,  §20. 


Primary 
Sections. 

ft 

■ 

► 
O 

z 
o 

ft 

O 

G 

o 

Conjunctives. 

It 

ft 

H 
J; 

o 

K 

IB 

o 

*i 

J 

■   V 

/.s) 

» 

.OL) 

-« 
/(") 

'0\  .L 

A 

J 

A 

..(.) 

~ 

v\S 

Secondabt 

8RCTION3. 

J    J 

>J 

jSiS 

'J 

• 

Js)J.) 

-    -    ■    - 



P 

■ 
^  J  J  J 

Umcstjal 
Sections. 

1 

'KP 

y  J  J  J  .1  J 

(  The  accents  in  parenthesis  are  liable  to  be  substituted  for  tliose  that  pre- 
cede them.  Thus  in  the  train  of  Silhik  or  Athnahh  occupying  the  nppei 
horizontal  line  of  the  table,  if  T'bhir  is  preceded  by  one  Conjunctive,  it  will 
beDargaor  Merka;  if  by  two,  the  second  w\\\  be  Kadhraa  or  Munahh ;  if 
by  three,  tlie  third  will  be  T'lisha  K'tanna, 

109 


I 


LESSONS   IN   READING   HEBREW 


1.  The  Peefixed  Particles,  §§  24-28. 

In  tlie  earlier  reading  lessons  the  accents  will  be  but  sparingly  employed.  Tht 
tone  syllable  will  be  marked  when  it  is  not  the  ultimate ;  and  an  occasional  disjunc- 
tive will  be  inserted  when  it  is  needed  as  a  sign  of  interpunction  or  to  account  foi 
a  pausal  fonn,  §  19. 

!  nianni  ons     :  n^na  "i?  0*7x12     :  n^  "i?  n;^i2     :  rriisni  n;>a3 

"0)2    !  nn^2    nicni   nnSi    -ij^iia   nton^   Dm     5  -iph  "r?    nni?ia 
:  nb-ba  nisb  n'insiDi  Jrh^  ni^a  nixb  tJisTiJ     tDii?^ 


2.  TiEE  Peksonal  Pronout^^s,  §  29. 

E-emakk  1.  The  predicate  of  a  sentence  may  be  directly 
connected  with  its  subject  without  the  verb  io  be,  which 
must  he  supplied  in  Englisli,  riin^  nns?  thou  (art)  deJio- 
vah ;  or  the  pronoun  sin  of  the  tliird  person  may  be  used 
as  a  copula  instead  of  the  verb  to  he,  \7liich  must  be  sub- 
stituted for  it  in  translating,  D^rfbii  s^n  nrx  tJtoii,  art  God, 
see  §  67. 

2.  Property  or  possession  is  denoted  by  the  prep,  b  to, 
belonging  to,  e.  g.  yy^r\  nin^b  ],e  earth  (belongs)  io  Jeho- 
vah, is  JehovaKs,  5l93n  ib  the  silver  is  mine. 

3.  The  preposition  X^  is  repeated  before  both  the  ob 
jects,  between  which  the  interval  is  indicated  tjp'^ai  ^:^5 
h^twmn  me  and  thee^ 


112  LESSONS    IN    READING    IIEBKEW. 

liyn      :dw3  o^n'bs  s^n  nns  s"bn     :  ynijn-b?  nnsi  D^-b't^a 
c\i^N   nnnn    jnn-Tn   ^bi    qosn   ^b    :Dn   ■'b  nr\?n     :ns  D=b 

:  Dbbb  siin  nix  bsnic:'  I'^i'i  '^i'^a    t  ''3b« 


3.  Other  Pronouns.     §  30. 

Remark  4.  Wlien  a  demonstrative  pronoun  is  joined  to 
a  noun  as  an  attributive,  it  follows  the  ncun  and  both 
receive  the  definite  article,  e.  g.  n-^n  oi'^n  this  day,  Di-n 
8{^nn  that  daij.  When  it  is  used  as  a  predicate,  the  de- 
monstrative stands  first  and  is  without  the  article  oi'^^  r\l 
this  is  the  day,  §  71.  1. 

!  n-Tn  ci'^n  ^y  :  xnnn  D-ip^n  :  n^'aa  ^t?^?:"^?  J  ib-nics-bDi  s^n 
■'5'^si  n\s  nxT  !  cDb  n'cs  psjn  r«T  ;  n-7n  n^abi  nii"n  fnxb 
^13  J  nin;'  1^  !  Trnijn-bDn  ■':*^3  ^^  '  T^'JT^?  "^^^^  ^^1''=?  T^^ 
^^b  5  nbi?  n^n  nri  :  Tji^s  '^)a  :  n^x  ^-Q  '  nnx  ■'^  :  n:'^^  ^b 
p»n  n^  :  s^n  mp  is  nns  nirs  aip^n;  nr,x  nra  ■'Si  nns 
D-^iaa  mcsn  nnrj)?  ■j^nsa  ncsjii  byi?^  n^^f?  ^'tCi?  '•  f^5  «^"  ">^'^ 

:  ^b~n27«-bDn  i5x  ^b  :  ynsb  nnnp 


4  Perfect  Verbs.     Kal  Preterite  and  _ 

.  Infinitives.     §  33.  ■! 

The  verbal  forms  should  be  analyzed  or  divided  into  their  significant  elements  , 
thus  Dnb-jp  ye  (m.)  killed  is  composed  of  bhp^  the  gi-oimd  form  of  the  Kal  pret. 
and  on  shortened  from  the  2  m.  pi.  pron.  cnx . 

Analyze  and  translate : — 

n^ibp    ,^3^m;?  ,bii3^    ,bt2^  ,Tbh^    ,i'5tpi^    ,nbt:p    ,cn^^p 


I 


JjESSONS    in    heading    IIKiniEVV.  115 

Remark  5.  Both  forms  of  the  infinitive  may  be  used 
alone ;  but  the  construct  only  is  employed  with  preposi- 
tions, §  81.  2,  thus  bir^b,  bir^'p?  not  "stiiJ^"?,  biiij^^ . 

"npn"!  ^   :  ^n.'iD  nb'nn-ns     :  n^i^nb   nnri]    nin  "is5i3  nb'ja  nin^ 

nssia  ;  nin^b  ns©  fikn  nr^^rj  :  d2  nbir^"--^b  :  -ibrb  c^/p* 
■ns  Dnn)2TD  :^^b^{^  D^^b^n-bs  by  Fip:?;'^  nb-in  n-^ro  :n-]ii'2 
nai^n-ns  Dn"i^T2?    J^rii^ib  p-is    :  n^^^^an'bs-ns  ibir    :n-n  Dvn 

!  D2b  s^n  tj"ip  ••: 

'  P5'^  is  followed  by  3  ,  the  usual  Hebrew  phrase  being  to  cleave  or  adhere  in^ 
where  the  English  idiom  reqiiires  to  cleave  to.  Daghesh-f  ortc  conjunctive  in  a 
^  13.  4. 

"  bd^  is  also  followed  by  3  ,  where  our  idiom  requires  to  rule  over. 

5.       NiPHAL,      PlEL,     AND     PuAL    PRETERITES    AND    INFINI- 
TIVES,  §  34. 

A  figure  following  a  verbal  fonn  indicates  the  number  of  times  it  is  to  be  found 
in  the  paradigm. 

i\.nalyze  and  translate  : — 

,inbi2pD    ,  5^'^^i?3    j^ribupD    ,  PibupD    ,  ^:bt:p2    ,nbi3p3    ,  nbup? 

.  Dnbt2p3  ,  b-jpp  ,  btipn 

,  nbDp    ,  Dnbrop    ,  bipp  ,  ^:bD|5  ,  nbisp  ,  nbnp  ,  ^nbiop  ,  "^r^biDp 
,'jnbDi?   ,^bBj3   ,r\bi3i5   ,n>Dp   ^^sbti]?  ,(2;^^!?  .)^)^?  O^i^R 

.  cnbiEp  ,  nbtsp 

Kemark  6.  The  sign  of  the  definite  object  nx  becomes 
ns  before  grave  suffixes  and  mix  before  light  suffixes, 
§  06.  8,  thus  ■'nix  ,  oDnx ;  with  the  3  m.  s.  suffix  it  is  inx, 
with  3  f.  s.  Jinx  ,  §  29.  4. 

D23  ^pc-ippi  QDns  "^map    :Q^^3sb  fisn  nr^D:    nb^ap  x'b 
"n«  iath  ^m'p  "iti^bx-nx     :n^i-b5  i3p    5njn;i  ''?«"'"3  ORJCT" 


/  ^ 


I  1 4  LESSONS   IN    READING    HEBREW. 

5 1\)  u-3p3  :  ins?  n:o -ipT  ^s-mrx-bs-nxi  iiTCian-ns  nnib^^, 

G,  The  Rejiaininq  Preterites  and  Ineinitives.     §  85 

Analyze  and  translate  : — 

^sbtspnn  ^-^ribtspnn  ,  inbppn  ,  nbi^pn  ,  "b-^ppn ,  ^:bt2pn ,  nnb-jpr. 

.(2)  btspnn  ,  b^"jpn  ,bt:pn 

Rejmark  7.  The  absolute  infinitive  is  often  joined  with 
the  finite  tenses  of  the  verb  for  the  sake  of  emphasis, 
thus  "^ntc^ipn  irfipn  consecrating  I  have  consecrated,  i.  e 
I  have  Cf.rtainly  or  entirely  consecrated. 

nj^'ipn  nt^N  ^rHni  qcsn-ay  nin^b  ii^i  !jbt?n  is'^'ipn  onsf-na 
qcsn-pN    ^i?TL''npn    C'^p^    ;  ^iij-pnn-s'b    ;  tas    nts    Di'inn-bsia 
^:n2ffin  :  r.'anni  cnsj  ns^'a  n-snr^ni  rii-n  T'^iijn-ns  r^r\tr\  :  nir-pb 
?fbr)n  hb  a^ns  n'^'ip^r'b  nDnb;  a'^n'bb?''  b'^'^nn-'^s  "^V^h^  :nDsb"an-ns 
nninpn'i    ddhs    nb^ri    -^nrrni:?    dd3    "^nnb^ipn  '^    :  r^Db-an-bs 

!  DDns  nu'^iJ'an'i  r/ansn-rs 

'   See  §  26. 

^  Plui'al  in  form  but  singular  in  sense,  and  therefore  taking-  a  singTiIar  verb, 
§  85.  3. 

^  Followed  by  the  prep.  3  in  the  sense  of  sending  upon  or  against. 

7.  Kal  Future,  Imperative  and  Participles.     §  3(j 

Analyze  and  translate  : — 

,ibi5pn  ,bt2pN  ,  (2)  npVipn  jbbp;!  ,bt]p]  ,(2)  b-jpn  ,^1^15^. 
.'ibipp  ,b'it2p  ,n:btbp  ,bt5p  ,bbp  ,  "^btpp  ,^h^p7\ 

Remark  8.  The  article  ])efore  a  participle  must  some- 
times be  rendered  in  English  by  the  relative  pronoun, 
e.  g.  '"i^ii'n  tJie  (one)  'keeping  or  (he)  who  is  keeping. 


i 


LESSONS,    IX    KKADING    IIKBUEW.  115 

9.  When  the  sign  (>f  the  definite  object  precedes  the 
relative,  it  belongs  not  to  it  but  to  its  antecedent  under- 
stood, see  §  30.  3 ;  hence  iTSi?  nx  means  not  whom  or 
wliicli^  but  him  xoho  or  'what  equivalent  to  tliat  wldch. 

t  P-13T  nrjs  nx  "l-ct  nin;^  np^n  ;  ^r^t-}  ijb  r.b-Sn  d"^  :  ^nniiT 
:  v'^^^s  iDTsn  nin;"  :  'ji'^ss  "jDiu"  nin^  ;  nii-n  nis^n-bs-ns  nbirp 

s^jtc  "iirabn  !DD3  bb"^;'  nin^  052  ^dx  bto>3S-s'b  !b^n\ri;'3  wh-tc 

jn'b^nsn  nsirabn  1? 


8.  NiPHAL,  Pij:l  and  Pual  Futuees,  etc.     §  37. 
Analyze  and  translate : — 

.  (2)  nsbi2j^n  ,  bt:)?D  ,  n^t2;^P,  ,  ^St:]?:  ,  ^btpp^p  ,  bt:^- 

,(2)n:^:bpn  ,i^i?p^  ,^isp^  ,;tbp^f  ,^^i?pn  ,r\:bbp_  ,hi^p_)?  ,bi?p_ 
.  ^btD)?r\  ,  '^biOj?  ,  nb^p  ,  bDj^B  ,  b^^\  ,  (2)  bcspp 

Remark  10.  The  infinitive  with  or  without  the  prepo- 
sition b  maybe  the  subject, of  a  sentence,  as  "T^iaprib  T|b  5?'b 
to  burn  incense  belongs  not  to  thee  or  it  is  not  for  tliee  to 
burn  incense. 

\  1 .  The  antecedent  of  the  relative  pronoun  may  often 
be  omitted,  thus  "11?^^  «'n  he  is  the  one  tuho  or  that  is 
tlie  tiling  which. 

n^-gpnb  ^n^'i^b  :  bx-nir^-nx  -inpr!  nin;!  ^ds  "^3  D'^ian  ^^^-^  ;  "inss 
apy^-ay  ■'ii-r'is  ?]b  n'cffin  :"^rjp-nb  n''tr~ppn  n^inbb  •'S  niri''^ 


116  LESSONS    IN    KEADING    1U0J3KEW 


9    ».    HiPinL,    HOPIIAL.     AND     HiTIIPAEL     FuTUUES,     ETC. 

§  38. 
Analyze  and  translate : — 

,(2)  n:bc5pnn ,  bE);:n^  ,(2)  b^topn ,  ^^tfpn  ^  biDp&j ,  b-^pp? ,  ^^tapnn 
,  b^t:]?^     ,  bup)2    ,  bEpnn    ,  ^br?prn    ,  ■^b-^ppn    ,  robbpn    ,  ^bbp* 

i^s  niD  :  ab-"::?  tj  n-rn  n^an  dS'^  ion  ninsn-sb  5  •i^'^rfn 
"by  in«  ^D\b^:  :  nrraitJi  "jiffiw  --n  Diprirr]i2  rr^ntc^  i3:n  rnh;' 
■bs  ns  nrs?  ninir^n  :  nin^b  nbs  ^^^npn  x"b  s  bxnia^-bs 
"•ssb  nps'sin  nb-;^-i3   mn   D"ipi2n-nN     ^:n3s  □"•nntiia     :n^"is"i;*ri 

J  nin'; 

9  b.  The  Entiee  Paradigm  of  bt2p. 

The  fibres  denote,  as  before,  the  number  of  places  in  the  paradigm  repre- 
sented by  the  jjieceding  form. 

Supply  the  vowels  and  translate : — 

,  (2)  ibDpn  ,  Dnbt2p2  ,  (2)  robtjp  ,  (5)  ^bypn  ,  Q\)  inb-jp 
,  (2)  bitsp  ,  (2)  nbt:pnn  ,  n:b-L:pnn  ,  iDb-jpnn  ,  b^tip^  ,  (4)  nb'jpr; 
,(4)  bt2pr^n  jbtjpni  ,(8)  b'^^pn  ,(2)  cnbtjpn  ,b^i3pi?  ,  nb-jpn 
,(10)^tDpn  ,(;))  i:bt3p  ,(12)  nsb-jpn  ,ibDpr.  ,  nb^jpn  ,  ibvjpi 
(2)  bt2pnn  ,b^t2p5  ,  nb-jpnn  ,(2)  nb'itjpn  ,(3)  b-jp'a 
,(5)  bi3pi5  ,(5)  ibtsp  ,nbi:p:  ,(2)  b^jpn  ,b^-jp^  .,n:t3pnji 
,i^'^t:pn  ,b-jpnT2  ,bT3pn:  ,(5)  ibt:pn  ,(2)  rbt:pD  ,  •'b-^upn  ,br3pnK 
(7)  VjpD  ,  (5)  btjp-i  ,  (3)  ^nb-op  ,  ibDps  ,  (2)  n:bnpn  ,.nnbi2pnr 
,(2)  "^^isp  ,  ■'nbtspD  ,(2)  n:bt2pn  ,(2j  ibt:pnn  ,(2)  nsbupnr 
,(2)  ^nb-jpn       ^'^biupn     ,(5)    ibupi     .(6)    nbtip     ,inbi:p: 


LESSONS    IN    KEADING    HEBREW.  117 

,(»)  artup  ,(2)  ^nb-L:pn  ,  i:b-jp:  ,(3)  nb-jp  ,(ii)  bup  ^^b-jpn- 
,  Vjupnn  ,'jnbi3pnn  ,(2)  b-^Dpn  ,-bi:pnn  ,-'nbt3pnr> 


10.  Paea^gogic    and   Apocopated   Future  and  Impera- 
tive AND  Vav  Conversive,  §§40,  41. 

Remark  1 2.  AVlien  a  future  with  Vav  Conversive  is  pre- 
ceded by  a  preterite  or  by  any  expression  referring  to 
past  time,  it  is  to  be  translated  as  a  preterite.  And 
a  preterite  with  Vav  Conversive  preceded  by  a  future, 
an  imperative  or  any  expression  indicating  future  time,  is 
to  be  translated  as  a  future,  §  T9. 

13.  xb  is  tlie  simple  negative;  bi<  is  used  with  the 
future,  which  takes  the  apocopated  form  if  it  has  one,  to 
express  the  negative  imperative  'l^'^on  K"b  tJiou  hIuiU  not 
deliver^  15  on  bi?  deliver  not. 

nin;!  "itp^ai^T  to  ^m  nin^i   tnnnn-b«   th  psin;:  Tn  n^^-; 

Qi-;.nn    nsbBn    rbji^Pi]    npyr    pyr^^i    ns^5^    pir    ifab^n    ib   iu;s 
^'^:TJ)  "i^^n  D^ian-nx  nin;*  ri"'"?^:  '.bap  s'b'i  '^D-^-na-rN  TiJ"^3bnb 

•j'sffin-PN    'Pn]?^?  r^.?'^2n-rs  l""^r^i<"~i?   jPti-'^bni  □■^"i.^an-rs  nnpbi 
nsn-i:?  nnp    ;yn  tjtgp  "js^^'bi?     :in«  nrnr-c^   r&?nn  b?   npy^i 


1 1.  Preterites  of  Perfect  Verbs  with  Suffixes,  §  42. 

a.  Third  person  masc,  and  fem.  sing,  of  the  Kal  Pre 
terite. 

The  forms  Bhoivld  be  analyzed  or  divided  into  their  significant  elements,  and 
their  separatt?  equivalents  stated;  thus  iSlJp  Jie  killed  him  is  composed  of  ba;; 
?  masc.    ?ing.   pret.    and  S  foi  m     sufiBx  of  3  masc.  sing,  with  vowel  of  "anipji 


118  LESSOJSrS    IN    READING    HEBREW. 

(^  )j  and  is  equivalent  to  irx  hbp ;  nn5::;ri  s'le  killed  her  ig  foi  nn^Df. 
which  is  composed  of  n'iiip  3  fern.  sing.  pret. ,  whose  termination  becomes  r 
before  suffixes,  and  n  suffix  of  3  fem.  sing.,  and  is  equivalent  to   nrk  nb'::p  . 

Analyze  and  translate  : — 

.DDbt:p    ,lbD]?    ,Tj^cpp 

,  inSup   ,ninbt2p  ,  ^mSnp  ,  isnte  ,-j-i^i:p  ,  anS-op  ,nn'3t2p 

.  ^nnVjp   ,  finbap  ^  ^snb-uip   ,  tfnbup 

^.  The  rest  of  the  Kal  Preterite. 

.    Analyze  and  translate  : — 

,  ?T^bt3p    ,  DibDp    ,  ■'Sibup    ,  ^nb-jp     ,  "j^btip    ,  n^b-^p     ,  ^n^bup 

.  ni:bpp 

,  Dinbwp   ,  (2)    D^nbt:p   ,  ?]^rbi:p   ,  i:^nbt3p  ,  'iD^nb-op  ,  ipbt:p 
,(2)  "j^nb-op   ,(2)  i^ribtop    ,  ■':^nbt:p   ,i3^nbpp   ,  ^'pnbtjp    ,DnbiDp 
,n^nVt:p,    ^nnb-jp    ,:^ribDp    ,^3nbi:p  ,  lijbup    jinbup  ,  ^f^rib-jp 
.  "ji^pbt^p  ,  Di^nbL:p   ^(2)  *in^n^;:p,    (2)  niribt:p   ,  ^nwb-op 

.  ^;nnpb  ,  inns  ,  'n^^'^;'  ,  ^'t);*  ,  nVitcn;'  ,  ''?n';i'aT» 

*  This  form  belongs  to  the  first  person  of  the  preterite  as  well  as  to  the  second 
feminine,  although  for  the  sake  of  brevity  it  is  not  repeated  in  the  paradigm. 

c.  The  Piel  and  Hiphil  Preterites. 

RejMark  14.  When  a  verb  is  doubly  transitive,  eithei 
object  if  a  pronoun  may  be  suffixed  to  the  verb,  thus 
i^ippn  means  either  he  caused  him  to  Jcill  or  he  cmtsed 
to  hill  him;  niris  ornrabn  tlicm  hast  caused  them  to  put 
on  tunics,  but  ijybij-nx  Dnirsbn  thou  hast  caused  Sleaza/) 
to  put  them  on. 


L-ESS0N3    IN    READING    IlEBKEW.  1  19 

Analyze  and  translate  : — 

,  ^nS-'ppn    ,  (2)  vn^t^Rn    ,  tji'ivjipn    ,  nwb-jpn    ,  ^p^^tspn 
,Snbi:jpn  ,  (2)  n-'n^^pn  ,  nnS-^iipn  ,  ■nibb-jpn  jini'^'irpn 

]5^nbDp  ,  nnbop  ,  opbap  ,  ninbrfp  ,  D^ibisp  ,  'jinbap  ,  ^:bKp 

.  (2)  D''Pb°t?p  ,  n^bi^p 

^3 nap  ,  ^?ni?3    .  I'l^'ss    ,  T^-hs?    ,  ^3^155    ,  ■^nib^a    ,  irib-ji 
.  in^acn   ,  Tj^rnlJ'npn  ,  -mir^p  ,  "in^^p   ,  Q??^^!Ip   ,  ~J?5f^'  ,  c^^b5■r 
.  tfrisrn  ,  Dr^aisn  ,  (2)  vnion  ,  TjipiDn 

PS  pn  onb  nDD^i    :  nab  ib  ^   ^s^n-a   rnnpb^   csn  nx  i^b  "j^s 
^p"iin  "iTTx   bbs   ^^t^-iQi^'^  ^^:?  ^ssx  r^lr}     i  !jb/2n  ib-^a  "iffii<:'"^b3 
a-iinb^  a'^i??  fnni  i2J3b;>  n^"tran   :  ^bsiiJT    r.;^ni    ai^n   ^pn'j-ij   ;  rfb 
i^nmbn   j  n^n^an  "^"iL^^abn  ;  iiTvp")  H^T^T'^?  1^3i  cin  ]^  npbi 
"ijix  nna'i  tiDsd  ^  ?]b  anb^inn  nrix  :  ^nnj^ia-iri  rrjonbizn  ;  nsn^n 

'    K>  himself,  there  being  no  reflexive  pronouns  in  Hebrew,  the  personal  pro- 
aouns  may  be  used  with  a  reflexive  sense. 

^  Used  adverbially,  hm.  ^    See  §  30.  3.  *  §  See  23.  3. 


12.     Futures,  etc.,  of  Perfect  Verbs  with  Suffixes, 

§  4? 
a.  Kal  Future. 

Kemark  15.  Those  forms  in  the  Kal  future  6  wliich 
end  with  the  last  radical  follow  the  analogy  of  bbp"] . 

In  the  Kal  future  and  imperative  a  the  vowel  of  the 
second  radical  is  not  liable  to  rejection,  but  is  lengthened 
to  Kamets  before  all  the  suffixes  excej)t  the  2  pers.  plur. 
where  Pattahh  is  retained,  e.  g.  ''?r?bTr>'';'  not  ^"-h^^l  from 
rhji)^. ,  and  "^inbc  from  nbio . 

16.  Those  forms  in  the  various  futures  and  imperatives 
which  have  personal  endings  undergo  no  change  before 
suflfixes,  except  in  the  fem.  plur,  as  stated  in  §  42.  2. 


120  LESSONS   IN    READING    IFEBEEW. 

Analyze  and  translate  : — 

(2)  ^?l?'opn  ,  (2)  n^"9pi?  ,^T'^^^  ,('i)^-?9)?^  ,  °.'?"^)??  ,^''''";?vP^ 
.  ■^^Sippn  ,  (3)  ^m'iippr}^  , ''P^iJtfipri  ,  n^^ifip:'   ,  ^?^^'9P?  ,  \'^''9P^ 

'  See  §  42.  2. 

~nsi  i^uJ^Gn-ns*  t"np^T  :  ^1212  ■'D?:^;'  b«b  ''3  tjb-bn-bs  Syrian 
n-^tsirn  njn'-nps  :  ny^p!']  "''?V^''2  tDsn;ii  ;  □n'ro;'i  n^TTsn 
^^'•5  ■^pis'i  pjnirn  nb«"D5    m3    tcs    b^s-n    htkn   n^-cnn    :  ob-^S'b 

:pii5i2'i3  ntj'^n-  trbian-bi*  nnbiEi'^T  ^s'JJ^'i  S^P^T^s^rii?  f^p^   '  n^"^35 

'   Translate  the  future  with  vav  conversive  in  these  and  subsequent  exercises 
is  though  a  preterite  preceded. 
*  See  Remark  8. 

I).  Piel  and  Hiphil  Futures. 

Remaek  17.  In  those  forms  of  the  Piel  future^  which 
end  with  the  last  radical,  Tsere  is  shortened  or  rejected 
before  suffixes  as  in  the  3  masc.  sing,  of  the  Piel  preterite. 

18.  Tsere  in  the  Hiphil  apocopated  future,  future  with 
Vav  Conversive,  and  imperative  becomes  Hhirik  bef(3i'e 
suffixes,  e.  g.  Jint''ri"bN  destroy  not^  •mn'^nti'n-bj!?  destroy  liim 
(or  i()  not. 

Analyze  and  translate  : — 

,  libDpi?    ,  ibtpp;'    ,  ^i-^itppn    ,  ',s^%p^    ,  (2)  Q!?rfpP    ,  °^^^p3 

.  O^'^'PP^*  7  ''?^'="'2p^  ,  ^Y'^:?i  ,  (4)  ^ab'^'opn  ,  (3)  aibippr? 
rdy%,    ^'^iTTT'^^.    ^ri^^H"}   ^^ir'sb^   hdd^x   rpnrn-ns    "^ritptps 
^nsbns    ni::n    ^d:s   nicy    :  nyma    nin^    ^<jr^i^    ^^^r?    !CD3^N 


LESSUJSy    iJN     KEADING    HEBREW.  121 

iDsb  T?2iy';  niTK    nnsn-ns?    n^tr^'":  s'si    "f^'nii;:    sb    nin^  n^m 
:V-isn-bDn   ^nb^Tij^am   ^rnsyn   mm    ninni    ^instn  -^s   tu'-x-ht: 

1  V    IT    T  T  ■•        •      :         :  ..         ^     .  T     r  :  t  ;  ■.■;:•  •  v:  -I 

<?.  Infinitive  and  Imperative. 

Eemaek  19.  The  suffix  of  the  1  pers.  sing,  is  i>ttached 
to  the  infinitive  in  two  forms,  "^ ,  expressing  the  subject 
of  the  verb  ''^ipj?  my  hilling  and  ''S  its  object  ''?'?^j5  to  hill 
me.  The  remaining  persons  have  but  one  form,  which  is 
used  indifferently  for  the  subject  or  the  object,  ^bt:]?  tliy 
hilling  or  to  hill  tliee^  ^f'^tpjpn  thy  causing  to  hill^  to  cause 
thee  to  hill  or  to  cause  to  hill  thee. 

Analyze  and  translate  : — 

,  ^i^aj?  ,  ^n^tOR  , ''J^i?  ,f^?9)?  ,(2)^i?t3^  ,Q^t2j5  ,o5tJ!?  ,o6bt:5p 
.  ^r^^p  ,  ^rv^-^V.  ,  '\^  ,  ^'r^i?  ,  ^'='91?  ,  0^'^P  ,  1>'9)?    ,  (2)  -^sb^p 

,a^%p    ,Q^tfi?   ,c^t?p    ,0=?'?^?    ,^:^%i?    ,f^^'^)?    ,(2) ''btPj?! 
''nib-it?]5n  ,  cib^tp^n   ,  (2)  ^py^ujpn   ,mb'Lpj?   ,nbD]5   ,  (2)  ^3?tp]: 

'  Of  the  two  forms  here  represented  one  has  a  suffix,  the  other  has  not. 

2  Notice  the  position  of  the  accent. 

.(2)''ri>T»  ^^'h^V  ,^nr^  j''?rj^^  jOt?^^  ,^i^s?  ,'''^'2S  ,''i^K 
,(2)'^3n^ffi  ,'^.n!p;c  ,00?'??  j^OV*?  ,(2Jisn^T»  ,^?nbT2?  ,(2)  ^:nbc 

:t       /  t:t       7      ':t:       7         ":t       7         T:r 

Kemark  20.  The  copulative  i  is  sometimes  employed  in 
Hebrew  to  connect  an  action  with  the  time  of  its  occur- 
rence, where  no  connective  is  required  in  English.  In 
such  cases  we  may  use  tJien  as  its  equivalent  or  better 
still  leave  it  untranslated.     Thus  in  my  gathering  Israel 

6 


122  LESSONS   IN    READING  HEBREW 

an  ''rna''ijppi  tlien  shall  I  he  sanctljied  in  tliem  or  when  1 
gather  Israel^  I  shall.,  etc.,  §  89.  2  (2). 

■•Dsb    n^tppnb    iffi'^'ipnb    pnai  b'l^^i     :  'nij^pb  inb5  mri?^']  ;  nia 

:  nin""' 

'  The  initial  aspirate  has  Daghesh-Iene  as  though  the  preceding  word  weiH 
■"SSs  §  23.  3. 

^  The  accent  would  be  thrown  upon  the  ultimate  by  Vav  Conversive,  §  17.  6, 
but  for  the  Mlowing  monosyllable,  §  18. 


13.  Gender  and  Number  of  Nouns,  §§  43-45. 

Remark  21.  Attributive  or  qualifying  adjectives  fol- 
low the  noun  to  wliicli  they  belong,  and  agree  with  it  not 
only  in  gender  and  number  but  also  in  definiteness,  that 
is  to  say,  they  receive  the  article  if  the  noun  is  definite, 

r\fn^  "jn^  a  great  stone,  !^^'i'^5t^  insn  the  great  stone,  §  70.  2. 

22.  When  a  demonstrative  and  an  adjective  qualify 
the  same  noun  the  demonstrative  stands  last  tiib^an  nhs^r 
n^n  these  great  signs,  §  71.  2. 

23.  Predicate  adjectives  do  not  receive  the  article  even 
thougli  the  noun  is  definite ;  their  usual  place  is  before 
tlie  noun,  but  they  may  also  stand  after  it  l^s^n  ribiia  or 
nbii5  inxn  the  stone  is  great,  §  70.  3. 

24.  Comparison  is  expressed  by  the  prejx^sition  yo 
§  72.  1,  ^^^  "^W^^  '^^y^'^.,  thy  sister  young  from  tliee,  i.  e. 
younger  than  thou;  ^i3T2  b-nsi?  I  luill  he  greater  than  thou 

nsni  JDibi^a  Q''3bi3^  D'la'i  d:'':^  !n©^n  fnxi^  nr^w^n  w^^t 
riizisn  n^pxnn  jms'^n  n^bi?  :nx5n-b?  nb^^i  inxni  n'lm   "ik:^ 


LESSONS    IN    HEADING     HEBREW.  128 

on^^y    r^^n   "?'^^?-    iJ^sJTn   nbiT.?in   wnri-bs    ns   r^'h'J-'   nin- 
"!■'?  5^^  ir?2  5^^^?  "^T?^.    nnian   fnjjri   ;  n^-'affin-jia  nib^3  D^DnSi 

!^2?n-!'J3  nbix'^  tJ^ni  liirn.^  nbi^a 

'  Vowel  of  the  noiin  assimilated  to  the  preceding  Kamets  as  after  the  article, 
g  35.  3.  a. 
*   U2)on  what  ground,  i.  e.  for  wJiat  reason,  wliy. 
'   Jl'port,  us  or  against  its. 


14.  The  Construct  State,  §§  46,  47. 

Remark  25.  Nouns  in  the  construct  before  a  definite 
aoim  (including  proper  nouns)  are  themselves  definite, 
§  fi9.  1,  oip^  a'place^  but  lin^n  Dipia  the  ]}lace  of  the  m-h; 
n'in^  linx  the  arh  (not  an  arlv)  of  Jehovah. 

26.  Nouns  in  the  construct  state  do  not  i-eceive  the 
article;  they  are  rendered  definite  by  prefixing  the  article 
to  the  governed  noun,  §  75.  5,  D'^rn'b^  UJ^^  a.  man  of  God^ 
D^nb^n  12^55  the  man  of  God. 

'21.  Adjectives  or  demonstratives  qualifying  a  noun  in 
the  construct  state  do  not  follow  it  immediately,  but  are 
placed  after  the  governed  noun,  §  75.  4,  bii.^n  n'jn^  oi^ 
snisnn  the  great  and  dreadful  day  of  Jehovah. 

28.  When  the  subject  consists  of  two  or  more  nouns  in 
the  singular  connected  by  the  conjunction  and,  the  predi- 
cate is  commonly  put  in  the  singular  if  it  precedes  tlie 
subject,  and  in  the  plural  if  it  f.  Hows,  §  86. 

n^n  ^b3  bb  ?  n^'n;'  trnii  -ji^i*  :  bijnii?^  •^n'bs  "jinx  ;  D^^n^nsn  ^sps 
•laip^  n^iaT^'H  ninib  "jn  in^isir^)  ^npi^  :  DT^pni  D^bnsn  D^n'bxn 

Ti^bn  b^'y.'^^    5"in>5n   nsy^  nn  D3?-by  ^snsb^n  r.ns?  ;nY©n  r^»^ 

I   ..    V     -  -  :    •  -  I     v    ,T    r  -  -:  .-  -  -  -  ■-:-:•  r    -         ^  V     T  - 


124  LESSONS    IN    READING    HEBREW. 

■'"o^a^  bbta'prt"?  ^^"^Ti}.  "^sns^  nD3S5  nii:  sbn  iDiis  •t]!'??  ^^a  Dnii^ 

■i-ip  n;^x  23.  1. 
'  The  construct  of  Z^'O  ,  a  reduplication  of  the  more  usual  form  "^n 


15.  Nouns  with  Suffixes,  §  49. 

Kemaek  29.  The  pi-epositions  'irtx  qfte?^  "bx  to,  ^? 
fq)on  and  a  few  others  take  the  suffixes  beloiigiug  to 
plural  nouns,  §  G6.  2,  e.  g.  *'"in^?  not  '''it:i5$  tifter  me, 

30.  The  article  before  Di"^  day  limits  it  to  the  present, 
that  which  is  now  passing,  Di*^n  to-day,  §  68.  3. 

-rj^  on^ris'i   Dn'^ri''p5?-rK  ens?  rrt-i-^  onx  irx  n-i^n  Dir'-^njy 

cp^i^i  y"iy;n-b3  1\y^'2  oi^n  tjbin  ^pbij  nsr-n  .;  i^^r.n  aipTsn-i^a  d^c- 
Q-i^rjn  cnn^n  biD^a  "ins  "in-n  bss  iib  -^s  DDirsD-bon^  osnnb-bss 

'  i'-ottS  may  take  a  direct  object,  or  as  in  this  instance  be  followed  by  3 
«  See  Lesson  4,  note  1 ;  also  §  39.  3.  *  §  30.  3, 

*  The  3  plux.  suf .  with  f  em.  plur.  noiins  may  be  either  D     or  Dtl"^ 
'  Upon  the  subject  of,  concerning. 

16.  Pe   Guttural  Verbs,  §  53. 

Translate  and  give  the  corresi)onding  forms  of  the  per- 
fect ver1)  b-bp  : — 

,  TIO^  5  (2)  "5^2?  ,  nbys  ,  n^3?D  ,  ^wn  ,(2)  "iwr^   ,  dpidjj. 


LESSONS    IN    BEADING    IIEBUEW.  125 

Kemark  31.  When  tlie  subject  consists  of  two  nouns  in 
the  relation  of  the  construct  state,  the  predicate  commonly 
agrees  with  the  first  as  the  principal  noun ;  but  it  ma\ 
agree  with  tlie  second  if  this  conveys  the  main  idea.  The 
lattei'  is  almost  always  the  case  when  the  first  noun  is 
3i  ^  e.  g.  Dti'sn-bD  ^ssn.';'  all  the  waters  shall  he  turned. 

32.  If  a  predicate  refers  to  two  words  of  different 
persons  it  will  be  put  in  the  second  in  preference  to  thp 
third,  and  in  the  first  in  preference  to  either  of  the  others 
§  86.  3. 

33.  Nouns  are  sometimes  put  in  the  construct  state 
before  a  following  clause,  §  75.  3,  as  nr«  Dip'a  the  place 
which  or  where^  etc. 

nh?;  "^n^ni  ^sbij     :  nib  D^'isn-bD  iDsn-^T     :  D'^b  nn;'ni  i\vrh  tfiprij 

Dipi22  anb  bd^  sib  !|bi2n-b«  a^nb^itn-ii'is?  "i^i«^]  :  I^T'"^^  ^b3«^_i 
onb  -T)2S;i-nTp^  aipm  '.Tji-bs  -^'q  nin^  nnissin  ^nii^i'i^-bs  :Hin 
ND  I'as^"'  ^  bi^nf  "i  "^n'bi?   nn:>i    :  "^n-bs?  132  nnb  iiaiS'i  nns?  ■^n^'-sb 

T  J    -•     r  •  ••    T      :    •  ■-■.■'  T    -   :  IT  ..  ..     :  ...  T  •■     T  "  V     -  •     - 


'  The  future  followed  by  X3  has  the  force  of  a  petition  or  request. 
'  State  the  form  and  meaning  of  both  the  K'ri  and  K'thibh,  aud  which  reading 
yields  the  more  exact  grammatical  agreement. 


17.  Ayin  Guttueal  Verbs,  §  54. 

T]*anslate  and  give  the  corresponding  forms  of  ba]?  :- 

^^bii!5:    ,^bs5;'   ^^b^y^  ^^"i^!^^  ,''^^5    ,^bi53    ,^bi?a   ,(2)  ^bxa 
,?f>s{a    ,^;b^a   ,nribj^a  ,^b:^iip\  ,bi?bD    ,(x,)bx3nn  ,  ribs?:!  ,ibKii 

••ws?  •'D13    ?Tib  inb  ^^n'bi«  nin*'  tb&5  fnxn  nin;»  qp'in''  "^jns 
?p3n3)3  nDins|!i  t^^hj  nb'iiKn  ^p'^i^i?^  :  i^b^'arbD  ''n^irn-^x  in^^n^-ns' 


j20  LESSONS    IN"    READIIsrCr    HEBREW. 

"ns5  nnL:^.!  Di:nipn  ^nna^i     j  i^bs-bs-ns?^  nnrian-ri?)  nin^  n^3 

;nTO  fm  ?]^bs  TQSj    :ci;n 


18.  Lamedh  Guttural  Verbs,  §  55. 

Translate  and  give  the  corresponding  forms  of  bp]? : — 

n?'i^ri  ,r|-'bia:>  ,n|ttj  ,n^T??  jif^'^'i^'s  ,n?ps  ,nbiri'  ,n'bTr  ,  nnb© 

.  anbiij;'  ,  ^;rhvJ_  ,  ^?nb©  ,  'r^nbtj  ,  n|ni!iT3  ,  nb©: 

Remark  34.  Nouns  in  the  dual  have  verl)s,  adjectives, 
and  pronouns  agreeing  with  them  in  the  plural,  §  85.  7. 

nair  5^5^n-bN   '.  ^s^nrnx  ynr  np'ia   ibpsb  nnb"!  yn^rb  nt  "jn? 

!  ^?bs  ^snba?'  nin^  13  p\?n;>     :  o^sb  liD-ma  y'li^"'^)?  ;  Q^'n-b3-n« 

7^i2s?'i  by^   T]^ns^-nx   np'b  nin^   oi^n   ^p    ns'Tn   i^bs  ^n-asip. 

srbs  JtfbTsn  n^s-bs  npbp    innbis   ^niJ    iT^yi;'  "^px  oa  n^s*i 

niabb  0^:257-   ^Dbn   tjibn     :ib5^  ^"i^ps  ^3p  ^3  ^bx  tf'bn^  s^sisn 

D"'">^3>  ^r?  npnjbsn-   ts   ns^b:^   roib^a  n^^-ib  ^nia^'^i  tfb^s  cn^^^; 
□333b  iy-ij5  !  ^1^  n^sia  n3b)3^n-nx  ynps  ;  n:nnsn  n^Tinn'^  "istx'-, 

!  D3'i'1.^3-bs»' 

-  The  plural  of  "|i"iX  is  often  used,  as  it  is  here,  in  a  singular  sense, 
^  np^  is  applied  specifically  to  opening  the  eyes  ;  nPS   is  the  general  term  foi 
spening,  and  is  applied  to  anything  whatever. 
•  lann  is  for  lU'nn  and  consequently  does  not  lose  its  Tsere  in  the  plural. 


19.  Pe  Nun  Verbs,  §  56. 
Translate  and  give  the  corresponding  forms  of  bb]?  . 
,tt)33   ,1275  ,nD»ai^  ,rnjia3  ,to|3   ,^t&a  ,n^^    ,(2)  to??  ,^^M 


LESSONS    IN    READING    HEBREW.  127 

.  TCa^   ,  Ti?ax  ,  ^on  ,  w'^'^^   ,  nrnr^in  ,  TC^aia  ,  (2)  mr\   ,  tZ-'as 
,  (2)  I'lPTiJan  j^nir^n  ,  Dim^^n  ,  D^izj'^^n   , '^:w-5n   ,  rr\  ,  nn: 

Remark  35.  Tlie  relative  is  often  omitted  as  in  EnglisL 
rr'V?^,'!]  T^5'7  honey  I  gave  thee -to  eat  for  honey  toldch  I 
gave^  etc,  §  88.  3. 

nri?T   ji2i«-nN^   ii^5>-nsi  i^?"ns^  ^yn  rfb^-rx  T|'-t^-;s  ^nns 

-  :  •    T  J;  IT    -    ••  •  *  •    AT     •  '     :  -  t  *-  T        ; 

bn^i    fuSjp  nn'i  i^s   nn^3n-i?b    j  nn-^psb   ^n^nnpi   ^^nb^^n  i:o-]^ 

lb  r^inb?  n;5«T  i?in  \-ini«   nnias  n^ab  &5nn    ^nirs-  ^d  ^b  m^n-s'b 
iijnn  n^sv^s  nin^  1^3  xrnbsp  :  ^^nn  ^b— ian-i«b  nsriT   :  n^sb 

:  nbsi<-bs  D^N  ^;:n^ 

'  n^Q  preceded  by  b  is  pointed  nr^  before  a  guttural  and  njsB  before  other 
joupouants. 

*  The  construct  of  nit'X  is  nttJN  which,  before  suffixes,  becomes  "'htJK  etc. 
See  §  50. 

20,  A  YIN  Doubled  Verbs,  §  57. 

It  is  not  easy  to  distinguish  accurately  the  significations  of  the  different  specieg 
of  -20  .  For  the  present  the  usual  sense  of  the  passive  and  causative  species 
may  be  retained,  the  Piel  may  be  rendered  to  surround  entirely^  and  even  the 
tmmeaning  siiiTmind  one's  eelf  may  be  tolerated  in  the  Hithpael,  which  is  net  in 
actual  use. 

Translate  and  give  the  corresponding  Irims  f>f  bi:^ : 

.  (2)  labn  ,  13130  ,  HD-iiio  ,  nao  ,  isb  ,  lab  ,  (p>)2b  ,  no  ,  niao 
,  i:iaD3  ,  i3S^  ,  isn  ,  nen  352  ,  362  ,  303  ,  36;  ,  ^36r.  ,  ^?Dn 
.  insDi  ,(2)  1230^  •'DSiD^  ,  n'33c  ,  ?n33o  ,  "is^iho  ,n3D: 

■.•-.:      7   >.        /  ■••-.,:  ■•■•.:      7  t    :       "  -..   t    :       7       ■  -  t   —  t 

lapn  ,  i36n  ,  iss;!  ,  36)3  ,  nispn  ,  isiipn  ,  "jniacn  ,  nacn 
ipiip;!  ,  ?fP3p;i  ,3ii^'nip3  ,  i33iD  ,  36in  ,  3pii?  ,  36s  ,  (2)  n:^5pr;i 

.  Dap;>  ,  nn3b;'  ,  ^33bn  ,(2)  is?^^* 


l28  LESSONS   IN    KEADING    HEBREW. 

Remark  36.  Singular  predicates  and  pronouns  arc 
sometimes  employed  in  a  distributive  sense  of  plural 
subjects,  §  85.  6,  ^'I'l^  ^■^?t!5''9  hlessed  is  every  one  of  t]ios6 
hlessinrj  tltee. 

37.  The  conjunction  'i  may  be  used  to  introduce  the 
apodosis  or  second  member  of  a  conditional  sentence, 
§  89.  1,  if  thou  loilt  not,  etc.,  ^p^']'}  then  shall  cleave  to 
thee^  etc. 

-bs-ni?  "ibiijb  Ti^nbi?  r.jn;i  bipa  s^^tn  s<b-c5?  :  S5^n  ^^,nn  ^3 
nnx  -111^1  T^3  nns  n^ns?  :nb&^n  nibbpn-bs  r^i  ^pnni  i^nisr 
nin^-b:^  bi5  :  nns^^n  i.s-bs;5  nibi5  a^3n«  ^bii  '^'9i<''^n  :  rniss 
ninsT^a  nj^  ^sin:'^^  ciffiisn-i'a  nnin^-nx  inDb  bnn  ;  risn-q 
!  D^nin3Tp~by  qnia  D^;ro  ni^s?i  pin^  ^  naiij  Dinirsni  D^byan 
bisn  bisD  i^ssb  bsDb  nibnn  nt^x  ■'?'=t'^^  n''"i^n^n  v^k-q  d« 
ibi^nuj^-bs  "^p^?:!  ^jb-ia  bns  n-in  oi^n  :™b 

">   "iT"!  2.  e.  Yodh  superfluous  ;  accordinj,''  to  the  Masoretic  direction,  there- 
fore, it  is  to  be  neglected  in  reading  the  -word. 

'  "With  Pattahh  in  the  ultimate  in  place  of  Tsere. 

21.  Pe  Yodii  Verbs,  §  58. 
Translate  and  give  the  corresponding  forms  of  bM]5  : 

.  "^I^n^ii'ln  jC-ii^i^'v  j^n^t^i'i^  ,D3M« 

Remark  38.  The  interrogative  n  is  employed  in  simph^ 
direct  questions,  n;^nsn  shall  Hive?  in  indirect  questions 
Di?  is  mc  3  usual;  inquire  '^'J^}'^  0«  whether' I  shall  live. 

39.  In  a  disjunctive  question,  direct  or  indirect,  the 
first  member  is  introduced  by  n  and  the  second  ])y  055 , 
e.  g.,  «b-D«  r^ryS-TQ  nm^nn  tniU  thou  lieep  (or  in  dependt  uc^ 


LESSONS    IN    READING   IIEBIIEW.  129 

on  a  previous  verb,  [to  hww^  whether  thou  wilt  heep) 
his  commandments  or  not  ? 

xb  :yij^n-bD2  ^:b3  ]"^i?  "'S  >nn   iiisjti^  n^3    b:?    nin^  nni-'^'irsi! 
r\\kT]    Di^i^n-bs-nK    nin^    r'^ninT    t  orobn^-bis    ^Db)^i    0"^^?:^ 

'  Pret.  with  Vav  Conversive.  «  §  52.  1.  «  §  50.  3.  *  §  48.  1. 

22.  Ayin  -Vav  and  Ayin  Yodh  Verbs,  §  59. 

The  Piel  of  D'lp  means  to  raise  :  the  Niphal,  which  is  not  in  use,  may  in  this 
exercise  be  rendered  to  be  risen. 

Translate  and  give  tlie  corresponding  forms  of  bi:]?  : 

,  i^ip7  ,  Dniaip:  ,  (2)  np^^ipn  ,  iD^ap  ,  n:^p  ,  (2)  a^p  ,  (2)  op 
,  (3)  TO^ip  ,  i;i'a^p2   ,  niaipD   ,  n-aip:   ,  pipD    ,  (2 )  Dip3   ,  TOip^ 
,  ■^'c^p  ,  'i^^p  ,  D^ip^  ,  (2)  n:^iaipn  ,(2)  nj^ripn  ,  (2)  QP^^'ip 

.  T]^^p  ,  i'b^p  ,  ^'ia^p 

n^px  ,  D^pia  ,  HD^pn  ,  '^rii'ib^pn  ,  n^v  ,  D'^p;'  ,  ^^^pn  ,  ^"a^pn 
,inwpn  ,  (2)  ^n^"i   ,  (3)  n^n   ,  ^i^^^^'  ,  '^niii^n   ,  ^nn   ,  Dibipn^i 

.(2)  ^2^^p;«  ,  O^^P?  j'^^^T'? 

Kemark  40.  When  the  predicate  precedes  its  subject, 
it  sometimes  prefers  a  primary  to  a  secondary  form,  that 
is  to  say,  it  may  be  put  in  the  masculine  instead  of  the 
feminine  and  in  the  singular  instead  of  the  plural,  §  55. 1. 

41.  The  conjunction  ")  may  be  emphatically  used  be- 
tween a  noun  placed  absolutely  and  the  clause  to  which 
it  relates  §  89.  2,  ths  hlessiiuj  risns^  it  shall  even  hi 
given,  etc. 

e* 


130  LESSONS    IN    READING    HEBREW. 

42.  A  present  action  conceived  of  as  imfiuislied  and 
coDtinuing  in  the  future  is  expressed  by  the  future  tense, 
§  78.  2,  sinn  '^"^k'o  whence  art  tliou  coming  ?  the  action 
being  regarded  as  still  continuing,  whereas  in  Dns2  'j^'X'a 
xolience  liave  you  come  f  the  action  is  viewed  as  at  an  end. 

-^'h  =T^"^  °)?t^  '  '^^'"'^^  "^^^  ^^^""^ '  ^^i?o  '^''^^  =1"^"^'  ^^^'^  ^^ 

^^Fnnti.'^  ?j/3J?  i2:s5  nin  nonis'ipb  npni^n  tj^ni:^^^  Pii?  ri'aip^b 

TCN3  "in'bs:  ^^n'bsi  ^j^y  tjiay  i^b«  "^pbH  nrsJsni  tjbs  ^^br)-iy;<x^ 
ronsn  -n^T  tsisn  fi^i^Ta^  ^bn  rojj  '"^^i^i?  dt?t  r,it!S  ^n-rap 
''b;^"^,a   D^DbnnTsn   D^n^sb   nzrOT   ^D^sb   ^innsis  sinn  nirs  r^i-n 

1  §  50.  1. 

'^  Supply  the  noun  ' '  place  "  as  the  antecedent  of  the  relative,  which  is  itseli 
governed  by  a  preposition  not  exiDressed.  Complete  the  Hebrew  sentence  by 
supplying  the  elliiDsis  in  both  cases.     See  §  30.  3. 


23.  Lamedh  Aleph  Verbs,  §  60. 

The  Piel  of  ^fa  may  for  the  sake  of  distinction  be  rendered  to  find  out. 

Translate  and  give  the  corresponding  forms  of  bp]?  : — 
,  nxijpn   ,  ns^^   ,  (8)  si^D  ,  onxa^s  ,  (2)  npsi^n  ,  s?sia^ 
.  '7\^:rQ^  ,  'inss^si*  ,  riD^j^TQ  ,  r.^ka  ,  (2)  !^:5<i^n  ,  (2)  n^xi^n 

Remark  43.  The  verl)  xb^  takes  a  direct  object  in  the 
fCal  to  he  full  r>/' anything,  and  in  the  Niphil  to  hefilkd 
with  anything ;  in  the  Piel  to  fill  something  loith  some 
thing,  it  may  have  two  objects. 

snp  c^p    ^^yyit'^^   tjb^i   nop   n^ir  "insnp-s'b  tq^'^t  ^'j)  n^^^p'^a 
!  xnti   ■'b   ^i^'np   "iTays   ^b   njs'^pn-bx   -jnibs   Taiini     ;  T|in'bK-bs 


LESSONS   IN    READING    HEBREW.  131 

nci?   n|in^  ■'3i5     iD^ian-nsj?  fnsn  ^hm\  oi'i^,  tyrn);  o^&in  o:'"ii3 

'   See  §  18. 

24.  Lamedh  He  Verbs,  §  61. 

nbs  in  Kal  means  to  reveal,  i.  e.  to  uncover  a  secret,  in  Piel  to  uncover,  iu 
Hiphil  to  exile,  i.  e.  to  nncover  or  strip  a  land  of  its  inhabitants,  m.  Hithpael  to 
uncover  one's  self. 

Translate  and  give  the  corresponding  forms  of  bb]? : — 

,  ''^^n  ,  nb;\D  ,  (2 )  nin?  ,  mba   ,  ^^b|   ,  ^rSa    ,  nnba  ,  ^b|i  ,  iba 
,nby/2    ,nbs^    ^^%T\    ,n^b5    ,'^b5    ,  ^^a   ,^Sa    ,rirb'5    ,  Dn^b.n5 
,nb>^  ,Dba^   ,DMn   ,  nVani    ,  nb'siS^    ,nbH::    ,i^^).^n   ,  (2)  nbsn 

Ti^bsbD^  bib  Q^'aTSn  '^'am  D^'a-ffin  nin  p^n-b:?  a''r^"bi5  nr.-^  Qp^s^ri 
rr^n-ni^,  m'Dnb  nb"buj  nibDD  ti^'I  :  ^n-^23  iirj!?  n-tn  n^in-^3  qs? 
]i^T  i  "i'rn.^ia  vbi5  nijn?  "nri?D  n^piO  nb'bis-b^  nin^  &?n^i^  nin;' 
v.n  &5b  ais  ni^i^-nirii  n^isn  :  niby  b?h  nin^b  nst^  ^i^  u^ 
n;i2  T^jsit-bs  ni?  ^,iu?;:  :  bi^piab  ^tp,  t\w^,  t  n^n  ni-a  ^3  ~  nsiaia 
ipbOT^a  nnt^yp  niiji??  c^iai^n-bs  nnn  "ntjwf  xb  :nin*' 

'  See  Remark  20,  Lesson  12. 

^  "^3  for  ;  or  it  may  be  translated  hut,  to  which  it  is  often  equivalent  after  a 
negative. 

^  The  feminine  in  the  sense  of  the  neuter. 


25.  Numerals,  §  65. 

Remark  44.  In  stating  •  dates  cardinal  numbers  are 
commonly  used  for  the  year  and  day,  and  ordinals  for  the 
month. 

45.  The  age  of  persons  is  idiomatically  expressed  by 
the  words  I?  son  or  tl^  daughter  prefixed  to  the  term  oi 


132  LESSONS    nr    READING    HEBREW 

fcheii  life,  tlius  n:^  nsbio-ja  sori  of  eiglit  years  i.  e.  eighi 
years  old. 

See  also  the  rules  in  §  73. 

n;?3-ix   '.n^irss  U'^bt    tiD^i?  D'^i^^n    jO'^Dn  miiij   :n'i'p;i  niij'b® 

-■ja  ;n:ir  o^y^sn-na  jd"'^^  n^bic-jn  'U^'Tll  °??^  '^':\'^.  s^''?^ 
:ni!-ip3  n5N^  m2"5T2j  ninbn  '^rnri  s^n  nobijin  nin  roiij  D''U)'bii 
D'^pi'QiC^  n^n©'  '.ni^Nn  D'^sn&itn  rr\iiiv  D'^nuj'  sDiirpi?  "lir^  q'i:tp 
:D^nN^^  D^y^TpT  ms"bp  t]bx  D^nwn  q^'dte  ;n2Tr  nixia  ya-n  nstc 
ny3-i^-3  y2"is  n:t;a  !t)'"inb  nnj^  oi^a  iirijjn  T3'"Tn3  Q^niiJ  nira 
n-i^iffinn  natra  tiainb  n-i^^nn  "'S^^nna  hits  D-'iiJ'birJa  !"^3?i^pn  irinb 

!blpT2?n-n^ffi'ibT2J    jai^'n  n^^-in"!  ininsb  n^TiD^^an  nnns^     !TiJ"7n  -',iS3> 

T      ••     T  •  -1 

'  Observe  the  distinction  between  tlie  predicate  and  tbe  attributive. 
«  §  65.  3.      . 


The  End  of  the  Deluge.     Genesis  8,  1-9. 

ins  "ym  nianan-bi-ns^   n^HO"^?  ^^^   ^2'^^   d^H''^^   "i^T"^ 
nb^'S'tt  ^ips^T     !  D^^'En   ^sto';«i  T"?^7"''?  ^'^'^  ^^C"^^^:  ^3?;i:}   nnws 

n:ni     :  Di-^  nx^^i  D^uJ^n  ni^pia  n^'bn  ^-lon^T  niw  tribn  rnsn  by^ 

-    <T  -  I  «-     ;  r       •      -■  .■  );       .  .       _     -  J     .       .    -_  AT  '      J     T        !      V     IT    T  ;-     - 

'D']^T^^  !  -onni*  ^y^  by  lunhb  Di|i  nTi;y-ny3Tca  ^i;^:?ti'n  TO'nha  nnpn 
■^irKn  ^i^-is  "iD""inb  ":ns3  ^"i^te  '''I'^ia??^  ic'inn  iy  'lion'i  tj^bn  rr 
:  rmi  iTr.s  nnnn  "jibn-ns  n'D  nps'';i  Di;^  Q"^5?3ns  f  j^^  ■^ni'T  :  Q^nriP 
J^^^^!!  '  T"l^\'  ^T^  °'?^n  '"^T??^;^"?  nifci  si^;*  xsr-j  nnirn-n«  nbta^T 
nss^-s'bi  '.riTi^ijin  ^'.^  hyq  Q-^'bn  ^bjn  nii^nb  ins^  n3i^n-ni« 
f"ii?n-bD  -"DB-by  0*13  ^3  nfinn-bs  ^bs  n"i?'m  !ib.n-i-aDb  ni5a  nsi^n 

TvMT         rj-:  -  •    V         r  ^    •■    -  t    ■•  t«t-  t:-        I-:        •         t  t 

J  nnnn-b55  "i^bjj?  fins?  sn^i  0^1?^-'  ^"^t  ^.V'?''!5 


^iWSSONS  IN    READING    HEBREVV.  Tf5,S 


The  Creation  and  Fall.    Genesis  J-o. 
CHAPTER  I.     N' 

»T :    IT         I     V    T    I  .  F     ••     T    T  I-  :  ■     V-    r     -  /••  *■  ji    I  «        ■•     . 

Ittfci^i  :  D^'isn  "i^B-b:^  nsnn'a  □''D^  H'^'^:'  c'r.n  "^js"':;:;  tjirni  ^r'n^  3 

^"^pnn-ps?  D^nbsir:?;;!  :  ^-^xh  u^'q  v|i  ''^'^^'o  '^n-^i  n-an  ^ina  y^j^n  7 

5  ^pTs  Q^>  ij^h-^n^n  nnj.~^r^i  a^^-^  :p^j:nb  c^sn'bs  snp^^  j  ')D-ti;'t  8 
nni5  D''|vT2-bx  c-.'^iEn  nnpTp  Q'isn  vj5^  d"'v'2!«  ""ck^t         b  9 

D'l^n  nnp'ob^  -jr-us-  ni^ii^ib  1  D'^nbx  snp^n  :  'j5"''n"';i  "'^i^.H  ^^ T'^nn  s 
f"nijn   ^'ir}7\    c^nbs    "i^b?^;;    :  S'lU-'S   a^n'bx    i^n^ji    Qiia^    xnip  ]  1 

in'i-'iab   3?it  y-'ira  nil?:?  i?T2JT   rnt^^n   N*i-r\i    :  p-in^i   V'^s^'^^■>5!' 12 

D^^-jb^  n-'i2?i^bi  nhb?b  ^^^ni  nb^bn  -j^ni  E">n  i-^a  b^^rnb  cr'tn 
:  ■i3""^n^i    n^'T^?   "^^^K^   D?''3i^n  ?^ip-i3   nT^'i^iT^b   ^-ni    :  d":il't  .is 
rbir^Tsb  b-an  Ti^^'sn-ns  D-^Vi.nn  rnb?72n   '^^o-^^;   C1n■b^^   ir^n  lu 
l"?^;}    !  n'''?3'^3n   ^^^"3    nbi^n    ribt:^)ab    fapr.    Tis'^r-nsn    ni^n  17 
nb;t3a^  nvz  bffl^bi   :  fnsn-b?  "i"'^0^  n^'Q^'r?  ^"'^iP'??  °^il'^^,  onb^  I8 

pir  E^isn  ^stlDi  D^h"b£5  n/2b^^i        &        j^s^'^nn  oi^  nph-n^i  » 

I     -•    u*  .      -    -  J    :     :  •  •  V       J  -  I*        •    :  /  ),-    .  •   :  r 

K'^n'^i    :  Di^isn   s^^pi  "^is-b:?    -r-isin-b^^    ?5':::>i    ti-i;?!    -'^n    tt:  21 

jT  :  •  -  •    IT    T    -  -     'i*   :  V   :  -  I     -.■    t    t  -  if  ;  I         :  ^T   -  '.'jv 

•  "  -  .     -    -  ...  .  :    .  :  J   :  *       ■■  »       ■.•:  >t  '  .•  »t  i  -    **  • 


I 


•'n:;-! 


''■^4  LESSONS    IN    KEAD1N(J    I  TEH  UK  VV. 

23 

fn§-in;'ni    ic^ani    n^na    n5^^b    n^^n  t'l::    f-iw^n   NS-^n   C'ri''-^ 

T  .  .   :  T        *   :  !    V    T    T  -  ■         v:  -J--  J,"  .   .  f.  AT       •    : 

26  I'aiJ^i   !  nrj-^s  D^nbs  n-*;:^  ^ro^'ab  M^^sn  rp^i-b  r.sJi   rnD^rb 

nnp:^    ^dt    ins    i{;ia    Q^n'bs:   obi^a   itbss    D'is^r-rx  .  D^n'bs 

28  in-i^    ^-13   n^n'bii   nnb   -",'aiih   o^n'^N   cri5   ^-in^^    :  oni?   s^a 

29  "  3W-b3-ns    Dsb   ^rinp   ri|n   a^n'bs   n^K^n    j  f  nj<n-b3>   nic'onn 
?^T  'r?"''"is  '^'s-nrs  i^s^n-bs-nsT  7^5<~-b3  "^^ss-b?  nirx  snr  yni 

^  I  bbb^  D':i'bi|n  q-y-b^b^  }n«i5   n^n-bsb^   s  nbsijb  n;;ri^^   CDb  y'lT 

CHAPTEE  11.      3 

2  sj  ''^^^T2Jn    Di;;a    Q^n"b«    bs^i    :  Dsn^-bsn    pJ^.ni    D^^t^'n   ^bD:>:i 

3  "bi-a   nn-i^   in '  -^d   ins    i2J-ip^;i   ^^^nien   Di"i-ns    D^n'bs    "^i^D";! 

4  D?^T|n  ninVn  nbs        s       j  niicyb  o^n'bs  sn^-ncs  inpsbp 
n  n<ii)  I  bbn  ;  a:'^th  "f^^s  c^n"bs  nir^   riir?  q^'"^3  ^^''^?.'?^  T^^'^^ 

iib'an  N^'b   -s  nm"^  s-ip  rnbn  ni!?^-bDT  f-nsn  n-n;:  cnu  niirn 

"t  -ns   D'^nbs   nini   ns^'ii    :  r.'a'isn   "iss-b^-ns   nptini   7'^srn'a 

■.■:  T         I  V        •  -  IT    r    -:    IT  f   :  T  V  'vi     :      •   :  I     v  at    t       '    • 

3  'ns   D'^  uw   rn-^ji   yiyii.  i^^   c^n'bs    nin^  ytb^^^   j  n^n  ttsj^ 

9  n^n?   fS'-bs   ri-b-isn-jT2   b^n'bs  nir,^  nibs^i    j  n^^  iirs   ci^^n 

:  yni  ni-j  n:'-jn  "^'j?*!   "in   ^-nn   h^^.'nt}  '\^'$^   bssisb  nit:^  ^i^*'?^'? 

,  nyn-isb    n^^ni    -:nsi    bif^^   'ir^'f^^   s^'"p'-f^'?    u?^    ^*?i*"'   "^C^^) 

11  nbiinn    }^"^s-b;    ns    snsrt    s^n    'iiis^s    "insn    d^^    :  n^T^s*^ 

12  { Dnirn  insi  nb'^sn  dtb  ni-j  sinn  rnsn  nnrn  :  nn-tn  attJ-nTEs 

-      (     -         f    :    r:  -    i     :     -  /r  a  <    -         I     v    /t    t  7-*:  I  itt    -  tr  *■    "1 


1 


LSSSUNS    IN    HEADING    llEliUKW. 


i;}0 


snnt)  N^n  ''3?"^q'?n  -in:ni  ^.rq^^  n^-ip  t|bhn  s^n  b^^n  ^;c^bT|ri 
!nn")aTi:bT  mayb   pi'-p^    inns^n    D^^"n-ns?    D^nbs    riro    np^l  i» 
ym  tbsjsn  bbx  l^n-f??  "5?^  ^^^?  a:j«v}"^?  dT'-2$  T;^?  ^^?^  17 
:n^T3P.  ™  ^3^^  T^bssi;  □i;;3  ^?  ^:^^  bsi^n  iib  5?^i  nit:  ns^n 
iT>:    'ib"nTS:^y:    i^nb    nn^jn    ni^n   n-j-aib    D^'n'b^?    rrn;*   nrii^'T  is 
q^.i^-bs  nsi  niisn  r;):n-b3   n-o^^rqia  n^pbs   nV.^  n:^^^  rflr.:3  i? 
□nsn  ib-snp:'  nibs  'bbi  ib-Knp^^-n-;  n^^nb  D>s'n-bis*  ^^nn  D-^riTTj 
qii^bi    n^onsn-bsb    ni^'ij    D'lJ^n    s^'jip:^]     :  ""'riizj    N-r.    r.'jn    irsa  3 
nini   'bs^n    :  i^:^:?  nj^  s^)2-i?b  niifbi  n^b^n   n_^n  bbb^  D^tVEn  21 
-1TC3  nhp'^T  "pfnh^b!^^  nn.^   np^'i   I'ri^T   D^j^n-;?  Ti'a^nri  1  D^n'bs 
nffis«b  □ni«n-]T3  n[p.b-nr«  yb^n-rs  1  t]^ribjs:  n'vp    ^^in    :  T^}^:^r\  22 

ffiiik-nT?';:    "js-by    :  rsi-T-nripb   r^i{>3  "^2  ni'«    t5n]^7   ri&iTb   ■'nisaa  24 
oroD-c  rrr'T   ;  nns  nianb  ^^m  ii^^.ujsa  pn^n   Srs-rnKi  rns^Ti?  ns 

t',tJiiJ3n">  ^bn  im^Ki  mxn  cwy. 


CHAPTER   III.     a 

nia^^i  D^O'^^  ^j^?  •"'^?  "'^-'^  '°^l^?r'  i",t5=]  ^ST2  t-n^  t-^r}  itr\:T\)  „ 

]3n-Tf^!n3  T(;j:>«   fyn  ''^d'oi    !bD&§:   ]5n-f5?  ''■nL'53  t-nirrb>j  rirsn  3 
-'Ci?;']    :  "j^rnan-ja    i3   ^yan   .i^ibi    ^sb^   V^^^n   v:^b   D'nbb?.   "irx  4 

ni^sn  Sinn  :  :?nT  nro  ■'^:-i"^  n-^n'bss  cn'^^rn  DS^'r^:  -'npspn  ^li^'Q  6 

•     :     -   :         '     ■•    T  <t    :  ■.•  :  •  -      ■•  .t  j  t    -:   i-  »•  :  t    -:    i- :  I     ■■    ■  J- 

^3^37  n:npDn^   :bDs^i  i-n^:?  n®^i?b~aa  inni   bs&^m  i^'^E'a  nprn  7 

J"     ••  r    :  »-    I    •  -  I-  -  IT  VT      •    :  -         I  y    ■  -  a-  -  i    :  li-    •  - 

smr^n  onb  ^to;:^  n'bxn  nb?  ^.'^Si'^^T  on  d^'^^s?  ■'S  ^■^";:^  cb^:© 
Kiinpi^i    D*>n   n^nb    faa    tjbnn'a    D'^n'bi?    nin^   bsp-r^    -S'TS'tK^;!  8 

i|3   "^n^^i^    ^'pj?"^^*    n^i5^^    :  P5^K  ib   "irb?^]    n^srrrs^    c*r;'bi?  - 
r.ns  Dy?  "3  Tfb  Tan  ^'a  T/c^'^t   '^^^^D  "^^r^'  d'T?"^?  ^"7^^!I  ^^ 


p-^nw  "inx  B3T  V.  25. 


l'^6  LESSONS    IN    READING    llEJJliEW. 

13  iT5«^T    :  bssp,    f3?n"]a   "^^"npn^    Nin   •^H'^s  nnn:    -it«   nt-st;;. 

'^3X1l;?^  iijmn  nicKn  nri^ri]    niit-y  mrn'a  tiw^b  t3"^n"->!|    nir,- 

i*  nPi?  n^ns'   nii-  ™^  ^3  ii'mn-bK  i  a^n'bs?  nVn;'  '^^^i^^i  :b?^n 

tfhipriin  fft:^K-b«T  D^;n  i^bn  n^s?:^  ^Dhnn  '^^"insr:?  nani?  na'^.n 

n^7^;n    rnriy;    ^r^'n   b^i^ri   ^b    "i"^^^b    ^''f^i^.a    nTrs?    fi?n-]p 

18  ^b   n^^in  ■I'jnn)  "j^iipi    t  ^''^n  ^^^'i'  bb   nsbs^n   'iin^S''3  ^nin?| 

19  -b^   7j3iuj  "i^   onb   b3s«n   TC^ES?   n2>TS   :  n^iifn    sw-ri^  rjbDS) 
5  ^np'^i    !  nwn   ^s^'-bs<5i    r-[r,k   'is^'°^3   P)^|b   n:^^;    ^^   '"•^"^'t^ 

21  n'ini    't'3?^T    !  "in-bs  q^   r^n^n   ^''iri  "^3   n^n   "Inrx  ct:   onsn 

22  "I'ai^^T  2  J  omb^T    n'"5'   n^';n|  "iniri?;b^   Djijb    D'^n'bi^ 
inn^i  2>ni  ni-j  n?;ib  ^sis'a   ^hn*?  n-n   c-^n  "jn  D'^n'bx  nir.* 

23  ^nnbir^i    !  t3bi:>b  'inn  bsi^T   D'^^nn   fs?^a   D5    inpbi   i"i^   nbir;i-]s 
"■^  izins^i    :  nm2  n;|b  nri?  nb^Kn-nj:?  -^b^b   ]-2^-]a^   QTi'bx  njr.7 

annn   t2nb   nki    o'^insn-ns:    ';'iy"].^b    cnpia    )^t^.)    D^srrrbj 


Masoretic  Notes  Explained. 

•^nnn  'n     .     .     .     .     Large  Beth. 
NT^T  'n     .     .     .     .     Small  He. 
p-i^::'  -ini«  rsT     ....     Dagluesh  after  Shoiek. 


LESSONS   IN   WRITING   HEBREW. 


1.  The  Prefixed  Particles,  §§  24-2S. 

Translate  into  Hebrew: — 

A  house  and  field.  A  field  and  a  liouse.  In  a  house, 
[n  the  house.  To  a  house.  To  the  house.  As  a  house. 
As  the  house.  From  a  house.  From  the  house.  The 
house  in  the  field.  From  the  house  unto  the  field.  Light 
and  darkness.  Day  and  night.  From  night  •  o  night  and 
from  day  to  day.  Darkness  in  the  night.  Light  in  the 
day.  As  the  sun  in  the  heavens.  The  darkness.  The 
evening.  Evening  and  morning.  As  the  sea.  Light 
from  the  sun  in  the  day  and  from  the  moon  and  from  the 
stars  in  the  night.  Bread  from  the  field  for  man  and  for 
beast.  And  flesh.  And  the  flesh.  And  from  the  flesh. 
And  to  the  flesh.  As  flesh.  Not  day  nor  (lit.  and  not) 
night.     From  sun  to  stars.    From  the  sun  unto  the  stars. 

2.  The  Personal  Pronouns,  §  29. 

Direction  1.  In  conformity  with  Remark  2  on  page  111, 
possessives,  when  not  immediately  followed  by  the  object 
possessed,  are  to  be  rendered  by  the  prepositiou  b  thus,  lam 
my  beloved's  and  iny  beloved  is  mine  ""b  ^IST)  ''"li^'?  ""SS  . 
The  verb  to  Jiave  must  be  paraphrased  by  the  same  pre- 
position, e.  g.  You  have  a  brother  riij  dd^  lit.  a  brother  is 
to  you  j  He  has  no  son  p  ib  'j'^x  lit.  there  is  no  son  to 
him. 


138  LESSONS   IN    WKITING    HEBREW. 

Translate  into  Hebrew : — 

Ye  ojiasG.  I  and  lie.  They  masc.  and  they  fern.  She 
f.nd  \ho\1fe7n.  Ye  fern,  and  we.  In  us.  In  tlieni  {pi. 
and  y.).  In  me.  In  her.  In  thee  (m.  and  y.).  In  you 
(m.  and  f.^.  From  eternity  unto  eternity  thou  art  God. 
From  God  to  us.  From  me  to  you.  We  are  in  the 
house,  ye  are  in  the  field.  He  is  in  the  light,  I  am  in 
darkness.  The  earth  is  Jehovah's.  The  silver  is  mine 
and  the  gold  is  his.  Heaven  is  thine.  God  is  for  us. 
God  is  not  like  man.  We  are  like  you.  He  is  like  us. 
The  house  is  yours,  and  the  field  is  theirs.  The  sea 
is  his.  The  bread  is  mine.  I  have  no  bread  in  tlie  house. 
We  have  a  brother;  he  is  still  living.  You  have  no 
brother.     There  is  no  beast  in  the  field. 


3.  Other  Pronouns,  §  30. 

Translate  into  Hebrew  : — 

This  house.  In  this  house.  This  is  the  house.  That 
field.  Fi'om  that  field.  That  is  the  field.  God,  who  is 
in  the  heavens.  Who  is  in  the  heavens  ?  The  bread, 
wliich  is  in  the  house.  What  is  in  the  house  ?  Who  am 
I  ?  What  are  "w^e  ?  These  stars.  These  are  the  stars. 
From  this  day.  In  this  day.  Whose  is  this  house '^ 
Whose  is  that  bi'ead  ?  The  place  in  which  we  are.  The 
land  in  which  I  am.  Who  is  this  masc.  ?  What  is  this 
ferti.  f  Who  art  thou  fern.  ?  Is  this  ^  thou  ^  masc.  ? 
This  field,  in  which  thou  art.  The  land,  from  which  they 
are.  These  waters,  which  are  from  the  sea.  Jehovah  is 
mine  and  I  am  his.  Y^e  are  lii-ht  in  Jehovah.  We  be« 
long  to  the  day :  we  belong  not  to  the  night  nor  to  dark 

Q<3S. 


LESSONS    IN    WlilTING    lIEliREW.  1^9 

4.  Perfect  Vekbs.     Kal   Preterite   and   Infinitives, 

§33. 

Write  the  Kal  preterite  and  infinitives  of  bt2j5,  nii|  and 
biiT)'  in  all  tlieir  forms  as  they  appear  in  the  paradigm^ 
with  the  proper  signification  attached  to  eacli. 

Translate  into  Hebrew  : — 

She  killed.  They  killed.  "We  killed.  To  kill.  Thou 
{masc.)  killedst.  I  killed.  Ye  (piasc.  and  f em.)  killed. 
He  killed.     Thou  (feiii.)  killedst. 

Thou  (m.  andy.)  wast  bereaved.  We  were  bereaved. 
Ye  (m.  and  /!)  were  heavy.  She  was  bereaved.  I  was 
heavy.  They  were  heavy.  He  was  heavy.  He  was  be- 
reaved.    To  be  bereaved. 

Direction  2.  In  Hebrew  sentences  the  verb  commonly 
precedes  its  subject,  and  both  precede  the  object  unless 
the  emphasis  requires  a  different  collocation,  e.  g.  55^3 
u'^'^WTi  nx  W'tib^  God  created  the  heavens.  But  if  a  per- 
sonal pronoun  be  either  the  direct  or  indirect  object  it  is 
usually  placed  immediately  after  the  verb  D"'r}'bx  ib  "jrij 
CJiD'i   God  gave  tohim, p'ojperty. 

Translate  into  Hebrew  : — 

I  shut  the  house.  She  shut  the  door.  He  shut  the 
heavens.  They  ruled  over  this  land.  Who  gave  you 
(Heb.  to  you)  those  vessels  ?  To  whom  did  he  give  this 
field  ?  What  did  they  give  me  ?  The  sun  ruled  over  the 
day  and  the  stars  ruled  over  the  night.  Thou  didst  pour 
water  from  the  heavens  upon  the  earth.  He  poured. 
She  gave  us  gold  and  silver  in  the  vessels.  They  gave 
to  him  honor  and  majesty.  They  kept  the  command' 
tnent      We  kept  the  Sab))ath      God  gave  us  a  command' 


140  LESSONS    IxN    WRITING    HEBREW. 

iiient  to  keep  tlie  Sabl)atl).  He  rested  in  this  day,  be 
cause  it  was  the  Sabbath.  The  darkness  was  Very  great 
I  dwelt  in  the  house.  They  dwelt  in  the  field.  This  is 
the  bread  which  Jehovah  has  given  to  you. 

5.    NiPHAL,  PlEL,  AND  PuAL  PRETERITES    AND  INFINITIVES, 

§  34. 

Write  the  Niphal,  Piel,  and  Pual  preterites  and  infini- 
tives of  ^ttjp  with  their  significations. 

Translate  : — 

He  was  killed.  To  be  killed.  I  was  killed.  We  were 
killed.  She  was  killed.  Thou  (^m.  and  /.)  wast  killed. 
Ye  (m.  and  /.)  were  killed.     They  were  killed. 

They  massacred.  They  were  massacred.  She  was 
massacred.  I  massacred.  Ye  (m.  and/)  massacred. 
We  massacred.  To  massacre.  To  be  massacred.  Thou 
(m.  and  /.)  wast  massacred.     He  was  massacred. 

The  house  was  sanctified.  The  tal;)ernacle  and  the  ark 
wei^  sanctified.  Thou  (m.  and  /.)  wast  sanctified.  Ye 
(m.  and  /.)  were  sanctified.  To  be  sanctified.  To  sanc- 
tify this  day.  This  is  the  day,  which  Jehovah  has  sanc- 
tified. They  sanctified  this  place.  I  sanctified  the  taber- 
nacle  and  the  vessels  which  were  in  it.  Ye  were  sepa- 
rated fi'om  them.  The  day  was  separated  from  the  night 
We  were  separated  from  you.  He  was  separated  from 
us.  We  were  separated  from  him.  They  subdued  the 
land.  They  were  subdued  before  you.  Ye  were  sub- 
dued. He  has  sworn  to  gather  you  to  this  land.  The 
door  was  shut  in  the  place,  in  which  they  were  gathered. 
What  did  ye  gather  ?  We  gathered  lu-ead.  Flesh  was 
o-athered.     They  have  sworn.     We  have  sworn.    She  has 


sworn. 


LESSONS    IN    WRITING    HEBREW  141 

6.  I'lIE    REMAINING    PrETERITES    AND    INFINITIVES,  §  35. 

Write  tlie  preterite  and  iiiiinitives  with,  their  significa- 
ticns  in  the  Hiphil,  Hophal,  and  Hithjmel  of  bb]?. 

Translate  : — 

I  caused  to  kill.  Slie  killed  kerself.  They  killed 
themselves.  Ye  (^m.  and  f.)  were  caused  to  kill.  To  kill 
one's  self.  To  cause  to  kill.  To  be  caused  to  kill.  We 
were  caused  to  kill.  Tliou  {771.  and  /.)  killedst  thyself. 
He  caused  to  kill. 

We  separated  the  silver  from  the  gold.  He  separated 
the  darkness  from  the  light.  Thou  didst  separate  Israel 
from  all  tlie  nations  which  are  in  all  the  earth.  I  was 
made  king.  Thou  wast  made  king.  Is  it  a  little  (thing) 
to  be  made  king?  A  little  bread,  A  little  flesh.  A 
little  gold.  A  little  silver.  They  cut  oif  the  nations. 
The  nations  were  cut  off.  Bread  was  cut  off  from  the 
house.  Bread  and  oil  were  cut  off.  We  were  cut  off. 
She  cut  off  man  and  beast  from  the  land.  They  caused 
the  kin2:dom  to  cease.  He  made  the  kina:dom  small.  We 
made  small.  Whom  did  she  destroy?  What  did  she 
destroy  ?  Thou  (m..  and  f.)  didst  purify  thyself.  I  did 
not  pimfy  myself.  She  purified  herself.  Ye  {m.  and^/!) 
purified  ^^ourselves.  They  brought  the  water  near  to  the 
king  David  and  lie  poured  it  out  before  Jehovah.  He 
consecrated  the  oil  and  anointed  the  tabernacle,  the  ark 
and  all  the  vessels.  We  consecrated  all  the  silver  and 
the  gold  to  Jehovah. 

7.  Kal  Future,  Imperative,  and  Participles,  §  36. 

Write  the  Kal  future,  imperative  and  participles  ol 

5T0j5,  and  the  futures  of  ins  aii<1   ^5t». 


142  liESSONS   IN    T\  KITING    HEBREW. 

Translate :- — 

Thou  (m.  and  /.)  wilt  kill.  We  shall  kill.  I  shal. 
kill  He  will  kill.  They  (m.  and/.)  will  kill.  She  will 
kill.  Ye  {in.  and  f.)  will  kill.  Kill  ye  {in.  and  /'.) 
Killed.     Killing.     Kill  thou  {in.  and/.). 

Thou  wilt  rule  over  us.  He  will  rule  over  them.  The 
stars  shall  rule  over  the  nia-ht.     The  sea  shall  not  rule 

o 

over  the  earth.  Rule  thou  over  the  nations.  He  is 
ruling.  She  is  ruling.  We  are  ruling.  Ye  shall  rest  in 
the  Sabbath.  Eest  ye  {in.  and/)  with  me  in  the  house. 
Keep  thou  (m.)  this  beast.  Keep  thou  (/)  that  bread. 
Who  is  keeping  the  silver?  Jehovah  is  keeping  Israel. 
Jehovah,  who  is  keeping  Israel,  will  also  keep  us.  God 
shall  keep  thee  in  the  day  and  in  the  night.  We  shall 
dwell  in  heaven.  Shut  {in.  pl.^  the  door.  I  shall  shut 
the  gate.  She  is  shutting  the  house.  The  virgins  are 
dwellino;  in  the  house.  The  wild  beast  is  dwellins^  in  the 
field.  He  will  subdue  all  the  nations  which  are  under 
heaven.  Thou  shalt  be  clothed  with  majesty  and  splen- 
dor.    I  will  keep  what  I  have  sjjoken. 

8.    NiPHAL,    PlEL,    AND    PuAL    FuTURES,    ETC.,    §  37 

Write  the  future,  imperative,  and  participle  of  the 
Niphal,  Piel,  and  Pual  of  bb]? . 

Translate  : — 

We  shall  be  massacred.  Ye  {m.  and/)  will  massacre. 
She  will  massacre.  I  shall  be  killed.  He  will  be  killed. 
Thou  (m.  and/)  wilt  massacre.  They  {in.  and/)  will 
jbe  massacred.  Be  thou  {m.  and/)  killed.  Massacre  ye 
{7ii.  ;and/.).     Killed.     INIassacred.     Massacring. 

Ye  will  be  separated  from  us.  They  will  be  shut  in 
the  house  until  the  iijiorijing.     All  the  people  wiU  be 


LESSONS    IN    WRITING    HEBREW.  143 

sanctified ,  The  company  will  be  sanctified.  These  vir. 
gins  will  be  sanctified.  Those  nations  will  be  sanctified. 
We  shall  be  sanctified.  Ye  {m.  and/.)  will  be  sanctified. 
Thou  {m.  and/.)  wilt  be  sanctified.  I  shall  be  sancti- 
fied Jehovah  will  be  honored.  Be  ye  honored.  I 
will  honor  them  who  honor  me  (lit.  the  [ones]  honor- 
ing me).  I  will  sanctify  the  priests.  He  will  sanctify 
them.  They  will  sanctify  us.  It  belongs  to  the  priests 
to  honor  this  house.  It  is  not  for  me  to  honor  him. 
They  will  speak  to  thee.  To  whom  will  ye  speak  ?  God 
is  speaking  to  us  from  heaven.  Wilt  thou  speak  to  me  ? 
Speak  ye  to  them.  I  will  take  heed  that  I  do  not  speak 
evil.  Will  the  gate  be  shut  ?  Will  they  be  shut  up  in 
Jericho  ? 


9.    HlPHIL,  HOPHAL,  AND    HlTHPAEL    FuTURES,    ETC.,    §  38. 

Write  the  future,  imperative,  and  participle  of  the 
Hiphil,  Hophal,-  and  Hithpael  of  bbjp  . 

Translate : — • 

Ye  (m.  and/)  will  be  caused  to  kill.  We  shall  kill 
ourselves.  Kill  thyself  (m.  and  /).  Causing  to  kill. 
Thou  (m.  and/)  wilt  cause  to  kill.  Cause. ye  {771.  and 
/)  to  kill.  They  {m.  and  f.)  ^vill  kill  themselves.  I 
shall  be  caused  to  kill.  Killing  one's  self.  Caused  to 
kill.     He  will  be  caused  to  kill.     She  will  cause  to  kill 

I  withheld  the  rain  from  you.  I  shall  cause  it  to  rain 
upon  this  field  and  I  shall  not  cause  it  to  rain  upon  that 
field.  Thou  wilt  clothe  them  with  (lit.  cause  them  to 
put  on)  splendor  and  majesty.  He  ^vill  clothe  the 
heavens  with  darkness.  Clothe  (2  m.  s.)  all  the  nations 
with  joy  and  gladness.     He  will  be  made  king  and  \^dl1 


144  J^ESSONS    IN    WRIllNG    HEBREW . 

be  lioiioi'ed  in  all  the  land.  Ye  Avill  be  caused  to  reign 
We  sliall  be  caused  to  reign.  Thou  wilt  be  caused  tc 
reicj-n.  What  shall  I  offer  to  God  ?  Shall  all  the  rem 
naiit  be  cut  off?  Joy  shall  be  cut  off  from  Israel.  All 
these  nations  shall  be  cut  off.  Shall  we  cause  the  work 
to  cease  ?  Who  shall  separate  us  from  him  ?  What  shall 
sejjarate  him  f  j'om  us  ?  I  am  separating  between  good 
and  evil.     He  shall  cause  them  to  dwell  in  the  land. 


10.   Paragogic  and  Apocopated  Future  and  Imperativjj 
AND  Vav  Conversive,  §§  40,  41. 

Direction  3.  In  narrating  the  ])ast,  the  first  verb  is 
commonly  to  be  put  in  the  preterite  and  the  succeeding 
verbs  in  the  future  with  Vav  Conversive,  provided  the 
verb  stands  at  the  beginning  of  the  clause.  If,  however, 
any  verb  of  the  series  is  for  any  reason  removed  from  the 
beginning  of  its  clause  and  so  separated  from  the  con- 
junction, it  must  be  put  in  the  preterite,  §  79.  2. 

4.  In  a  paragraph  relating  to  the  future,  the  first  verb 
is  commonly  to  be  put  in  the  future  or  imperative,  as  the 
case  may  be,  and  the  succeeding  verbs  in  the  preterite 
with  Yav  Conversive,  provided  they  stand  at  the  begin- 
ning of  their  own  clause.  But  if  any  verb  of  the  series  is 
separated  from  the  conjunction  by  an  intervening  word, 
it  must  be  put  in  the  future. 

5.  A  negative  imperative  must  be  translated  by  -« 
with  the  future,  the  a^^ocopated  form  being  used  if  on« 
exists,  §  78.  &. 

Translate  into  Hebrew : — 

He  anointed  me  and  caused  me  to  remn  instead  oi 
David.      They  drave  out  the  nations  and  subdued  the 


LESSONS    IN    WRITING    HEBREW.  14  a 

land  and  dwelt  in  it.  Tliou  wilt  gather  tliem  from  all 
the  nations,  and  cause  them  to  dwell  in  this  land,  and 
thou  wilt  reign  over  Israel  forever  (lit.  to  eterE^ty). 
Y^e  shall  keep  the  commandment  and  be  separated  from 
tLe  nations  and  be  consecrated  to  me,  and  ye  shall  be  great 
from  sea  unto  sea.  Cleave  thou  unto  me  and  thou  shalt 
keep  the  covenant  which  I  have  made  (lit.  cut)  with  thee 
and  thou  shalt  honor  me.  Ye  shall  not  forget.  Forget 
not  ye  what  I  have  spoken  to  you.  Take  heed  that  ye 
forget  not  the  Sabbath  to  rest  in  it  from  all  work.  Wilt 
thou  not  withhold  me  from  evil?  Withhold  not  mercy 
from  me,  O  Jehovah,  and  I  will  keep  (parag.  fut.)  this 
commandment.  Cut  them  not  off.  We  gave  them  bread 
and  made  (lit.  cut)  a  covenant  with  them.  Pray  reign 
over  this  people.  Shut  the  door.  Pray,  shut  the  door. 
Thou  wilt  not  shut  the  door.  Do  not  shut  the  door. 
We  vnll  shut.     Let  us  shut. 


1.1.  Preterites  of  Perfect  Verbs  with  Suffixes,  §  42. 

a.  Third  person  masc.  and  fem.  sing,  of  the  Kal  Pre- 
terite. 

Write  the  3  m.  and  /.  sing,  of  the  Kal  preterite  oi 
bb]^  with  suffixes,  adding  to  each  form  its  proper  signifi 
iCation. 

Translate  : — 

He  killed  them  (m.  and/.).  He  killed  him.  He  killed 
us.  He  killed  thee  (m.  and/.)  He  killed  me.  He  killed 
you  {m.  and  /.).     He  killed  her. 

She  killed  us.     She  killed  you  (m.  and  /.).    She  killed 
me.     She  killed  her.    She  killed  them  (m.  and  /.).     She 
killed  him.     She  killed  thee  (?>/   and  /.). 
1 


146  LESSONS   IN    WRITING    HEBREW. 

b.  The  rest  of  the  Kal  Preterite. 

Write  the  remaining  parts  of  the  Kal  preterite  of  5b'p 
with  suffixes. 

Translate : — 

They  killed  you  (ni.  and  /.).  Ye  killed  them  (m.  and 
y.).  I  killed  her.  Thou  (•?7i.)  killedst  me.  I  killed  thee 
(m.  and  /.).  We  killed  him.  They  killed  me.  They 
killed  her.  Ye  killed  us.  Thou  (/.)  killedst  him.  We 
killed  you.  Thou  (m.)  killedst  her.  Thou  (/.)  killedst 
her.  Thou  (jn.)  killedst  him.  Thou  (f.)  killedst  me. 
He  kept  you  (w.  and/!).  She  kept  him.  Ye  kept  us. 
'Thou  (m.)  didst  keep  her.  Thou  (/.)  didst  keep  me. 
■She  kept  you  (m.  and  /.).  We  kept  them  (m.  and  f.). 
They  kept  us.     I  kept  thee  (w.  and/.). 

He  anointed  him.  He  anointed  me.  Thou  (7??-.)  didst 
anoint  us.  Thou  didst  anoint  them.  They  sent  thee  {m. 
and  /.).  She  sent  her.  Ye  sent  him.  We  sent  you  (m. 
and  /.).  She  forgot  me.  Thou  {/.)  didst  forget  her. 
We  forgot  her.  I  forgot  him.  He  washed  them  {m.  and 
/.).     I  washed  you  (jn.  and^.). 

c.  The  Piel  and  Hiphil  Preterites. 

Write  the  different  persons  of  the  Piel  or  Hiphil  pre- 
terite of  ^b]?  wdth  suffixes. 

Translate,  noting  the  fact  when  the  Hebrew  is  ambiguous : 
He  massacred  them  (m.  and  /.).  We  massacred  yon 
{j7i.  and  /.).  She  massacred  us.  Ye  massacred  us.  Ye 
massacred  them  (m.  and  /.).  They  massacred  us.  They 
ma^  .acred  you  (m.  and  /,).  Thou  {7)1.  and  fS)  didst  mas- 
sacre  us.     He  massacred  you. 

They  caused  me  to  kill.  He  caused  you  (w.  and  /.) 
to  kill.  She  caused  to  kill  them  (w-  and  /.).  They 
j'aused  to  kill  her.     She  caused  thee  {;m.  and  f.)  to  kilL 


LESSONS    IN    WIUTING    IIEEKEW.  147 

Ve  caused  me  to  kill.  Ye  caused  to  kill  liim.  1  caused 
thee  (in.  and  f.)  to  kill.  I  caused  to  kill  tlieni  {in.  and 
f.).  Thou  (in.  and  f.^  didst  cause  to  kill  her.  Thou 
(w.  and  /.)  didst  cause  us  to  kill.  We  caused  to  kill 
hira.     We  caused  you  to  kill. 

He  made  me  great.  He  made  us  great.  He  made 
them  (ill.  and  /.)  great.  He  honored  you  (in.  andy.). 
He  honored  him.  He  honored  her.  He  bereaved  thee 
(in.  and  f.^.  Ye  gathered  them  (m.  and  j^).  She  gathered 
us.  We  honored  her.  Thou  (m.  and  f.')  didst  honor  him. 
She  honored  him.  She  honored  her.  I  gathered  you  (m. 
and  f.).     They  honored  me. 

They  caused  him  to  reign  over  Israel.  Ye  caused  me 
to  put  on  the  garments.  He  caused  Eleazar  to  put  them 
on.  A  wild  beast  overtook  him  in  the  field.  Thou  hast 
caused  us  to  dwell  in  this  place.  I  have  cut  them  off 
because  they  did  not  honor  me.  Thou  hast  separated 
them  from  all  the  nations  whicli  are  upon  the  earth.  Ye 
brousrht  him  near  to  the  tabernacle.  The  sword  has 
})ereaved  her,  and  she  has  neither  father  nor  daughter  nor 
brother  (lit.  to  her  is  not  father  and  not  daughter  and 
not  brother). 

12.    Futures,  etc.,  of  Perfect  Verbs  with   Suffixes, 

§  42. 

a.  Kal  Future. 

Write  the  different  persons  of  the  Kal  future  of  ^t3j3 
with  suffixes. 

Translate : — 

He  ^A'ill  kill  us.  She  will  kill  us.  I  shall  kill  you  (m. 
and  /:).  Thou  mlt  kill  her.  We  shall  kill  him.  She 
will"  kill  them.  They  will  kill  lier.  Ye  (m.)  will  kill 
her.    Thou  (/.)  wilt  kill  her.     Thou  (/.)  wilt  kill  me 


148  LESSONS    IN    WKITING    ilEBKEW. 

Ye  (m.)  will  kill  tliera.  They  will  kill  you  (m.  ami 
/).  ^  Thou  (/)  wilt  kill  us.  She  will  kill  thee  (m 
aud/.). 

Jehovali  will  keep  us  from  all  evil.  Thou  (m.)  wilt 
keep  them  (m.  and  f.).  They  (m.  and  f.)  will  remember 
me.  I  shall  remember  them.  Who  will  remember  him  1 
Will  he  remember  her  ?  Will  she  not  remember  you  (?/?. 
and  y.)  ?  I  do  not  know  {pret.)  him  and  liow  shall  1 
remember  liim  ?  We  shall  remember  thee  (m.  and  f. ) 
and  not  forget  thee.  This  is  the  house;  wilt  thou  (j/i. 
and  y.)  remember  it  ?  This  is  the  commandment ;  will 
they  keep  it  ?  Whose  are  these  garments  ?  I  shall  put 
them  on.  Behold  this  babe  !  will  the  mother  forget  it  ? 
(The)  Lord  will  surely  {ahs.  iiiftii.^  remember  you. 
Thou  (w.  and  y.)  wilt  not  forget  me.  Do  not  thou  {jn. 
and  y.)  forget  me. 

h.  Piel  and  Hiphil  Futures. 

Write  the  different  persons  of  the  Piel  or  Hiphil  future 
of  -bUjp  with  suffixes. 

Translate : — 

She  will  massacre  them  {m.  and  y ).  Will  ye  (m.  and 
y.)  massacre  us  ?  He  will  massacre  you  {m.  and  y ). 
He  will  cause  thee  {m.  and  y.)  to  kill  me.  He  will  cause 
to  kill  thee.  Thou  (m.  and  y.)  wilt  cause  her  to  kill  us. 
I  mil  cause  him  to  kill  them.  They  (m.  and  y.)  will 
cause  me  to  kill. 

Thou  (m.)  wilt  deliver  them  and  they  will  honor  thee, 
The  Lord  has  remembered  us  and  crowned  (future  with 
Vav.  Conv.)  us  with  honor  and  majesty.  He  will  not 
destroy  me.  Let  him  not  destroy  me.  Jehovah,  who  is 
dwelling  in  Zion,  will  sanctify  the  people  and  delivei 
tliem  (Heb.  sing.  suf.  referring  to  people)  fi'om  all  ovi^ 


LESS0NS~^1N    WRITING    IIEBIMOW.  149 

and  cause  tliem  to  dwell  in  this  place  forever.  1  will 
cause  thee  to  put  on  sackcloth,  and  will  cause  joy  and 
o-ladness  to  cease  and  will  utterly  (ahs.  iitfin.)  cut  thee 
off.  Thou  wilt  gather  us  and  make  us  great.  We  will 
separate  her  from  the  asseml)ly.  All  the  virgins  shall 
honor  her. 

c.  Infinitive  and  Imperative. 

AVrite  the  Kal  infinitive  of  ^t?)?  with  suffixes  and  givo 
the  different  significations  of  each  form. 

Translate,  noting  the  fact  when  the  Hebrew  is  am 
biguous  and  giving  the  alternate  significations : — 

To  kill  you  (;J7i.  and/.).  To  kill  them  {m.  and/). 
To  kill  her.  To  kill  him.  Kill  (m.  s.  and  pi)  her.  Kill 
(?u.  s.  and  J!?/.)  him.  My  killing.  To  kill  me.  Our  kill- 
ing. His  being  killed.  Massacre  (m.  s.  and  pi.)  them. 
To  massacre  you  {771.  and  /.).  Plis  massacring  us.  Your 
being  massacred.  Cause  (m.  s.  and  pi.)  him  to  kill  the 
woman.  My  causing  you  to  kill.  Her  causing  to  kill 
tliem.  To  cause  him  to  kill  me.  To  cause  me  to  kill 
him.  To  cause  to  kill  thee  (m.  and  /).  Their  being 
caused  to  kill  her. 

To  keep  me.  To  keep  him.  To  keep  thee  {m.  and  /.). 
To  keep  us.  To  keep  them  (7)1.  and/).  Keep  (m.  s.  and 
p/.)  them.  My  keeping  the  commandment.  Remember 
{m..  s.  and  pi.)  me.  Here  am  I  (Heb.  '^??n  ,  behold  me), 
3end  me.  Hear  us.  Deliver  {m.  s.)  us.  Crown  (m.  6'.  and 
pi.)  him.  To  honor  her.  He  has  sworn  to  (use  the  prej).) 
gather  us  and  to  cause  us  to  reign  with  him.  Honor  him 
and  he  will  not  forget  to  honor  thee.  Sanctify  us  and 
hvino:  us  near  to  thee.  Grather  the  priests  to  the  sanc- 
tuary; honor  them  before  all  the  people;  clothe  them  witlj 
(Heb.  cause  them  to  put  on)  salvation. 


15c  lessons  in  y\^kiting  heljkew. 

13.   Gendek  and  Number  of  Nouns,  §§  43-45. 

Translate  : — 

A  great  war.  The  great  war.  It  is  a  great  war  (Heb 
the  war  is  great).  This  war.  This  great  war.  Thia 
great  and  evil  war.  Great  wars.  The  great  wars.  These 
great  wars.  These  great  and  evil  wars.  These  wars  are 
great  and  evil.  Wars  are  great  evils.  He  uttered  (Heb. 
cried)  a  great  cry.  I  will  make  (Heb.  cut)  a  new  cove- 
nant with  them.  New  garments.  These  garments  are 
new.  There  are  the  new  garments.  He  caused  me  to 
put  on  these  new  garments.  He  rent  the  new  garment 
which  was  upon  him.  A  great  kingdom.  He  shall  reign 
over  all  these  great  kingdoms.  Many  wells.  Large 
rocks.  An  evil  beast.  Good  commandments.  Many 
and  great  nations.  Large  figs.  These  large  figs.  These 
figs  are  large.  The  large  figs  are  very  large.  These  figs 
are  larger  than  those  figs.  Those  figs  are  better  than 
these.     "War  is  worse  than  (Heb.  evil  from)  famine. 

14.  The  Construct  State,  §§  46,  47. 

Direction  6.  Observe  that  where  a  short  vowel  is  in- 
serted in  the  construct  plural  agreeably  to  §  47.  5,  the 
first  syllable  is  intermediate  and  a  following  aspirate  will 
not  take  Daghesh-lene,  §  9.  a. 

Translate  : 

A  house  of  a  king.  The  house  of  the  king.  In  the 
king's  house  are  vessels  of  gold  and  vessels  of  silver. 
The  vessels  of  silver  are  more  than  the  vessels  of  gold. 
The  vessels  of  gold  are  smaller  than  the  vessels  of  silver. 
The  priests  of  Jehovah  burned  incense  upon  the  golden 
altar  (Heb.  the  altar  of  gold).    Who  will  shut  the  doors 


LESSONS    IN    WEITINQ    HEBREW.  151 

of  the  house  ?  The  rivers  of  the  garden.  The  waters  oi 
the  sea.  The  cattle  of  the  earth,  the  beast  of  the  field, 
;and  the  fowl  of  heaven.  This  is  the  sign  of  the  covenant 
•wliich  I  have  made  with  you.  The  mercy  of  Jehovah  is 
ifrom  eternity  and  to  eternity.  The  blessing  of  Jehovah, 
ithe  God 'of  ;all  the  earth.  The  kino;s  of  the  nations.  The 
stones  of  the  field.  The  gates  of  the  city.  The  field  of 
Edom.  The  stars  of  the  morning.  Will  ye  n<:>t  keep  the 
commandment  of  the  king  ?  The  good  commandments  of 
God.  The  great  day  of  Jehovah.  Aaron  and  Eleazar 
.offered  them  upon  the  altar. 


15.  Nouns  with  Suffixes,  §  49. 

Direction  7.  Nouns  having  suflixes  are  definite  and 
I'equire  attributive  adjectives  joined  to  them  to  take  the 
article,  §§  69,  70. 

Write  the  nouns  "li'^  ^vo7'd  and  TO'si  soul  in  both  num- 
bers with  the  sufiixes  in  their  order,  adding  to  each  form 
its  signification. 

Tnmslate : — 

Thou  shalt  hear  my  voice  in  the  morning.  He  put 
(Heb.  gave)  the  ark  of  God  in  its  place.  His  mercy  is 
to  eternity.  She  caused  him  to  put  on  his  new  garments. 
He  will  subdue  the  nations  under  us.  Thou  wilt  subdue 
them  under  our  feet.  I  will  clothe  her  priests  with 
(Heb.  cause  her  priests  to  put  on)  salvation.  My  piiesta 
shall  be  clothed  with  righteousness.  Ye  shall  keep  my 
Sabbaths.  I  have  kept  tliy  commandment.  Hear  my 
cry.  She  will  wash  her  head,  her  hands,  and  her  feet. 
He  anointed  my  head  with  (3)  oil.  The  nations  and 
their  kings.     His  holy  tabernacle  (Heb.  the  tabernacle  <  i 


\ 


152  liESSONy    IN    WKITING    HEBREW. 

his  Loiineas).  My  ngliteous  God  (Heb,  God  of  m}, 
I'igliteousness).  He  will  not  forget  liis  covenant.  His 
x^oice  is  breaking  in  pieces  rocks.  My  foot.  My  feet 
His  foot.  His  feet.  Tlieir  feet.  He  lias  given  salvatiou 
to  Ills  king.  Ye  are  dwelling  in  your  liouse.  Tliis  is  m^ 
field.     Thy  field  is  larger  than  our  field. 

16.  Pe  Guttural  Verbs,  §  53. 

The  intransitive  verb  "itr  to  stand  does  not  in  strictness  admit  of  a  passive, 
and  accordingly  never  occurs  in  the  Niphal.  That  species,  as  found  in  the  para- 
digm, may  in  these  exercises  be  rendered  as  though  'stand'  had  its  transitive 
sense,  he  was  stood,  etc. 

Write  the  paradigm  of  n^:?  to  stand,  the  Kal  future  oJ 
bis  to  eat,  and  the  Kal  future  and  imperative  of  ptn  tc 
be  strong. 

Translate : — 

Ye  (m.  and/.)  stood.  We  shall  stand.  They  (m.  anc 
/.)  will  stand.  Thou  (w.  and/.)  wilt  stand.  Stand  thoi 
(m.  and/)  I  shall  stand.  To  be  stood.  T  was  stood 
She  was  stood.  Ye  (w.  and/!)  will  be  stood.  Be  y( 
{m.  and/)  stood.  He  shall  be  stood.  We  shall  caus( 
to  stand.*^  Thou  shalt  be  caused  to  stand.  Thou  (m.  anc 
/.)  wast  caused  to  stand.  They  were  caused  to  stand 
They  caused  to  stand.  Caused  to  stand.  Causing  t«! 
stand.  I  shall  eat.  Ye  (m.  and/)  will  be  strong.  B.| 
thou  (m.  and/)  strong.     She  ^vill  eat. 

The  curse  was  turned  to  a  blessing.  I  shall  turn  da 
to  nio-ht.  Turn  (thou)  these  stones  to  bread.  Darknes 
shall  be  turned  to  light.  I  shall  cause  them  to  eat  bread 
He  caused  his  people  to  eat  manna.  Have  ye  not  eaten 
What  have  you  (Heb.  is  to  you)  to  eat?  There  is  n* 
bread  to  eat.     It  shall  not  be  eaten.     The  priests  shal 


LESSONS    IN    WRITING    IIEBKEAV.  15»^ 

eat  it  Eat  no  bread  in  this  place.  Ye  shall  nut  eat  from 
this  ti'ee.  Ye  have  forsaken  me  and  I  will  forsake  you. 
Will  ye  forsake  me  ?  Thou  shalt  serve  him  and  he  will 
U(H  forsake  thee.  Serve  Jehovah  wath  all  thy  heart  and 
with  all  thy  soul.  All  the  nations  shall  serve  him.  Who 
is  Jehovah  that  I  shall  serve  him  ?  It  shall  be  said  to 
you,  Ye  are  my  people  and  I  am  your  God.  The  words 
of  Jehovah  were  verified.  He  is  a  living  God  and  an 
everlasting  king  (Heb.  king  of  eternity).  He  is  king  of 
kings. 

17.  Ayin  Guttueal  Veebs,  §  54. 

The  verb  bij  has  in  Kal  and  Niphal  the  sense  of  redeeming,  in  Piel,  Pual,  aiid 
Ftithpael  that  of  polluting. 

Write  the  paradigm  of  ^s?5  . 

Translate : 

He  will  redeem.  Thou  (m.  and/.)  wilt  redeem.  Ke^ 
deem  ye  (m.  and  /'.)  They  redeemed.  She  was  re- 
deemed. Be  thou  (w.  and /.)  redeemed.  They  (m.  and 
/.)  will  be  redeemed.  We  polluted  ourselves.  Polluted. 
Polluting.  Thou  (m.  and/.)  pollutedst.  Ye  (m.  and  /) 
were  polluted.  She  polluted.  Pollute  ye  (m.  and /.) 
Pollute  thyself  (m.  and/).  We  shall  be  polluted.  They 
(7fi.  and  /)  will  pollute.  Ye  (m.  and  /.)  will  pollute 
yourselves.     I  shall  pollute. 

I  will  bless  him  with  all  my  heart.  God  will  bless  us, 
He  has  blessed  us.  Bless  ye  (m.)  Jehovah.  Bless  Jeho- 
vah, ye  virgins  of  Israel..  He  went  to  bless  his  house. 
His  seed  shall  be  blessed  in  the  earth.  He  will  bless  thee, 
and  thy  seed  after  thee.  Ye  shall  be  blessed  in  him  1 
cried  unto  thee  in  the  night  and  thou  heardest  my  voice. 
We  will  cry  with  a  loud  (Heb.  great)  voice  to  him  that 


154  LESSONS    IN    WRITING    HEBREW. 

sitteth  (Heb.  to  the  [one]  sitting)  in  the  heavens.  C15 
not  to  me;  cry  unto  the  gods  whom  ye  have  seiv^ed 
Wash  ye  your  hands  and  your  feet.  Wash  thou  me  and 
I  shall  be  clean.  Cleanse  your  hearts  and  not  (bs)  your 
garments.  I  will  cleanse  you  from  all  evil.  Forsake  evil 
and  serve  me.  He  drove  out  the  nations  from  before  us 
and  we  dwelt  in  their  land.  Thou  hast  redeemed  us 
The  God  of  Israel  is  thy  Redeemer. 

18.  Lamedh  Guttural  Verbs,  §  55. 
Write  the  paradigm  of  nbir  to  send. 

The  Piel  of  this  verb  may  be  rendered  for  the  sake  of  distinction  to  send  away. 

Translate : — 

To  send.  To  send  away.  To  be  sent.  To  send  one's 
self.  To  cause  to  send.  Thou  {m.  and  /.)  didst  send. 
We  shall  be  sent.  I  shall  send  myself.  Cause  thou  {m. 
and  /.)  to  send.  He  will  send  away.  Thou  (711.  and  /.) 
wast  sent.  Ye  {m.  and  f.)  will  cause  to  send.  Sending. 
Sent.  Causing  to  send.  He  will  cause  to  send.  She 
will  be  sent.  Thou  {m.  and/.)  wilt  send  thyself.  They 
(m.  and  /.)  will  send.     Send  ye  (in.  and  /.). 

He  will  sow  his  field.  It  is  time  to  sow  thy  seed. 
Sow  good  seed  in  thy  field.  Bad  seed  which  should  (Heb. 
shall)  not  be  sown.  These  fields  shall  be  sown  to-day.  The 
sower  (paH.)  went  to  sow;  and  in  his  sowing  {inf.)  these  i 
fell  on  tlie  wa}^  and  the  fowls  of  heaven  ate  them ;  these  ■ 
fell  on  the  rock  and  these  on  good  ground.  The  field  is 
the  whole  earth ;  the  seed  is  the  word  of  God ;  the  sow^er 
is  the  Son  of  man  and  his  servants  wliom  he  lias  sent  in 
his  name.  Didst  thou  (tu.)  not  sow  good  seed  in  thy 
field?  Didst  thou  (/.)  hear  what  he  said  to  thee?  It  is 
good  to  hear  thy  voice.  She  will  be  heard.  To  be 
heard.      He  will   ojien  the  house.      The  heavens  were 


LESSONS    IN    WJUTIJSTG    HEIillEW.  155 

op(3iied  and  a  voice  was  heard,  This  is  my  Son,  hear  him. 
Who  shall  open  the  eyes  of  the  blind?  The  deaf  shall 
hear.  His  clothes  (were)  rent  (^Kal  _pass.  part.)  and 
fishes  upon  his  head.  Forget  not  his  commandments. 
Thou  shalt  not  be  forgotten.  He  will  not  withhold  any 
iy^)  good  f]'om  us. 


19.  Pe  Nun  Verbs,  §  56. 

The  Kal  and  Niphal  of  C'S ,  though  given  in  full  in  the  paradigm,  are  each 
but  partially  in  use,  and  as  they  are  identical  in  signification  they  are  made  to 
supplement  each  other.  The  Niphal  is  found  only  in  the  preterite  and  participle  ; 
the  Kal  in  the  infinitive,  futui-e,  and  imperative. 

Write  the  paradigm  of  ^k^  to  approach  and  the  Kal  o^^ 

]ni  to  give. 

Translate  : — 

Approach  thou  (m.  and  y.).  She  will  approach.  They 
im.  and  /.)  Avill  approach.  Approaching.  To  approach. 
We  appi'oaehed.  Ye  (w.  and  y.)  approached.  I  ap- 
proached. I  sliall  approach.  I  shall  be  caused  to 
approach.  Thou  {in.  and  y.)  caused  st  to  approach. 
Cause  ye  (m.  and  /!)  to  approach.  Thou  {in.  and  y.) 
wilt  cause  to  approach.  He  will  be  caused  to  approach. 
Caused  to  approach.  To  cause  to  approach.  To  give. 
Ye  {in.  and  y.)  gave.  Thou  {m.  and  y.)  gavest.  We 
gave.     We  shall  give.     Give  thou  {jn.  and/!). 

Give  {imp.  with  He  parag.)  (to)  me  thy  field.  I  will 
give  (to)  thee  instead  of  it  a  field  better  than  it.  Ask 
from  me  and  I  will  give  thee  the  nations.  He  will  give 
me  a  new  heart.  Ye  gave  me  bread  and  I  ate.  Thou 
gavest  this  land  to  him  and  to  his  seed  forever.  He 
sware  to  give  us  this  good  land.  Thou  wilt  give  rain 
upon  the  earth.     He  Avill  give  them  into  oui*  hand.     He 


156  LESSONS   m    WRITING    HEBREW. 

said,  Give  me  tliy  liand ;  and  lie  gave  him  liis  liaiid 
What  will  ye  give  me?  I  know  (pre/.)  that  he  will  not 
suffer  (Heb.  give)  you  to  go.  I  shall  take  a  little  honey. 
Take  half  of  the  blood  and  put  (Heb.  give)  it  upon  the 
altai'.  I  have  (see  Direction  1,  Lesson  2)  no  silver  and 
gold  ;  I  shall  give  thee  all  that  I  have.  Tell  me,  I  pray 
thee,  what  he  said  to  thee ;  withhold  not  a  word  from 
me.  And  he  told  her  all  that  was  in  his  heart.  They 
did  not  tell  us  the  half.  It  was  told  to  the  king  and  to 
his  servants. 


20.  Atin  Doubled  Verbs,  §  57. 

Write  the  paradigm  of  sno  to  surround^  and  the  Pie! 
of  l[k^  to  excite. 

Translate  : — 

He  surrounded.  We  surrounded.  They  surrounded. 
Yq  {771.  and/.)  surrounded.  Thou  (m.  and/.)  didst 
surround.  She  surrounded.  I  -surrounded.  I  was  sui-- 
rounded.  He  was  surrounded.  Ye  (m.  and  /.)  were 
surrounded.  She  was  surrounded.  They  were  surround- 
ed. Thou  {m.  and  /.)  wast  surrounded.  We  were  sur- 
rounded. We  shall  be  surrounded.  We  shall  surround. 
Thou  (m.  and  /.)  wilt  be  surrounded.  They  {m.  and  /) 
will  be  surrounded.  Ye  (m.  and  /.)  will  surround.  ] 
shall  surround.  Surround  ye  (m.  and  /.).  Be  thou  (m. 
and/.)  surrounded.  Surrounded.  Surrounding.  Tc 
surround.     To  be  surrounded. 

They  surrounded  enti"ely.  We  shall  sui  round  entirely 
Surround  ye  (m.  and/.)  entirely.  I  caused  to  surround 
Slie  c:,used  to  surround.  She  was  caused  to  surround. 
Ye  (m.  and  /.)  caused  to  surround.  He  caused  to  sur 
round.     We  caused  to  surround.     They  were  caused  if 


LESSONS    IN    WRITINU    KEiniKW.  15/ 

surround.  They  caused  to  surrouiiJ.  Cause  thou  {m, 
and  /.)  to  suri'ound.  I  shall  cause  to  surround.  Thev 
(jn.)  shall  be  caused  to  surround.  Causing  to  surround, 
Cause  ye  {m.  and  /.)  to  surround.  Ye  (m.  and  /.)  shall 
cause  to  surround.  Surrounding  one's  self.  We  excited. 
They  (m.  and  /.)  shall  excite. 

I  have  begun  to  give  you  this  land.  Thou  hast  begun 
to  speak  to  him.  Begin  to-day.  The  famine  began  this 
year.  In  those  days  (§  50)  Jehovah  began  to  send  into 
Judah  the  king  of  Edom.  She  began  to  ask.  We  began 
to  demolish  the  statues  and  the  pillars.  They  began. 
They  {on.  and  /'.)  will  begin.  They  rolled  the  stone  from 
upon  the  moutli  of  the  well.  The  stone  is  very  great ; 
who  shall  roll  it  for  us  ?  He  is  rolling  himself  upon  the 
ground.  I  shall  curse  thy  blessings.  He  began  to  curse 
and  to  say,  I  knoA\^  (^>/t^.)  not  the  man.  Curse  ye  bit- 
terly {ahs.  in  fin.)  the  city  and  its  inhabitants  (Heb.  the 
[ones]  inhabiting  it).  Cursed  is  the  man,  who  shall  eat 
thread  this  day.  Cursed  is  the  man,  who  will  not  hearken 
to  the  words  of  this  covenant.  I  took  thee  to  curse  them 
and  lo  !  thou  hast  blessed  them.  Thou  shalt  not  bles5 
them  and  thou  shalt  not  curse  them. 


21.  Pe  Yodh  Veebs,  §  58. 

Write  the  paradigm  of  iz^i  to  dwell,  and  the  Kal  of 
en^  to  he  dry. 

Translate : — 

To  dwell.  Dwell  thou  {m.  and  /.).  He  will  dwell. 
Ye  {m.  and  /.)  will  dwell  I  shall  dwell.  Thou  (m 
and  /.)  wilt  be  dwelt  (in).  She  was  dwelt  in.  Be  thou 
(m.  and  /.)  dwelt  in.  Causing  to  dwell.  They  were 
caused  to  dwell.     They  caused  to  dwell.     She  caused  to 


158  LESSONS   IN    WRITING    HEBREW. 

dwell.  We  were  caused  to  dwell.  Ye  (m.  and  /!)  v/i;re 
caused  to  dwell.  Cause  ye  (m.  and  y.)  to  dwell.  SIt' 
will  be  caused  to  dwell.  I  shall  cause  to  dwell.  Thou 
(w.  andy.)  shalt  be  dry.  Be  ye  (???..  and^.)  dry.  To 
l)e  dry. 

Ilast  thou  known  ?  Will  he  know  ?  Wilt  thou  let 
me  know  or  not?  Will  he  go?  Let  me  know  whether 
he  will  go  or  not.  They  will  go  to-day.  Hast  thou 
remembered  the  commandments  of  Jehovah  ?  Wilt  thou 
keep  them  or  not  ?  He  knows  (^2^ret.)  whether  thou  wilt 
keep  them.  Thou  knowest  whether  he  will  keep  them  or 
not.  Wilt  thou  bless  him  or  curse  him?  Who  shall 
dwell  in  thy  holy  place  (Heb.  place  of  thy  holiness)  ? 
Art  thou  my  son  or  not?  Tell  {He  jparag^  me,  I  pray 
thee,  whether  thou  art  my  son  ?  Tell  me  whether  thou 
art  my  son  or  not.  Will  the  tree  stand  or  fall?  He 
caused  us  to  go  in  the  wilderness,  where  ^  we  wearied  him 
and  did  not  walk  in  his  ways.  Where  did  we  weary  him  ? 
If  Jehovah  be  (the)  God,  go  after  him;  and  if  Baal, 
serve  him.  Whither  thou  wilt  go,  I  shall  go.  This  is  the 
man  to  whom  ye  shall  go.  To  whom  shall  we  go  ?  thou 
hast  the  words  of  life.  If  ye  will  serve  me  with  all  your 
heart,  then  {Yav  witli  pret.  Hem.  37)  will  I  cause  you  to 
dwell  in  this  land  forever. 

'  Observe  in  this  and  the  following  sentences  the  distinction  between  the  rela- 
fciye  and  the  interrogative. 

22.  A  YIN  Vav  and  a  YIN  YoDH  Verbs,  §  59. 

Write  the  paiadigm  of  Dip  to  rise  and  the  Kal  of  nil  it 
contend. 

Translate : — 

Ye  (w.  and  y.)  rose.  He  rose.  They  rose.  We  rose 
She  rose.     They  {ni.  and  y.)  will  rise.     Rise  thou    {in 


LESSONS    IN    WRrj'lNG    HPZEREW. 


15S 


and  y!).  We  shall  rise.  He  will  rise.  Rise  ye  (m.  and 
/'.).  T(^  rise.  Eising.  Risen.  To  be  risen.  Ye  {fn. 
and  y.)  will  be  I'isen.  I  shall  ])e  risen.  Thou  (jn.  and 
/'.)  wilt  be  risen.  She  was  risen.  We  were  risen.  I 
was  risen.  Thou  {m.  and  /.)  wast  risen.  He  was  risen. 
Ye  (/??.  and  f.)  were  risen.  They  were  risen.  He  will 
be  risen.  He  raised.  We  shall  laise.  He  will  l^e  raised, 
lie  was  raised.     Raisins;.     Raised. 

T  caused  to  rise.  Ye  Qi/i.  and  f.)  caused  to  rise.  She 
caused  to  rise.  He  caused  to  rise.  They  caused  to  rise. 
Tliou  {m.  and  /.)  didst  cause  to  rise.  They  (m.  and  /.) 
will  cause  to  rise.  Thou  (jn.  and  f.)  wilt  cause  to  rise. 
Cause  ye  {m.  and  /.)  to  rise.  We  shall  cause  to  rise. 
Cause  thou  (w.  and  f.)  to  rise.  Causing  to  rise.  I  shall 
be  caused  to  rise.  They  were  caused  to  rise.  Raise  thy- 
self (771.  and  /.).  She  raised  herself.  Thou  (m.  and  /.) 
didst  contend.  I  contended.  He  contended.  She  will 
contend.     Contend  thou  (m.  and  /!).     Contending. 

He  came  to  his  house.  They  came  to  him  and  ate 
bread  with  him.  Whence  hast  thou  come  ?  Wlience  are 
ye  coming  ?  Whither  didst  thou  go  ?  Whither  art  thon 
going?  Wilt  thou  come  to  me  to-night?  Come  and 
lodge  with  me.  Bring  thy  father  and  thy  mother  with 
thee.  We  came  to  the  well  and  there  was  no  water  in- 
it.  Bring  [ye]  my  tunic.  Gold  and  silver  shall  be 
brought.  They  brought  to  him  gold  and  incense.  She 
shall  return  to  her  former  state.  Return  from  your  evil 
ways  and  serve  Jehovah.  We  are  from  dust  and  shall 
return  to  dust.  The  virgins  will  return  bringing  watei 
from  the  well.  Bi'ing  back  the  silver  which  ye  have 
taken  from  me.  They  brought  him  back  to  the  city  in 
joy  and  gladness.  They  shall  be  brought  back  to  this 
land.  He  shall  die.  We  shall  die.  They  put  him  to 
death.     He  was  put  to  death.    She  shall  be  put  to  deatk 


lf)0  lessons  in  wiuting  hebrew. 

23.  Lamedh  Alepii  Vekbs,  §  60. 
Write  tlie  paradigm  of  «i^  to  find. 

Translate : — 

Ye  {rti.  and  /.)  found.  "We  were  found.  Tliou  {m. 
and  /)  didst  find  out.  They  caused  to  find.  I  found 
myself.  He  was  found.  To  cause  to  find.  To  be  found. 
Finding  one's  self.  They  {in.  and/)  will  cause  to  find. 
Ye  (m.  and/.)  will  find.  She  will  be  found.  He  Avill 
find.  Ye  (m.  and/)  will  find  out.  Find  ye  {in.  and/). 
Cause  ye  {rti.  and/)  to  find.     Ye  were  found. 

I  shall  call  to  him  and  he  will  hear  my  voice.  They 
called  the  name  of  the  city  Ur  of  the  Chaldees.  Call  ye 
this  young  man.  Call  to  me  in  the  day  of  evil ;  I  will 
deliver  thee.  Thy  name  shall  not  be  called  Naomi; 
thou  shalt  be  called  (Heb.  to  thee  shall  be  called)  Mara. 
Jehovah  brought  you  out  from  that  land.  I  shall  bring 
A- on  out  from  all  the  lands  in  which  ye  are  and  will  give 
you  this  good  land  which  I  sware  to  your  fathers.  He 
created  the  earth  and  the  sea ;  and  the  heavens  are  the 
work  of  his  hands.  My  hands  have  created  all  these. 
Thou  didst  ci-eate  man  and  beast  upon  the  earth.  Bring 
us  out  fi-om  all  evil.  Fill  the  vessels  large  and  small 
with  water.  Thou  hast  filled  the  earth  with  thy  mercy. 
The  house  was  full  of  men  and  women.  He  caused  it  to 
rain  upon  the  earth  and  filled  our  hearts  with  food  and 
gladness. 

24.  Lamedii  He  Verbs,  §  61. 
Write  the  paradigm  of  n^a . 

Translate : — 

They  revealed.     We  revealed.      She  revealed.     I  re- 


LESSONS    IN    WRITING    HEBREW.  J  61 

vesiled.  Thou  (m.  aud /".)  wast  revealed,  tic  was  re 
vealed.  I  was  revealed.  Ye  {?7i.  and  /.)  uiicovertd. 
They  uncovered.  He  was  uncovered.  We  were  uncov- 
ered. She  was  exiled.  Thou  (7/1.  and /.)  wasfc  exiled. 
Thou  {m.  andy.)  didst  exile.  They  exiled.  I  uncovered 
myself.  To  exile.  To  uncover.  To  be  revealed.  To 
reveal.  Thou  (m.  andy.)  wilt  be  revealed.  I  shall  re- 
veal. He  will  uncover.  We  shall  be  uncovered.  They 
(?n.  andy.)  will  exile.  She  shall  be  exiled.  Be  ye  (jri. 
andy.)  revealed.     Uncover  thyself  (w.  andy!).     Reveal 

The  house  was  built  in  the  city.  My  father  built  it. 
He  began  to  build  it  and  my  brother  finished  it.  I  have 
finished  the  work  which  thou  gavest  me  to  do.  Who 
will  build  an  altar  in  this  place  to  Jehovah  ?  They  built 
a  dwelling  for  him  in  Jerusalem.  All  the  nations  shall 
go  up  to  Jerusalem  to  serve  Jehovah.  To  go  up  and  to 
go  down.  They  offered  burnt-offerings  upon  the  altar. 
I  did  as  Jehovah  commanded  me.  Bring  him  up  to  me 
in  the  bed.  And  it  came  to  pass  (Heb.  it  was)  as  he  fin- 
ished to  offer  the  burnt-offering  that  (Heb.  and)  fire  fell 
from  heaven.  They  made  for  him  a  throne  of  gold. 
Solomon  built  him  a  house.  Wilt  thou  dwell  in  this 
house  which  has  been  built  for  thy  name  ?  He  went  u]-) 
into  heaven.  He  shall  descend  a  second  time  from  hea- 
ven.    Jehovah  appeared  to  Solomon  in  Gibeon. 

25.  Numerals,  §  65. 

Direction  8.  The  preposition  o/"  following  a  cardinal 
number  must  be  expressed  by  ya ,  thus  D'^p^sn  ya  niE'an 
^ve  nf  the  horses^  not  D''6i5n  riB'ar|  which  would  mean 
the  five  horses  ;  nn^  nynip'  seve7i  of  them,  not  Dnyain  whicL 
v^-^ould  mean  they  seven. 


r-1 


1(>S  LESS0K8    IN    WKITING    HEBEEW. 

9.  lu  comi^oiind  numbers  insert  tlie  conjunction  and 
between  tlie  different  denominations,  wliicli  may  proceed 
eitlier  from  the  higlier  to  the  lower  or  the  reverse ;  thus 
for  sixty -five  write  either  sixty  and  five  oy  five  and  sixty. 

Write  the  masculine  absolute  of  the  cardinals  from  one 
to  ten  in  their  order.  Write  the  present  date,  year, 
month,  and  day. 

Translate,  noting  each  case  in  which  different  forms 
may  be  used,  or  in  which  the  order  of  the  words  may  be 
varied: — 

Four  heads.  Ten  seas.  Twelve  nations.  Thirty  ei 
the  Philistines.  Fifty  days.  A  hundred  men.  Six  nights. 
Eight  shekels.  Three  years.  The  seven  stars.  Seven 
of  the  stars.  Seven  stars.  These  seven  stars.  Tweity 
rocks.  Eleven  women.  Nine  kings.  Two  vessels.  Nino 
virgins.  Five  stones.  Twenty-four  priests.  Sixty  houses. 
Sixteen  months.  Eighty  queens.  Six  hundred  years. 
Three  hundred  and  sixty-five  days.  In  the  fifth  year  of 
(Heb.  to)  king  Solomon,  in  the  tenth  month,  in  the  second 
iay  of  the  month.  In  the  twenty-first  of  the  eighth 
month.  In  the  third  of  this  month.  The  third  [part]  of 
the  month.  The  fourth  [part]  of  the  year.  The  eighth 
[part]  of  the  shekel  The  eighth  shekel.  Eight  of  the 
shekels.  He  is  eight  years  old.  She  is  nineteen  years 
ohl.  All  the  days  of  Adam  were  nine  hundred  years  and 
thirty  years  and  he  died, 

26.    To    ACCOMPANY  GeN.  1  I  1. 

Heaven.  Earth.  In  heaven.  In  earth.  The  heaven. 
The  earth.  In  the  heaven  and  in  the  earth.  Beginning 
In  [the]  beginning.  He  created.  God  created.  I 
created.  In  [the]  beginning  thou  createdst  the  earth 
and  the  heaven.     Creating.     God  the  creator  of  (lit.  the 


LESSOJSfS    IN    WKITING    llEBKEW.  163 

[one]  creating)  the  heaven  He  will  create.  Thou  wilt 
(Teate.  I  shall  create  an  earth  and  heaven.  He  wa^ 
created  (Niphal).  We  were  created.  Thou  wast  created. 
I  Avas  created.  Ye  were  created.  In  [the]  beginning 
were  created  the  heaven  and  the  earth.  In  [the]  l)egin- 
ning  was  created  the  earth.  [There]  will  be  created  an 
(  arth.     [There]  will  be  created  a  heaven. 


27.  Gen.  1  :  2. 

Darkness.  The  darkness.  And  the  darkness.  In 
darkness.  In  the  darkness.  And  in  the  darkness.  Face. 
The  face.  The  face  of  [the]  deep.  The  face  of  the 
heaven.  He  was.  I  was.  We  were.  Ye  were.  Thou 
wast.  He  will  be.  I  shall  be.  We  shall  be.  They  will 
be.  The  earth  will  be  waste  and  void  (desolation  and 
emptiness).  Darkness  was  on  the  waters  and  on  the  face 
of  the  earth.  Spirit.  '  The  Spirit.  The  Spirit  of  God 
brooded  over  the  deep.  The  Spirit  will  brood.  In  the 
beginning  the  Sjjirit  [was]  brooding  over  the  waters. 
God  created  the  darkness  and  the  waters.  The  deep  was 
created.  And  the  w^aters  of  the  deep  were  waste  and 
void. 

28.  Gen.  1 :  3,  4. 

He  said.  They  said.  And  he  said  (Vav  Conv.).  And 
they  said.  I  said.  Ye  said.  We  shall  say.  She  Avill 
say.  We  saw.  They  saw.  He  saw.  And  he  saw.  He 
will  see.  God  [is]  seeing  in  the  light  and  in  the  dark- 
ness. The  waters  were  see  a  (Niph.).  The  earth  was 
seen.  The  light  will  be  seen.  God  saw  the  light.  Good 
light.  Light  [is]  good.  The  good  light.  The  light  [is] 
good.     God  is"good.     God  is^  (Heb.  he,  §67,  2)  light^ 


164  LF-SSONS    IN    WRITING    HEBREW. 

fie  saw  tliat  tbe  liglit  was  good.  God  divided  between 
the  eartli  and  tlie  heaven.  God  [is]  dividing  between 
the  darkness  and  the  light.  The  waters  were  divided. 
They  will  l^e  divided.  I  divided.  Ye  divided  Thou 
wilt  divide.     Divide  thou. 

29.  Gen.  1:6,6. 

Day  and  night.  The  day  and  the  night.  In  the  day 
and  in  the  night.  To  the  days  and  to  the  nights.  To 
divide  between  days  and  nights.  We  shall  call.  We 
called.  And  we  called  (Vav  Con  v.).  Thou  didst  call 
the  finnament  heaven.  I  called  the  darkness  night,  and 
the  light  I  called  day.  The  light  (Heb.  to  the  light) 
shall  be  called  day.  It  was  evening.  One  evening. 
One  morning.  One  God.  One  earth.  In  the  midst  of 
the  earth.  In  the  midst  of  the  heaven.  Between  the 
heaven  and  the  earth  (two  constructions).  God  shall  say 
to  the  waters,  Be  ye  divided.  Let  there  be  light.  Let 
there  be  darkness.  God  saw  the  firmament.  The  firma- 
ment [is]  good. 

30.  Gen.  1  :  7,  8. 

God  made  the  day  and  the  night.  Thou  madest  the 
firmament.  Thou  didst  divide  the  waters.  I  shall  make. 
He  will  make.  And  he  made  (Vav  Conv.).  I  made  the 
earth  and  the  waters.  We  were  made.  The  earth  was 
made.  The  waters  were  made.  I  made  the  heaven 
which  [is]  above  the  earth  and  the  earth  which  [is]  undei 
the  heaven,  and  the  waters  which  [are]  under  the  earth. 
He  divided  the  day  from  the  night.  Light  was  made  in 
one  day,  and  the  firmament  was  created  in  a  second  day 
And  he  called  the  beginoing  of  the  day  morning,  and  the 
be'Hnnin.o-  of  the  night  he  called  evening.      A  second 


LESSOINS    IN    WElTLNa    HEBREW.  165 

morning.     The  second  evening.     And  it  was  so.     And  he 
did  so. 

31.  Gef.  1  :  9,  10. 

Tliey  were  gathered.  Ye  were  gathered.  We  were 
gathered.  And  they  were  gathered.  Ye  shall  be  gather 
od  To  be  gathered.  Being  gathered.  He  said  to  the 
waters,  Be  ye  gathered  unto  the  seas.  The  waters  which 
were  under  the  heaven  were  gathered  unto  one  place,  and 
the  waters  which  were  above  the  lieaven  were  gathered 
unto  a  second  place.  The  dry  [land]  was  seen.  Tlie 
sea  was  seen.  See  thou  the  earth  and  the  heaven.  He 
made  the  waters  which  are  in  the  sea.  They  called  the 
dry  [land]  earth.  The  collection  (gathering  together)  of 
waters  shall  be  called  sea.  The  God  of  heaven  made  the 
sea  and  the  dry  land.  He  divided  the  sea  from  the  diy 
land.     He  said  and  it  was  [done]. 

32.    Gen.  1  :  11-13. 

God  said  to  the  earth,  Bring  forth  (either  of  two  verbs) 
grass.  The  earth  brought  forth  herb  and  tree.  Grass 
sprang  up.  Grass  was  brought  forth.  He  said  to  the 
herb,  Produce  seed,  and  it  was  so.  The  herb  produced 
seed  (according)  to  its  kind.  I  have  sown  the  seed.  Ye 
have  sowE  They  have  sown.  In  the  morning  sow  thou 
the  seed.  The  seed  was  sown  in  the  evening.  The  herb 
will  produce  seed.  The  tree  will  yield  fruit.  A  fruit- 
tree.  The  fruit-tree  (§•  75.  5).  The  seed  of  the  fruit-tree 
is  in  the  fruit.  To  the  tree  yielding  fruit  [there]  is  seed 
according  to  its  kind.  The  fruit,  whose  seed  is  in  it.  Seas, 
in  the  midst  of  which  are  waters.  A  day  in  which  therf 
is  light.     A  night  in  which  there  is  darkness, 


Ififi  LESSONS   IN    WRITING   HEBREW. 


3S.   Gen.  1  :  14-16. 

Let  there  be  light.  Let  there  be  a  light  (lamina ry) 
One  great  light.  The  second  small  light.  IVo  greal 
lights.  The  two  small  lights.  Two  of  (Heb.  from)  tlif 
small  lights,  which  (Heb.  to  ^vhich)  they  have  called 
stars.  The  stars  will  give  light  in  the  night.  He  made 
one  light  for  the  rule  of  the  day.  The  second  light  was 
made  for  the  rule  of  the  night.  He  divided  between 
lights  and  lights  (Heb.  to  lights).  Thou  didst  divide  be- 
tween the  great  lights  and  the  stars.  God  created  the 
lights  and  said  (Vav.  Conv.)  to  them,  Give  light  upon  the 
earth  and  divide  day  from  night ;  and  it  was  so.  There 
shall  be  signs  in  the  heaven  and  in  the  earth.  One  sea- 
son. A  second  day.  The  third  year.  Two  years  and 
two  days.     Let  there  be  stars  giving  light  in  the  night. 


34.  Gen.  1:17-20. 

In  the  fourth  day  God  made  the  two  great  lights  and 
the  stars  and  in  the  firmament  of  heaven  he  set  (Heb. 
gave)  them.  He  set  the  firmament  above  the  earth  and 
the  eai'th  above  the  sea.  I  gave.  They  gave.  We  gave. 
Thou  gavest.  She  gave.  Giving.  To  give.  He  will 
give.  We  shall  give.  Given.  Ye  will  give.  One  light 
ruled  the  day.  A  second  light  shall  rule  the  night. 
Thou  [art]  ruling  the  earth  and  the .  sea.  (rod  saw  that 
the  lights  [were]  good.  He  made  the  reptiles  (collective) 
M'hicli  are  in  the  waters.  He  divided  between  the  rep 
tile  and  the  fowl.  A  soul  of  life.  The  soul  of  life; 
Thou  raadest  the  soul  of  life  which  is  in  the  fowl  and  in 
tjie  reptile.     In  the  morning  they  flew  away. 


LESSONS   Uf    WltlTljSG    IIEEIIEW.  J  07 

85.  Gen.  1:21-23. 

They  we 'e  fniitfiil  and  multiplied  (Vav  Con  v.)  and 
filled  tlie  earth  and  the  sea.  The  waters  |'are]  filling 
(Pie!)  the  sea.  The  sea  shall  be  filled.  The  stars  shal] 
fdl  the  heavens.  The  moving  soul  of  life  shall  be  fruitful 
and  multiply  upon  the  earth.  Great  monsters.  The 
great  monsters.  All  the  great  monsters  of  the  sea.  The 
monsters  of  the  sea  are  great.  God  created  them  and 
he  will  bless  them.  He  blessed  the  winged  fowl  and 
every  soul  of  life  which  he  had  made.  He  caused  the 
fowl  to  multiply  in  the  earth  and  the  monsters  in  the 
seas.  Blessed  be  God.  Bless  ye  God.  Bless  God,  0 
my  soul.  God  is  blessing  (Piel)  every  morning  and  every 
evening. 

36.  Gen.  1:24-27. 

The  beast  of  the  earth  was  made  after  its  kind.  Man 
was  created  in  the  likeness  of  God,  and  in  his  image. 
The  earth  brought  forth  cattle  and  reptile  creeping  upon 
the  ground.  God  made  lights  for  the  rule  of  the  day  and 
of  the  night;  and  the  man  he  created  for  the  rule  of 
the  earth.  Thou  didst  make  man  according  to  thine 
image  and  in  thy  likeness.  Man  (Heb.  with  ai  ti- 
de) was  made  in  the  image  of  him  that  created  (Heb. 
the  [one]  creating)  him.  Rule  thou  over  the  fish  of  llie 
sea  and  have  dominion  over  all  the  earth.  Let  the  fish 
nuiltiply  in  the  sea.  The  fowl  shall  fly  over  the  face  of 
heaven.  He  made  them  male  and  female.  Every  beast 
of  the  earth  was  made  male  and  female. 

37.  Gen.  1:28-31. 

Subdue  ye  the  earth  and  fill  it  and  multiply  upon  it 
and  have  dominion  over  all  which  is  in  it.     God  blessed 


/G8  LESSONS    IN    VVlilTlNG    IIEHKP]\V. 

all  that  lie  Lad  made.  He  saw  tliat  it  was  very  gci»d 
He  gave  to  the  man  tlie  fruit  of  the  eai'th  for  food. 
Thou  hast  given  to  us  every  lierlx  To  the  beast  of  the 
earth  every  green  herb  was  given.  It  will  be  given.  Tc 
be  given.  Give  thou.  Give  ye.  See  thou  what  God 
has  made.  He  made  light  in  one  day.  In  a  second 
day  he  made  the  firmament.  In  a  third  day  the  diy 
[land J  was  seen  and  it  brought  forth  herb  and  trees. 
In  a  fourth  day  he  made  the  great  and  small  liglits.  In 
a  fifth  day  bii'ds  and  fish  were  made.  In  a  sixth  day  he 
made  cattle  and  created  man  (Heb.  "with  article)  in  the 
image  of  God. 

38.  Gen.  2:1-5. 

The  earth  was  finished.  The  host  of  heaven  was  fin- 
ished. The  earth  and  the  heaven  were  finished.  I  liave 
finished  my  work.  Thou  hast  not  finished  thy  work. 
We  have  not  yet  finished  our  work.  They  will  finish 
their  work.  Your  work  will  be  finished  and  ye  will  rest 
These  generations.  These  are  the  generations.  These  are 
the  generations  of  Adam.  These  two  generations.  This 
day.  This  seventh  day.  This  is  the  day  which  God  has 
blessed.  This  is  the  seventh  day  in  which  God  i-ested, 
and  which  he  sanctified.  No  tree  was  yet  in  the  ground. 
The  earth  had  not  yet  brought  forth  herb  nor  (Heb.  and) 
bush.  In  the  fifth  day  there  was  no  man  and  l^east  of 
the  field  there  was  none,  for  they  had  not  yet  been 
created. 

39.  Gen.  2:6-10. 

This  is  the  earth  which  God  created  and  made  (Heb 
[so  as]  to  make).  God  blessed  tliem  and  said  (Hel).  [sr 
as]  to  say,  or  with  Vav  Conv.)  to  them,  Be  fi'uitful 


LESSONS    IN    WRITING    ITEBREW.  16^ 

feiilxlue  tlie  earth  and  rule  (Heb.  to  rule)  over  it.  God 
caused  it  to  rain  and  watered  the  face  of  the  earth.  He 
causes  it  to  rain  (fut.  §  78,  3)  and  waters  the  ground. 
A  mist  [is]  ascending  from  the  sea  and  the  earth  will  be 
watered.  We  are  as  the  grass,  which  sprouted  in  the 
morning  and  in  the  evening  shall  not  be.  This  is  youi 
breath  which  Jehovah  breathed  in  your  nostrils.  He 
l^laced  Adam  in  the  garden  which  he  had  planted  and  in 
which  he  had  caused  to  grow  every  tree  good  for  food. 
Four  rivers.  The  four  rivers.  The  four  heads  of  the 
river.  The  six  heads.  The  two  gardens.  Three  days 
and  three  nights.  Five  mornings  and  five  evenings. 
One  small  star. 

40.  Gen.  2:11-16. 

Thou  didst  form  Adam  of  dust.  He  made  the  man 
(Heb.  to)  a  living  souL  A  great  river  is  surrounding 
the  land  in  which  there  is  gold.  The  name  of  the  garden 
is  Eden.  They  called  the  garden  Eden.  The  garden 
shall  be  called  Eden.  In  the  midst  of  the  garden  were 
two  trees;  the  one  was  called  the  tree  of  life  and  he 
called  the  name  of  the  second  the  tree  of  knowing  good 
and  evil.  The  place,  where  the  garden  of  Eden  was,  is 
not  known.  He  went.  I  went.  He  will  go.  We  shall 
go.  To  go.  Going.  He  took  the  man.  He  took  him. 
He  took  her.  He  took  us.  He  took  you.  He  took  me. 
lie  took  thee.  He  will  take  the  tree.  Keep  the  seventh 
Jay  and  (Heb.  to)  sanctify  it. 

41., Gen.  2:17-20. 

Adam  ate  of  the  evil  fruit  and  died.     This  fruit  is 
good;  thou  mayest  freely  eat  (Heb.  emphatic  infin.)  of 
it.     He  ale  it.     She  ate  it.    We  ate  it.     Thou  shalt  eat 
8 


170  LESSOJ^S   IN    WKITING    HEBREW. 

it.  Ye  shall  eat  it.  They  shall  eat  it.  Ye  ate  it.  Ye 
ate  of  (Heb.  from)  it.  It  is  not  good  for  Adam  to  eat  of 
it.  He  formed  him.  He  formed  her.  He  formed  us 
Thou  formedst  us.  I  formed  you.  I  formed  them.  1 
formed  him.  Thou  didst  put  Adam  in  the  garden  to  till 
it.  He  tilled  the  ground  and  kept  it.  Every  beast  of 
the  field  came  to  Adam.  In  the  cattle  of  the  field,  the 
beast  of  the  earth,  the  fish  of  the  sea,  and  the  fowd  of 
heaven  there  was  not  found  a  help  the  counterpart  of 
Adam.  God  gave  name  (Heb.  called  names)  to  the  day 
and  to  the  night. 

42.  Gen.  2:21-25. 

Adam  slept  because  a  deep  sleep  from  God  had  fallen 
upon  him  (§  66.  2).  A  rib  was  taken  and  was  made  (Heb. 
built)  into  a  woman  and  she  was  brought  to  him.  One 
bone.  His  bone.  His  one  bone.  Two  ribs.  Her  ribs. 
Her  two  ribs.  One  of  (Direction  8,  Lesson  25)  his  bones. 
Two  of  her  ribs.  Our  three  gardens.  Three  of  our  gar- 
dens. Four  of  their  evenings.  Five  of  your  rivers.  Six 
of  the  heads,  into  which  the  river  was  parted.  Two  of 
the  men.  Two  of  the  women.  They  two,  the  man  and 
tlie  woman.  Two  of  them.  The  woman  left  her  father 
and  her  mother  and  clave  to  her  husband.  My  mother 
has  forsaken  me.  My  father  and  my  mother  will  not 
forsake  me.  Thou  shalt  do  all  that  tliy  father  and  thy 
mother  shall  command  thee. 


43.  Gen.  3:1-5. 

The  cunning  serpent.  This  tree  is  tlie  best  of  all  the 
trees  (Heb.  collective)  in  tlie  garden.  The  man  was  the 
greatest  of  all  the  men  of  [the]  east.     The  stars  are  tli€ 


LESSONS    IN    WRITING    HEBREW  171 

smallest  of  all  the  lights  in  the  firmament.  The  sea  is 
greater  than  the  dry  [land].  Dying  (emphat.  inhn.)  he 
shall  die.  We  shall  die.  I  shall  die.  He  died.  She 
died.  They  died.  Dying.  He  killed  (caused  to  die). 
They  killed.  He  was  put  to  death.  She  shall  be  put  to 
death.  He  said  to  the  woman,  Thou  shalt  not  touch 
the  tree  lest  thou  die.  Touch  thou  this  fruit.  I 
touched  it  and  my  eyes  were  opened  and  I  knew  good 
and  evil.  In  the  day  of  thy  touching  this  tree  (§  89.  3) 
thou  and  thy  wife  shall  die  (§  86.  1). 

44.  Gen.  3  :  6-10. 

The  woman's  eyes  were  opened  and  she  saw.  She  gave 
of  the  fruit  to  Adam  and  he  saw  and  ate.  A  desirable 
tree.  The  desirable  tree.  The  tree  is  desirable.  He  took 
of  it.  She  took  it.  Ye  took  it.  We  shall  take.  They 
ry.)  will  take.  Its  fruit  was  taken  and  eaten  and  it 
opened  her  eyes.  Open  thou  mine  eyes  and  I  shall  see. 
Both  her  eyes.  The  eyes  of  them  both.  Two  of  their 
eyes.  Their  four  eyes.  They  heard  Jehovah  walking ^ 
Slie  heard  the  voice  of  Jehovah  [who  was^J  walking  in 
the  midst  of  the  trees.  I  saw  the  man  eating  ^  Where  is 
lie  ?  Here  he  is  (Heb.  behold  him  !).  Where  art  thou  ? 
Here  I  am.  I  heard  the  tree  falling  \  The  falling  waters. 
We  saw  the  stars  falling  from  heaven.  The  woman  ami 
her  husband  hid  themselves. 

'  The  participle  being  a  predicate  -will  not  agree  with  its  subject  Jehovah  U 
d.efiniteness,  and  hence  must  not  receive  the  article,  Remark  23,  Lesson  13. 
^  See  Remark  8,  Lesson  7. 

45.  Gen.  3  :  11-15. 

Who  commanded  thee  not  to  do  this  evil  [thing] /em.  ? 
Not  to  hear.      Not  to  see.     Not  to  walk  in  the  gardea 


172  LESSONS    IN    WRITING    HEBREW. 

I  shall  command  the  stars  not  to  give  light  in  tlie  night 
Who  did  this?  Didst  thou  see  tlie  woman  who  ate 
(Heb.  the  [one]  eating)  this  fruit  ?  Did  the  serpent  de 
ceive  the  woman  ?  Eat  ye  of  it  and  bless  Jehovah.  1 
shall  not  eat  the  fruit  which  he  has  commanded  me  not 
to  eat.  What  is  this,  the  woman  has  done  ?  What  are 
these  ?  Who  are  these  ?  The  serpent  is  the  most 
accursed  of  all  cattle.  Thy  mother  is  the  most  blessed  of 
all  women.  Thou  art  the  greatest  of  all  men.  I  told  him. 
It  was  told  to  me.  The  serpent  bruised  his  heel  (Heb 
him  [as  to]  heel).     He  shall  bruise  the  serpent's  head. 

46.  Gen.  3:16-19. 

I  shall  bless  them  that  bless  (Heb.  blessing)  thee,  and 
curse  them  that  curse  (Heb.  cursing)  thee,  and  all  the 
aarth  shall  be  blessed  in  thee.  The  woman  heard  the 
voice  of  the  serpent.  The  woman  hearkened  to  the  voice 
of  the  serpent.  The  man  hearkened  to  the  voice  of  his 
wife,  and  ate  the  fruit  of  which  God  had  commanded  him 
not  to  eat.  The  woman  bare  three  sons.  Sons  were 
born  to  him.  They  shall  be  born.  I  was  born.  We 
were  born.  These  are  the  names  of  the  sons  of  Adam. 
Whose  son  art  thou  ?  Return  to  dust  (ye)  sons  of  man. 
We  returned.  Have  they  returned  i  Will  they  (/.) 
return  ?  He  brought  them  back  (caused  them  to  return). 
Tliey  shall  be  brought  back  to  the  garden  of  the  Lord. 

47.  Gen.  3  :  20-24. 

Adam  called  (Heb.  to)  the  woman  Eve.  The  woman 
was  called  Eve.  The  woman's  name  was  Eve.  God 
called  his  name  Adam,  and  said,  Because  from  the  ground 
I  have  taken  him.    Did  he  not  call  the  man  Adam,  accord 


LESSONS    liSr    WRITING    HKISUEW.  17S 

iiig'  to  the  name  of  the  ground  from  wlience  he  had  taken 
liim  ?  Men  have  given  (Ileb.  called)  names  to  the  stars 
of  heaven.  God  called  the  name  of  the  firmament  hea- 
ven, and  gave  names  to  the  day  ami  to  the  night.  See 
thou  the  ground  from  whence  thou  wast  taken.  Take 
ye  of  the  food  \vlncli  1  have  brought  for  you  and  eat 
of  it.  Coats  of  skin  were  made  for  the  man  and  for  the 
^voman  and  they  were  clothed.  These  God  gave  to  them 
instead  of  the  fig-leaves  which  they  had  sewed  for  them- 
selves. He  said  to  him,  Put  forth  thy  hand,  and  he  put 
it  forth.  1  shall  send  (Kal)  him,  I  shall  send  her.  He 
will  send  us.  He  will  not  send  them.  He  has  com- 
manded us  not  to  send  yon.  Ye  will  send  me  a^vay 
(Piel).  We  shall  send  thee  away.  I  shall  drive  you  out 
(Piel)  from  my  garden.  He  will  keep  me.  Thou  wilt 
keep  tbem. 


HEBREW-ENGLISH  VOCABILARY. 


nij    n.    in.    (const,    "'^is ,    pi. 

nins)  father 
nix  V.  K.  (fi<s)  to  perish.   P. 

fo  destroy 
■jnij  11.  m.  f.  6^  stoTz-e 
IS?  n.  m.  7nist^  vapor 
oils  n.  in.  Edom 
pnx  n.  m.  lord^  niiaster 
D'ii?  n.  m.  man 
r.'a'is  u.  f.  grouvd^  land 
''b'lsi:  n.  in.  Lord 
nns  or  :inx  v.  K.  to  love 
bn'si  11.  111.   (D^^ns?)  tent 
pns  n,  m.  Aaron 
nix  V.  K.  N.  to  shine.     H.  /o 

cause  to  shine^  give  light 
"\i«  n.  m.  ?^(/A^ 
•^^s  n.  Ur 

nis  n.  m.  f.  (ni)  sign 
TS  adv.  tJien 
•jTi?  n.  f.  (D^?Ti?)  ear 
ns   11.    m.    (const,    ""nx,    pi. 

D^ns?)  brother 
nijns?  n.  m.  ^Aa^^ 
•ina?  adj.  one 
nins  n.  f  s^'s^r 


"ins?  prep,  after 

^s?  adv.  (suf.  i'^s?)  loheref 

nn"^s5  11.  i., enmity 

niix  adv.  lohere  ? 

nDD'is  adv.  Z'Oi^  .^ 

1:^^     (const.     r«)     nothing 

there  is  not  or  ?i;t/^s  /iOi5 
"i^s  adv.  'cohere  f   only  aftei 

1^  ,  'j>^'a  whence  f 
nE"iN  11.  f.  ephah 
ti"^s  n.  111.  (D''tD:i|:)  '/>z,«7i,  A?^s 

hand^  each 
biij  V.  K.   («B)  /6>  ^«?!.     H. 

?!6>  cause  to  eat 
bs^  adv.  not 
bs  11.  m.  6^(9(;^ 

"bs  prep,  to,  unto,  respecting 
nb^?  see  nr 
nibs    commonly   in   the    pL 

Q^n'bx  n.  m.  Ood 
nbbs5  n.  m.  Eleazar 
DS  n.  f.  (niiss)  mother 
DS?  conj.  ?y,  in  a  disjuncti«re 

question  or 
'j'QiJ  V.  N.  to  he  verified.,  foun(] 

true 


176 


UEBKEW-ENGLISH    VOCABUJiAIiV. 


nsttx  11.  Amanah 
cb'as  adv.  truly^  indeed 
n-ay  Y  K.  (ks)  to  say.    K 

to  he  said 
npi?  adv.  whither  f 
©i:t?  11.  m.  man. 
"':!!)! ,  ^35i?  pron.  / 
51S  n.  m.  (D^Si?)  nostril^  face 
51*?  conj.   also.^   even;   ''S   Pis? 

how  much  m^ore  or  after  a 

negative  how  much  less; 

Gen.  iii.  1,  is  it   even    so 

that  f 
nSii?  n.  m.  ashes 
nani?!  n.  f.  lattice^  window 
Hi^a'iN  num.  four 
D^ya^s?  num.  forty 
X^"^^  n.  m.  f.  arh 
fix  n,  m.  f.  (ni)  6?«ri5A,  Z«?i(:/ 
nns  V.  K.  P.  to  curse.     N. 

Ho.  to  he  cursed 
13'i'ii^  n.  Ararat 
CN  n.  m.  i.  fire 
nf  s?  11.   f.    (const,   nox ,  pi. 

B^'TCp)  woman.,  loife 
Tirs?  pron.  -^tj/ic,  lohich;  conj. 

^/z-«^,  hecause;  ^'^!^'^.  as 
nnirj?  n.  f.  (d\  and  tr\) pillar 
r)X  sign  of  the  definite  object 
tii?  prep,  toith 
nni?  m.,  r^«  f.  pron.  ^/iow 

a  prep,  in,  into,  at,  with 
"issa  n.  f.  a  wdl 


"155  n.  01.  garment,  pi.  clothes 

"la   11.    111.    separation;    i'll'j 

^7i    /i^s    separation,    i.   e. 

^13  V.  H.  to  separate,  divide, 

N.  to  he  separated 
nbHa  n.  hdellium 
^ni  n.  m.  emptiness 
n^na  n.  f.  Zf^as^^,  <?<3^^^Z(3 
sia  V.  K.  (fut.  Nia;')  to  come. 

H.  to  ca'265e  to  come,  hring. 

Ho.  to  ^5  hrouglit 
I'^a  prep,  hetween 
n'pa  n.  m.  (D'^r^a)  Ac^-z^se 
■'pba  adv.  Qiot,  used  with  the 

infinitive 
ia  n.  m.  (n''?^)  son 
nba  V.  K.  to  huild 
I'^a^a  prep.  c>?i  account  of 
b?a  n.  m.  Baal,  lord 
"i)?a  n.  m.  morning 
sna  V.  K.  to  <?r6(2to.    N.  to  6^ 

created 
Tna  n.  m.  7w/^7 
nina  h,  f.  covenaroi 
^■ia  V.  K.  P.  to  Z/^^ss.   N.  Pu, 

to  (^6  blessed 
nina  n.  f.  «  hlessing 
"lica  n.  m.  /<?sA 
na  n.  f.  (suf.  ina ,  pi.  niia) 

daughter 
nS^na  n.  f.  virgin 

bxa  V.  K  to  redeem..  P.  to  ci^/?/f 


HEBREW-ENGLISH    VOCABULAUY. 


177 


^ii^aa  n.  Gibeoit 

biiii  adj.  great^  large 

^ia  V.  K.  (flit,  a)  to  be  great. 
P.  to  malce  great 

■'■15  n.  in.  nation 

l^na  n.  m.  belly 

lin"^5  n.  Gilion 

b^5  \r.  K.  to  ^'oZZ 

D5  coiij.  also.,  even 

^^^05  n.  m.  benefit 

■ja  n.  m.  (d"*??)  garden 

^"^a  V.  K.  P.  to  drive  out 

DTi;|  n.  in.  violent  rain.,  show- 
er 

p3T  (fut.  cc)  to  cleave^  adhere. 

H.  to  overtahe 
"inn  V.  P.  to  speah 
"lin  n.  in.  tvord 
tJn'i  n.  m.  honey 
T\y^  n.  i.fish 
TiiJ  n.  m.  David 
n^-i  n.  f.  (Drrib-i)  r/c>w 
□■i  n.  m.  blood' 
tr\'t2'^_  n.  f .  liheness 
piriii'i  11.  Damascus 
Pjb'i  V.  K.  H.  to  GTUsh^pulver- 

ize 
"^yi  n.  m.  thistle 
XP\  n.  m.  f.  way 
Kffi'^  V.  K.  tospringup.,  said  of 

grass.  H.  to  cause  tc  spring 

■up.,  bring  forth  gi'ass 
KTi'^  n.  m.  grass 


•n  art.  ^Ae 

n  asks  a  question. 

"i"7n  11.  111.  niagesty 

s^n  m.  N^n ,  i^in  f.  pron.  he, 

sJie,  it,  that 
"in  n.  111.  spilendor 
T\\r\  V.  K.  to  Z'^? 
^'?n  V.  K.  to  (/o,  i^a?^.    II.  to 

cause  to  go,  lead.    Hith.  to 

go  for  one's  self  walk  about 
p,  nsn  int.  (siif.  ""ipn)  Zo  .^ 

behold! 
"2n  adv.  hither 
tibn  V.  K.  to  ^^^r7^-.     N.  to  /^e 

turned.      Hith.     to     ^^rry^ 

O'/ie's  self 
in   n.   m.    (pi.    O'^'^n,    const 

■'in)  mountain 
li'^'^n  n.  m.  conception 

)  COUJ.  dZ?i6? 

SIT  m.  nb?'T  f .  bs ,  n|x  pi.  pron. 

this,  these 
IHT  n.  m.  gold 
n^T  11.  m.  olive-tree,  olive 
"i?T  V.  K.  to  rememher 
"IDT  n.  m.  ??2rt^6 
nbr  n.  f.  (n?T)  .s^^^a^ 
P?T  V.  K.  (fut.  »)  to  cr^ 
npyr  n.  f.  cry 
y^T  V.  K.  to  soiD.    H.  to  pi'o 

duce  seed 
'S'^l  n.  m.  s^'^t? 


178 


HEBRKW-ENGLISII    VOCABULARY. 


sin  V.  H.  to  hide.    N.  Hitli. 

to  hide  one's  self 
nni;;n  n.  f.  apron 
bp'in  n.  Hiddekel^  Tii^ris 
C^n  adj.  neiu 
ttJ'iTi  n.  111.  month 
nbi^n  n.  Havilali 
pin  V.  K.  (f  ut.  a)  to  he  strong 
^n  adj.  (s^t*^)  living^  alive 
T\\r\  11.    f.    (paragog.    vowel 

in;!!!)    life^    living  tiling^ 

heast 
•i^n  V.  K.  to  live 
u'^'^n  n.  m.  pi.  life 
■jilJn  11.  m.  f.  windoto 
b'in  V.  H.  to  hegin 
f^n  V.  P.  to  deliver 
^73n  V.  K.  P.  to  desire.    N. 

to  he  desired 
iffiW  num.  fifth 
■j'bn  11.  m.  Haman 
D-'tsian  wwm.  fifty 
^pn  n.  m.  hindness^  niercy 
non  V.  K.  to  he  diminished., 

to  fail 
^iy)_  n.  111.  (^vS)  ^^f^V 
ann  n.  f.  sword 
tiyr\  adj.  (D^T2-in)  deaf 
*fTCn  i\.  m.  darhness 

ninip  adj.  dean^])\ire 

nna  v.  K.  ^o  Z>e  dean^  'pwre. 

P.  to  purify,  deanse.     N. 

to  he  purified 


3ii2  adj.  ^06>c? 

ri?t2  V.  P.  to  so^7,  defile 

Dii:  adv.  tzo?!  2,6^5,  hefoie 

t^'i  V.  K.   (inf.  const,  nira^) 

to  />(?  c/ry 
nc3^  adj.  f.  ^^'2/  land 
vil  V.  K.  to  ^(?  weary.    P.  II. 

to  tveary,  to  cause  to  toil 
1^  11.  f.  hand 
H'^"^  V.   K.   to   hnoio.    H.    J{r; 

(?«?/se  to  ^?io^^^,  /<?^  ^'^i^c^-^y 
ni^n;'  n.  ni.  Judah 
'^i^n"'  11.  111.  t/'^'t^ 
nVn';'  n,  m.  Jehovah 
Di"'  n.  in.  (D^'a^)  <^<^y 
niii  11.  f.  (Q"".)  dove 
qpii  n.  m.  Joseph 
"i^l    V.    K.    to    hear.,    hring 

forth.     N.  Pu.  to  /;e  ^otti 
•yb^  see  tl?n 
D^  n.  m.  (o^b^)  sea 
ipT.  n.  111.  ./<n^(?(9& 
xi^    V.    K.   to   (76>   out,    go 

forth.    H.  to  cause  to  go 

forth,  hrlny  forth 
pi:>  V.  K.  to  pour 
12^^  V.  K.  (fut.  "^s;^.^)  to  form 
S5^:  V.  K.  (flit.  XT')  to/mr 
nn^'  V.   K.  to   ^o   doxon,  de 

scend 
^'im'\i  n.  Jerusalem 
nyi  n.  m.  7?«^(?<9?i 
iri-'T'  u.  Jericho 


HEBREW-ENGLISH    VOCABULAKY. 


17U 


'  p*!")  n.  m.  greenness 

ttjn;  or  ty^  v.  K.  H.  to  drive 
I      out 

'  "^kyi^  n.  m.  Israel 

21?^  V.  K.  to  sit,  dwell,  in- 
liahit 

^i?:  V.  K.  (flit,  ir:)  to  sleej) 
[  :?tJ'^  n.  m.  salvation 

'  2  prep,  according  to,  as,  lihc 
lis  K.  (flit,  a)  to  he  heavy. 
P.    to   honor.      N.    to   he 
honored 

^riis  n.  m.  honor,  glory 

Tt'ns  V.  K.  P.  to  snhdne.  N. 
to  he  suhdued 

!ib  adv.  thus,  so 

■jniD  n.  m.  priest 

^^is  n.  m.  6'2;<27' 

b^3  V.  P.  (bibs)  ^0  contain 

»^3  n.  m.  6^'w,§7i. 

■^3  conj.  /br,  hecause,  that ; 
after  a  negative  ^y^f^* 

bis  n.  m.  (siif.  i^3)  «//,  every, 
the  tvhoJe 

Sib 3  V.  K.  to  tvithhold,  re- 
strain. N.  to  he  restrained 

nb3  V.  K.  to  come  to  an  end. 
P.  to  complete,  finish.  Pii. 
to  he  finished 

''bs  n.  m.  (D"^b5)  vessel,  article 

f?  adv.  5(9.    11  b?  therefore 

S|53   n.  f.  'Jt'Wi^ 

i«c3  11.  m.  (fii)  throne 


CI95  11.  m.  silver 

5|?  n.  f.  (d:b3)  j96?^y/i  of  the 

liaiid,  sole  of  the  foot 
3^13  11.  m.  cheruh 
tri?  V.  K.  2^c»  <??/?!,  cutoff,  make 

a  covenant.     H.  to  out  off. 

Ho.  ^5<9  he  cut  off' 
C^"nt:'3  u.  in.  pi.  Chaldees 


n:n5  n.  f.  (pL 
nibns)  twnic 


ni:n3,  const 


b  prep,  to,  for 

fii'b  adv.  '^i'C^ 

nb  n.  ni.  (niib)  /^d^rw^; 

33b  n.  111.  (ni)  heart 

©ib  or  TiJib  v.  K.  (fiit.  a)  to 

put   on,  loear,  he  clothed 

with.    H.  to  cause  to  put 

on,  to  clothe 
tsnb  u.  m.  flame 
nnb  n.  m.  f.  hread 
b^b  n.  m.  (nb^b  §  48.  2,  p].  ni) 

night 
V^  V.  K.  to  lodae 
ibfib  see  n^DS 
ibb  V.  K.  to  capture 
nj^b  V.  K.  to  tale.     N.  Pii 

Ho.  to  he  tahen 

1i?'a  adv.  very 

ns^  num.  hundred 

nis^  n.  m.  (a\  and  ni)  light, 

luminary 
bb^i2  n.  m.food 


180 


ILEBREW-ENGLISH    VOCABUI-AUY, 


laii?  n.  ni.  wilderness 

T\'Q  pron.    ivhatf    wliatever  • 

n^y,  rv(±i  for 'wliatf  tvhy? 
^o^'Q  11.  m.  instruction 
l?iTa  n.  m.  (d"^.  and  ni)  season 
ri'i^  V.  K.  to  die.    Ho.  to  be 

])ut  to  death 
ri^  11.  m.  death 
niiT^  11.  m.  (ni)  cdtar 
nioti  n.  f.  bed 

"ibia  V,  H.  to  cause  to  rain 
lisTO  n.  m.  rain 

T       T 

"iia  pron.  ii^Ao  ?  wlioever 

W^^  n.  m.  pL  wetter 

1"''a  n.  m.  species^  hind 

niti  V.  K.  to  sell 

K^ia  V.  K.  to  fill  or  />6/?^?/.    P. 

to/Z^.    N.  Pii.  ^0  be  filled 
nisbt!    n.   f.    (const.    nDsb^. 

suf.  inDsb^  )  '2z;o/'^ 
n'ianbia  n.  f.  tvar^fiejhting 
'^^"I2  V.  K.   to   reign.     H.  to 

cause  to   reign.,  to   maka 

king.   Ho.  to  be  made  king 
^^■a  n.  m.  king 
nsb'a  n.  f.  queen 
n^,Db^  n.  f.  (§  9.  7)  kingdom 
Tqvm   11.    f.    (const,    n 

kingdom 
nbtJTQ^   n.   f.    (const, 

dominion.,  rule 
I'D  n.  m.  tnanna 
p3     prep,     from.,    02it    of; 

b  D"i]|"a  0?^  ^A^  east  of 


niDia  n.  m.  rest 

y':^  V,  K.  to  withhold^  keep 
back.     1^,  to  be  withheld 
'oy-a  n.  a  little 

I2i')9  H.  to  ??z«i;6  6'??i<2^Z  or^/^dw 
■55^^    n.    m.     (d\     and    ni) 

fountain 
by^  adv.  above 
nnyis  n.  f.  (const.  n':,^7a)  cave 
«i^   V.  K.  to  find 
7^2^-0  n.  f.  s?;«i5^/.e 
nii^'a  n.  f.   commandment 
ni|573  n.  m.  gathering  together^ 

collection 
Dip^  n.  m.  f.  (ni)  j^lace 
s'^'a  n.  f.  Mara  (bitter) 
nsnia    n.    m.    sights   appear- 
ance 
iD'in'a  n.  m.  Mordecai 
ntD'a  V.  K.  to  anoint 
'jSTE'a  n.  m.  tabernacle.,  dwell- 
ing 
b»^  V.  K.  to  rule.,  with  2  be- 
fore its  object.  H.  to  (?^ws{ 
to  rw?e 
t:©©!?  n.  m.  judgment 

S53  particle  of  entreaty,  noio^ 

pray.,  I  pray  thee 
*133  V.  H.  to  toZ^.  Ho.  to  Z>^  ?c?6^ 
l^i   prep,  before^  in  the  pres- 
ence of  over  against;  "i^^s- 
cm'responding  to,  a  coun 
terpart 


HEBREW-ENGLISH    ^'O0A^.ULARY. 


181 


Ti}   V.    K.    to  totichy  ^vitb  5 

before  its  object 
li'b  V.  K.  N.  to  approach 
in?  n.  m.  (n*'.  and  rii)  river 
n^3  V.   K.  to  rest.     H.  (nin 

or  n"i3n)   to  cause  to  rest, 

put,  place 
t\l   n.  m.  Noali 
t^n2  n.  m.  serpent 
yb;  V.  K.  to  plant 
•'i32>,3  n.  f.  Naomi  (^siveet) 
"1??  n.  m.  young  man 
ntp  V.  K.  to  breathe,  hloiu 
bB3   V.  K.  to  fall,  fail 
tti\    n.   in.   f.    (n\   and    ni) 

sold,  life 
nij?3  u.  f.  female 
st'p  V.  H.  to  deceive 
D^r;  see  ni^x 
n^'i;?  n.  f.  breath 
fns  V.  P.  to  demolish 
|nj^  V.  K.   to  give,  put.    N. 

Ho.  to  be  given 

SSD  ^^-  K-  ^<5  surround 

■lio  V.  K.  P.  to  6'A^/^5,  shut  np. 

N.  Pu.  to  be  shut.    H.  to 

(fTM/zcse  to  s//t?f«! 
■i?9  V.  N.  to  Z'^  sA'^^?*,  stopped 
P^o  n.  in,  -/'ot'^ 
ISO  V.  P.  to  recount,  tell 

■py  V.  K.  to  s^^"?;^,  i!«7(? 
131P  n.  HL  servant 


"liy  V.  K.   to  p«s5.     H.   to 
(?<:w<.56  to  pass 

1?  prep.  '2^;zto,  'ww^!^7 

n~y    n.  £   company,  assem 
bly 

n?  n.  Eden 

"yys  adv.  2/6/5,  besides 

^^y  n.  m.  sucMing,  babe 

D'iiy  n.    m.    eternity  /   O^iS'b 
forever 

Cjiy  n.  m.  ybwZ,  ^^?'6?s 

:i^y  V.  K.  P.  to  /y 

1^.:?  adj.  blind 

"liy  n.  m.    (ni)  shin 

37^  V.  K.  to  leave,  forsake 

"IT?  u.  m.  help 

iby  V.  P.  to  croivn 

-'^  n.   (with  art.)   Ai 

Vk  n.  f.  (d:'D>3?)  eye 
i''y  n.  f.  (a^i^)  city 
C3n^?    n.  m.  (D'-isn'^y)    iiahed- 

ness,  naked 
"5?  prep,  lipon,  over,  concern- 
ing 
n3^  V.  K.  to  </6>  ?(^.     H.  to 

bring  up,  offer 
nby  11.  m.  leaf 
nbi?  n.  f.  burnt-offering 
^"73.  \i.  m.  ^'i 
D-^i'  see  opiy 

D?  n.  m.  {p^v?)  peop>l6 , 
ny  prep,  ("'iay  or  "'IB^)  i<;e^ 
"lay  \\  K.  to  .sto7i^Z 
isy  n.  m.   (m)  6?ms^ 


182 


HEl}KEW-EN(i  LloU    VOBABULAK Y. 


f?  u.  m.  tree^  and  collectively 
t/)'ees 

y^V,  n.  m.  jpain^  sorrow 

pi^y  n.   m.  pain^  sorrow 

ai^  iL  f.  (d\  and  ni)  lone 

2^^  D.  m.  (const.  2j?y,  pi. 
D"".  and  tii)  A^eZ 

sn:b  n.  m.  f.  (ni)  evening 

i'nb  n.  m.  raven 

Diny  adj.  (nisn?)  ^^^^^^ 

niny  adj.  cunning^  subtle 

3lby  n.  m.  (ni)  lierh 

nir^  V.  K.  ^^o  do^  niake^  pro- 
duce.   N.  to  he  done,  made 

lib?  n.  m.  Esau 

niiny  n.  m.  decade,  ten 

^TW.  num.  tenth 

ri;?  11.  m.  f.  (cniy)  time  in  tlie 
sense  of  duration 

T\T\1i  adv.  ^^o-z/; 

ns  n.  m.  (const.  "^B)  mouth 

tSffijis  n.  Pison 

Qiriicbs  n.  m.  pi.  the  Philistines 

"IS  conj.  ?6S^,  ^A(2^  '^Z'O^ 

cis  n.  m.  pi. /«C6/  ''is^  or 
"i;E-by  hefore,  in  the  pres- 
ence of 

D?S  n.  ni.  f.  time  in  tlie  sense 
of  repetition 

nps  V.  K.  to  open  tlie  eyes. 
N.  to  he  opened 

n^B  V.  K.  P.  H.  to  separate, 
'part.    N.  Pu.  to  he  parted 


nns  V.  K.  to  he  fruitful 
"•is  n.  m.  fruit 
ni?-is  n.  m.  Pharaoh 
127^  n.  Pharpa/}' 
rris  11.  Euphrates 
t2irs  V.  K.  z;o  to^'6  t>jf  clothes 
nns  V.  K.  to  open.    N.  ^0  hi 
opened 

X32  11.  m.  (D\  and  ni)  7ic>s^ 

p^i  n.  m.  righteousness 

nis  V.  P.  to-  command 

\h  n.  f.  Zion 

D^i  n.  m.  innage 

y"^?  n.  f .  (const.  27^S  ,   pi.  Qi ." 

and  ni)  side,  rih 
n'aa  v.  K.  P.  to  sprout,  to  shoot 

forth.  H.  to  cause  to  sprout 
npys  11.  f.  cry 
n-is  n.  f.  (Tn±)  trouhle 

bi|7  V.  P.  to  receive,  accept 

f  3)^  V.  P.  to  gather.  N.  to  he 
gathered 

12)5  V.  K.  to  hurij.  N.  to  he 
hurled 

Dip  n.  m.  east 

rrb'!]?  11.  i.  former  state 

n^np  11.  f.  east 

Trip  V.  K.  (fut.  a^  to  he  holy 
P.  H.  to  sanctfy,  conse- 
crate. N.  Pu.  to  he  sancti 
fied.  Hith.  to  sanctify  oj 
purify  onis  self 


HEBREW-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


1S8 


wip  11.  m.  holiness,  a  Itoly 
2)lace  or  thing 

•^ili?  ^-  N.  to  he  gathered  to- 
gether 

^ip  n.  m.  (Mi)  voice^  sound 

D'lp  V.  K  to  arise 

yip  n.  m.  thor7i 

fibp,  i^p  adj.  {^Vri?)  litil^i 
small 

"it2p  V.  H.  to  hum  incense 

nnibp  n.  f.  incense 

^yp  V.  K.  to  he  light,  dimin- 
ished 

nb^p  n.  f.  a  curse 

f  p  n.  m.  end 

nip  n.  m.  end 

s-np  V.  K.  to  call.  N.  Pa.  to 
he  called 

nnp  V.  K.  (flit,  a)  to  come 
near,  a/pproacli.  H.  to 
bring  near,  offer 

^tlp  V.  K.  to  rend 

nij"!  V.  K.  (flit,  with  Vav 
Kn'^1)  to  see.  N.  to  he 
seen,  aj)])ear 

nJiii  n.  m.  (D"^ii'i«^)  head,  source 

n'^ict^T  n.  f,  heginning 

'2r\  adj.   (ns"^.)  much,  many 

rin  V.  K.  to  Z'6  many,  mul- 
tiply intrans.  P.  H.  (inf. 
abs.  s^snn)  to  make  many, 
multiply  trans. 

••^lan  num.  fourth 

b-S  n.  f.   {pl7>;i)  foot 


nin  V.  K.  to  ^'^^-^t^,  A«(y(?  <:/(•• 

minion 
Q"^t:n"i  11.  m.  pi.  troughs 
n^n  n.  m.  f .  (ni)  breath,  wind. 

Spirit 
yii  V.  K.  to  ^'-w^ 
D^fin  adj.  merciful 
C'^n'^  n.  m.  pi.  mercies,  cmn- 

passions 
^rn   V.    P.   to  brood,   hover 

over 
Vnt'  ^-  K-  to  '?t^«sA 
^■•1  V.  K.  to  contend 
iiJi?^  V.  K.  to  cr(f6^ 
tei3"}    11.    m.   creeping   thing ^ 

reptile 
yn  adj.   (nyn)  /;«4  &nl 
nyn  n.  m.  famine 
nyn  n.  f.  eiJ^^ 
?"'P"^  n.  m.  jirmamcid 

vrm  n.  m.   (OV  and  rn")  ^g/<j 
xr^  n.  m.  ^^^sA,  shrub 

D^il)    V.    K.    to  J9?fl5C6 

^iic  V.  H..  to  Z>6  loise^  act  wisely 
rrabio  n.  f.  garment 
nnr©  n.  f.  gladness 
pi?  n.  m.  sacTccloth 
qniD  V,  K.  to  Z>7f?'7z- 
■jiiiio  n.  m.  Jc*^/ 

iT^nsTD  11.  f.  remnant 
''b'^'it  num.  seventh 
yn©  V.  N.  to  swea/r 


184 


HEBREW-ENGLISH    V^OCABULARY. 


•w^  nibniD  11.  m.  seventeen 

niiD  V.  P.  to  break  in  pieces 

nniH  V.  K.  (flit.  0  and  a)  to 
rest,  cease,  keep  Sabbath. 
H.  to  cause  to  rest  or  cease 

nil?  n.  111.  f.  (suf.  ina^)  Sab- 
bath 

Dn"iD  n.  m.  onyx 

n^ffi  V.  K.  to  return.  P.  H.  to 
cause  to  return,  bring  bach 

5)1©  V.  K.  to  bruise,  crush 

nnic  V.  H.  to  destroy 

n''t3  V.  K.  to  put 

litrj  V.  K.  to  lie  down 

niiE)  V.  K.  to  forget 

tjiia  V.  K.  to  subside 

bD©  V.  K.  (fut.  a)  to  be  be- 
reaved.    P.  to  bereave 

DDT»  V.  H.  to  rise  early 

■}iTU  V.  K.  to  dwell.  P.  H.  to 
cause  to  dioell,  to  station 

n'?Tr  V.  K.  P.  H.  to  send,  send 
away,  put  forth 

'^ttJ-'bTJ?  num.  third 

?Tb'T»  V.  H.  to  cast 

nribiE  11.  m.  Solomon 

DTT  adv.  there ;  n^i^  thither 

Die  n.  m.  (ni)  name 

bs^ttic  n.  ra.  Samuel 

D^'aTU  n.  m.  pi.  heaven 

I'aic  n.  m.  oil 

yqt  Y.  K.  to  hear,  witli  a 
direct  object  or  with  3 ; 
io  hearken 


nttiT!'  v.K.  to  keep,  observe.  TsJ, 

to  keep  one's  self,  take  heed 
ID')?  to  n.  m.  f.  s^m 
niilj  n.  f.  (D"".)  year 
^i'SS  n.  m.  crimson 
itp  num.  second 
D^'Sirr  m.  D^nip  f.  num.  tioo 
rT'D'C*  adv.  (T/^  second  time 
ny©  n.  m.  f.  (a\)  ^(^^^^ 
nfiBTS  n.  f.  handmaid 
Hj^Trf  V.  H.  to  cause  to  drink^ 

to  water 
b]?©"  n.  m.  shekel 
'f'"]©"  V.  K.  to  creep,  teem  with 

increase  abundantly 
y"}!?  n.  m.  creeping  thiiig,  rep 

tile 
'^'^t  num.  sixth 

niijin  n.  f.  desire 

nixn  n.  f.  {p"" .)  fig-tree,  fig 

nin  n.  f.  ark 

inn  n.  m.  desolateness 

Dinn  n.  m.  f.  (ni)  ocean,  the 

deep 
tfW  11.  m.  midst 
ni'ibin  n.  f.  pL  generations 
nnn  prep,  under,  instead  of 
T^an  n.  m.  sea-monster 
"isn  V.  K.  to  S6W 
iasn  V.  K.  to  lay   hold  of 

seize 
rra'inn  n.  f.  deep  sleep 
T]p^Wr\  n.  f.  destine 


'6j^&<<-u^ 


ENGLISH-HEBREW  VOCABULARY, 


Aaron  fins? 

above  b^i: 

to  accept  ^?]?  P. 

according  to  3 

on  account  of  "\^35? 

to  adhere  p4'^  K. 

after  "iiii? 

Alidb  ai?n« 

Ai  "rsiy) 

alive  "'H 

all  bb 

«Zso  pi? ,  D5 

AnianaTi  ^^ai? 

^0  anoint  )i©:q  K. 

ajpron  nniiin 

i^o  appear  nsn  N. 

appearance  nj^"))? 

^c  approach  ©^3  K.  N. 

K. 
<Jo  <^/*^S(?  D'np  K. 

article  "'bs 


nnp 


C?«    3  ,    -UDK3 


assembly  iTi? 

bahe  bv 

bdellium  nb'^a 

/o  ^6  rv^T)  K. 

^0  ^e^T-  {bring  forth)  'ib^  K 

^6<25^  (domesticated)  ^lipna 

beast  (wild)  Ji^n 

because  nioj*,   13 

before  adv.  D'ltJ 

^efwe  prep.  "15 i  ,  i.DSb  ,  •'JD-f^j; 

^^o  ^e^wi  bbn  11. 

beginning  nii^xn 

beliold  in ,  nin 

benefit  bi^a 

^0  bereave  bbis  P. 

i!6>  ^^  bereaved  bb©  K. 

besides  liS' 

betiveen  X"^ 

birds  V^V 


186 


E]S  GLISH-HEBREW    VOOAB ULARY. 


to   bless    ^"DS    K.    (only   in 
pass,  part.)  P. 

hlessing  HDns 

blind  ^?:? 

blood  D'n 

to  blow  nap  K. 

bone  D2^ 

to  be  born  "l^^  N. 

bread  nnV 

^0  ^r^«^  in  pieces  "i^T?  P. 

to  breathe  nap  K. 

to  Z>?'m^  55ia  H. 

to  Z>?m(7  ^ac/i'  nw  P.  H. 

to  bring  fortli  s^^  H. 

to  bring  forth  cliildren  'ib^  H. 

to  bring  forth  grass  KtC'^  H. 

to  Z'rm^  7i(?6?r  I"!!)?  H. 

to  bring  up  S^^?  H. 

to  Z'ro(?(/  qnT  P. 

brother  ns 

to  bruise  ^^  K. 

to  ^>^^/^/  re^  K. 

to  burn  tqnto  K. 

to  i^/'r^i  incense  it:]?  H. 

hurnt-offering  nbi? 

to  ^?^?'^  1?]?  K. 

but  (after  a  negative)  "^3 

to  m/Z  snj5  K. 
to  capture  1?^  K. 
to  cast  ^t  TL 


cave  n'li^'a 
to  <?<?«se  rinis 
Ohaldees  B^'^ii?? 
cherub  ITO 
city  t:? 
c?^<27i  "linn 
to  ^e  clean  int:  K. 
to  cleanse  "int?  P. 
to  cleave  (adhere)  P5'U  K. 
to  (i(?^7ie  TiJnb  H. 
to   Je  clothed  with  ®n^  oi 
uJnbK. 

collection  nnjp'a 

to  C6'?7ze  i^iSi  K. 

to  <?o?;^^  71.(5(2?'  ^"DI?  K. 

to  command  ni2  P. 

commandment  n^sia 

company  <Ti? 

compassions  d'^'sh'i 

to  complete  nb|  P. 

conception  '}i''^n 

concerning  by 

to  consecrate  tJ'!]?  P.  H. 

to  contain  b'i3  P. 

to  contend  3'^'?  K. 

corresponding  to  1533 

counterpart  1^33 

covenant  rriia 

to  (?r6(ito  s*';'^  K. 

to  c?Y^<?/.)  to-an  K.,  f'lTB  K. 

creeping  tiling  toti'i,  yt'f 

crimson  "^pi? 

to  crown  "tu^  P. 


ENGLlSH-HEBliKW^    VOCABULAllY. 


187 


to  crush  PI?"?  K.  H.,  qitj  K. 

cry  n^yr ,  npya 

to  cry  p?T  K. 

cunning  Diiy 

to  ctirse  nns  K.  P. 

€U7'se  nbbp 

Oiish  T13^ 

^0  cut  nn|  K. 

if<?  C7/-25  off  n-]3  K.  H. 

Damascus  pic'ia'i 
da/i'hness  l\tr\ 
daughter  tia 
David  'T?'^ 

to  he  put  to  death  ni^  Ho. 

decade  I'lW 

to  deceive  iiirs  H. 

^Ae  (^<?^  t3inri 

to  6/^/^6  bxa  P.,  pjit:  P. 

to  deliver  f  ^0  ?• 

to  demolish  ^O?  K. 

to  de^scend  T^^  K. 

c^mr^  s^D^.P*,  np^irfn 

to  desire  "i^n  K.  P. 

desolateness  inn 

to  destroy  "inx  P.,  nn©  H. 

to  ^^^  n^X3  K. 

to  divide  ^'13  H. 

to  f/o  ntey  K. 

dominion  nbiS'a'a 

to  ^<jw^  dominion  nil  K. 


to  cause  to  drink  npw  H. 
to  6^/'/^;e  o?^?^  icn^  K.  P.,  m-v 

or  ffin^^  K.  H. 
d/ry  land  niE'ia;} 
to  ^<3  (^-y  TCn^  K. 
dust  nsy 

to  ^/w^?z  31?:  K-,  i=T?  "k:. 

dwelling  ^^tni 

each  TC^K 

to  rise  early  ddts  H. 

^«S25  nnp,  nmp 

6'/i  the  east  of  b  o'l^'a 

to  m^;  bD«  K. 

Eleazar  "iT^bi? 

^^^'  ''bj? 

e7nptiness  i<i^ 

to  com^  to  «?2.  ^^i^/  nbs  K 

enmity  nn'^s 

eternity  nbiy 
Euphrates  tT\^ 
even  Sis? ,  Q5 
evening  nn:? 

e-y^?  adj.  S'T ,  11.  TO^ 

^2/6  r? 


ENGLISII-HEHRE W    V  OC AB  U L A K Y . 


face  D?5^,  s''?2 
to  fail  bss  K. 
to  fall  bs?  K. 
fami/ie  ^yn 
father  3X 
to  fear  ^T^ 
female  •^^)?2 
/o  m«/^6  /(jz^^  t2?)2  H. 
/6^/J  n-ito 

fjghting  <^^57^^ 
^(?//^  sb^  K.'  P. 
^0  find  s|ti  K. 
ifo  finisli  nbs  P. 

firmament  ?'^pT 

flame  tsnb 

/'o  /?/  qiy  K.  P. 
food  bDi?:^ 

/(9/'  coDJ.  ''^  ,  j^rep.  b 
forever  obiyb 
to  forget  nsiD  K. 
io  form  "^V,  K. 
former  state  •^^"7)? 
to  forsake  sty  K. 

from  113 


^^(^  he  fruitful  nns  K. 
^5t>  ^'e/^ZZ  sb)9  K. 

garden  15 

garment  'r^a ,  nribte 

^«^!(?  "i?i2J 

to  ^«/^Af7"  f nj5  P. 

to  ^6  gatliered  togethei  TX^^^  N. 

gatliering  together  nijpia 

generations  niibin 

Giheon  p^nii 

6^?7^(9/i  lin-^a 

to  </^'^;6  10?  K. 

to  ^?.'y6^  ^/^At!  "liii  H. 

gladness  nnritp 

to  go  ^bn  K. 

to  ^6>  doion  T^i^  K. 

to  gofort\  go  out  ^%*i  K. 

to  go  up  nby  K. 

p'o?^:?  nriT 

good  iii3 

God'^ifi,  Q^nbx 

_^?'e«?5  bins 
to  be  great  b^a  K. 
to  make  great  b'la  P. 
greenness  VT: 
ground  n'a'i^ 

half  ^sn 
Haman  1'cn 


KNGLISJI-IIEBKEW     VOCABULARY. 


I8fl 


handmaid  nriBip 

Havilali  !^'?"^)n 

he  Nin 

head  TC'sh 

to  hear  3/^^to  K. 

to  hearhen  571?  ir  K. 

7i6<^'/'?  nb ,  nsb 

heaven  wf&t 

to  he  heavy  "i??  K. 

to  talce  heed  "i^t?  N. 

heel  2]?:? 

Aer5  lis? 

Hiddeicel  bj^'nn 

^c)  7i2^6  «2n  H. 

hither  nan 

^0  Za^/  Ac?Z^  ^  i»si?  K. 

holiness  ®'^p 

/(?  J^  7io?2/  1^1^  K. 

honey  t'^'i 

honor  lias 

^<?  honor  ^53  P. 

^"0  ^6»v6;r  ov^T*  Sinn  P. 

much  mo7'e  id. 
husband  !»''« 

•    -:   7  •       T 

if^^ 

image  obi 


-hoiv 


incense  Mtiuj? 

^0  ^«^r;i  incense  luj?  IL 

to  increase  abundantly  "^"yt  K 

indeed  Dp'aN 

^0  inhabit  mc;"  K. 

instead  of  rinn 

instruction  "19^'D 

/6r«^^  bsnto;' 

Jehovah  nin^ 
Jericho  'ifTin;> 
Jerusalem  pbci'^i' 

Joseph  vipi'i 

Judah  T\y\r\i 
judgment  'wm 

to  'keep  "i^TO  K. 

^<9  ^^6^  ^«Ci?j  y:'a  K. 

^(?  ^^6^  Sabbath  nnio  K 

^716?  n.  "J"^^ 

kindness  10^ 

^m^  tjb"b 

^<9  7/ia^6  king  ^bia  H. 

kingdom  n^Dbia ,  nDbiatt 

to  let  know  TV)  H. 
land  n^7N,  -px 


190 


ENGLISH-HEBREW    VOCABULAKY. 


to  lead  ^'?n  H. 

leaf  nby 

to  leave  at5  K. 

lest  "jB 

to  lie  down  a^to  K. 

life  n^n,  D^rn,  ts: 

light  nis 

a  light  nis^ 

^6)  give  light  "iis5  H. 

liheness  J^^^'n 

a  little  12?^ 
i56>  Z^'y6  "^rn,  n^iri  K. 
living  "^n 
living  thing  fi«n 
?o/  in,  nan 

^0  ^of/^6  r^  K. 

lord  xn^ ,  b?i 

^c  ?oz;6  anij  K. 
luminary  "lia^'a 

majesty  "iin 

^(?  w«^6  nto:?  K. 

^0  7?2(2^(?  a  covenant  nns  K. 

^c>  makefeio  or  small  ti^'a  H. 

to  77?<i^/i^6  ^m^  tyb'a  H. 

to  mahe  many  nnn  P.  H. 

male  "iST 

young  man  "^yi 
manna  "{Ta 
many  2"? 


to  /-(e  many  nnn  K. 

master  ";ini$ 
mercies  D'^'onn 
merciful  D^nn 
mercy  190 
midst  tf^ri 

month  iB'in 
moon  nn^ 
Mordecai  ^Tfp^ 
Wyoming  ^^3 
mother  D^ 
mouth  ns 
mwcA  3T 

to  maltiply  intrans.  na^  K. 
trans,  nnn  P.  H. 

naked  Di"i^ 
nalcedness  ot? 

Naomi  "^^2)3 
nation,  ''i^ 

to  hring  near  a"!*!?  H. 
to  ^6'r/i<?  ?«^-^«?'  a'np  K. 

nostril  ^ 

not  b« ,  ''n^a ,  ^"s 

^/ie?'^  ?'s  wc^  or  was  710?  r^ 

7^(9^  2/<?^!  DVJ 

w<?w  (entreaty)  »;,(time)  nn? 


KNGLLSII-HEBREW    VOCABULARY. 

fo  observe  "itt©  K. 


1»1 


ocean  ainn 

io  ofcr  nby  H.,  anj?  H. 

oil  I'QtC 

olive,  olive-tree  fr^T 

one  nnfi? 

t>;iz/iC  cr.iz: 

to  open  nns  K. 

to  <9p(?7z,  the  eyes  n^s  K. 

a?'  (iu  a  disjunctive  question) 

out  of  "Jl? 
over  V? 

over  against  ip, 
ovei'tahe  pa^  H. 

;pain  asy ,  "lini^y 
to]^art  ins  K.  P.  H. 

people  D? 
to peinsh  ^3S  K. 
Plmraoli  ni^ns 
PKarijar  "isns 
Philistines  D"'ncbs 
pillar  Tr\t^_ 
Pison  ]"iK'"'D 

to  place  n^3  H.,  n-"©  K. 

tojjlant  yt33  K. 

to  po?^r  ps^  K. 

J97'<a^^  /   I  pray  thee  «?  • 

i^Ti  the  presence  of  "1!^^  ,  ■'.?s'? , 

priest  'JTO 

to  produce  ntey  K. 


to  prochice  seed  ynr  H. 
to  pulverize  V9y\  K.  H. 

to  he  pure  "ini:  K. 
to  purify  "ir.-j  P. 
to  purify  one's  self  tJ-ip  Hitli 
to/>?^i;  m:  H,,  in:  K,,  n->;D  K. 
to  put  forth  nb©  K.  P. 
to  ^i^^  o;i  clothes  ttJ'nb  or  TD'nl: 
K. 

queen  nsbia 

to  (?a2^S(?  to  rain  TJ'a  H 
to  receive  bnp  P. 
to  recount  "iso  P. 
to  redeem  bjia  K. 
to  ?'<?/^;i  ?fb^  K. 
to  remember  iST  K. 
remnant  ri''">i?© 
to  r<?/i^  ynp  K. 

respecting  "bx 

to  y6'6>^  n^3  K.,  naio  K. 

to  return  intrans.  SiO  K, 

rib  iy% 
rigldeousness  P7^ 

to  r/6^6  (?«;'/y  DDTD   H. 

river  "inp 

to  roll  bba  K. 

to  ?'z^Z6  bisia  K.,  rnn  K. 


V32 


ENGLlSil-lIEBKEW    VOCABULAKY, 


to  run  1fr\  K. 

Sahhath  na© 

to  heej)  Sahhatli  fis©  K. 

sackcloth  pi? 

salvation  S^i?^ 

Samuel  -s-i^tJ? 

to  sanctify  TSn^  P.  H. 

to  say  n^s  K. 

sea  t3^ 

sea  monster  V?!? 

season  n?"!^ 

second  ''?© 

«  second  time  JT'pi? 

to  produce  seed  5"?T   H. 

to  sell  ">?^  K. 

^c>  sendy  send  away  nbo  K, 
P.  H. 

to  separate  ^na  H.,  ^ns  K.  P. 
H. 

separation  ^a 
serpent  icns 
servant  1^? 
/"(?  56'?'?;^  W  K. 

to  shine  "^i^  K.  N. 

to  shoot  forth  r\m  K.  P. 

shruh  'ny^ 

to  shut,  shut  vp  "i?o  K. 


side  y^? 

sight  nsn^ 

silver  £ic| 
6'/6'i5fr  nins 
^6>  sit  nis^^ 

^0   5/^^   "JT?^    K. 

deep  sleep  n^'nnn 

to  make  small  tsytt  H. 
so  lis,  II 
^0  so^7  5l?t?  P. 
Solomon  rib"b© 

sorrow  a^^ ,  I'ia^y 

sound  'sip 
sou/rce  ifi'iii 
i^o  soi^  y'^T  K. 
z!(>  5^e«^  ■^5'^  P. 
species  T'a 
spirit  n^"^ 
splendor  lin 

^c>  spring  up  (said  of  grass) 
JJTC'J   K. 

to  sprout  rrcs  K.  P. 

to  sto?^^/  ^^V  K. 

stor  nDis 

to  station  l^ii?  P.  H. 

sto^?^<?  nn^^ 

sto%<5  12s$ 

to  />e  strong  ptn  K. 


ENGLIS5JIIKBKKW     V0CAJ3ULARY. 


VJ?^ 


to  mhdae  tj'n?  K.  P. 
subtle  ^r\'Ji 
suchling  ^^^ 
sun  TU^.Tp 

to  siiTvoiind  sno  K. 
to  swear  yn;r  N. 
sweat  nyr 
sivord  ly"] 

vabernacle  I?®''? 

to  take  n^b  K. 

to  tale  of  clothes  t:n?s  H. 

to  teem  with  yn©  K. 

to  tell  n?3  H.,  nsD  P. 

^e?ii5  bni5 

^/i«^  conj.  iffi6?,  ■'S,  pron.  s^n 

that  not  "JS 

then  TS 
therefore  f?  ~y 

thither  stdto 
thorn  "pip 

throne  s^c? 

Tigris  ^p'in 
^0  ^z7^  "13?  K. 
^me  (duration)  n? 
^iwe  (repetition)  cyD 
''O  -b« ,  ^ 

9 


to  cause  to  toil  vy^  P.  H. 

^o  i56»?/<?/i  y?2  K. 

tree^  trees  V? 

trouble  nns 

troughs  o'^tpnn 

^0  be  found  true  "j^s  N, 

to  /?^r72,  ^sn  K. 
tioo  u-^'vt 

under  nHP) 
until  "T? 
?^;zto  "bj$ ,  II 
T//,?^?^  b? 
t/y*  lis 

vapor  IS? 

to  ^e  verified  l^i?  N. 

virgin  nbina 

to  w«?/?^  ^bn  K. 

to  ivalh  about  ^bn  Hith. 

to  ^^.'^/i  f  H"?  K' 

water  D^'b 

to  w^tor  npc  H. 

way  T!r\ 

to  ivear  tJsb  or  wab  BL 

to  weary  "ST^  P.  H. 

to  be  'uieary  n;"  K. 


194 


ENGl.ISllirEEREW    VOCABULARY. 


well  u.  "liis 
whM?  ntt 
whatever  ma 
whence  f  l^i?^ 
where?  ''S,  n?S 
which  "iii^'x 
whither?  nix 

whoever  "'W 
t^;7ioZ6  ^3 

wilderness  "^"T"- 
wind  T]T\ 


ivindow  ns'iN 

wing  CiyS 

to  he  wise  ^?io  H. 

to  act  -wisely  ^219  H. 

toith  tii?,  a,  cy 

2:0  toitlihold  «^3  K.,  ??tt  K 

woman  niBS 

young  rnan  "T?b 


j-t  ^^',  ^n^ 


/*-  -^ 


